CITY OF GLENDALE FIRE DEPARTMENT
FIRE STATION NO. 28 RENOVATION
GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA
PROJECT MANUAL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
PROJECT #: 17052.01 MAY 10, 2019
(REVISION JULY 19, 2019)
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary 01 23 00 Alternates 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 42 00 References 01 45 23 Testing & Inspection 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution Requirements 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 01 74 19 Construction Waste management 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training 01 81 19 Construction Indoor Air Quality 01 81 23 Noise and Vibration Control
DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 Demolition PMSM
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork SWA 03 20 00 Reinforcing Steel SWA 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete SWA
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
DIVISION 5 - METALS 05 12 00 Structural Steel SWA 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing SWA
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
TABLE OF CONTENTS 2
DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry SWA 06 16 43 Gypsum Sheathing PMSM 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry PMSM 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework PMSM
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation PMSM 07 27 00 Air Barrier PMSM 07 42 13 Metal Screen Wall PMSM 07 51 13 Cold Process Built-Up Asphalt Roofing System PMSM 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim PMSM 07 84 00 Fire Stopping PMSM 07 92 05 Joint Sealers PMSM
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames PMSM 08 14 29 Prefinished Wood Doors PMSM 08 14 76 Bifolding Wood Doors PMSM 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows PMSM 08 71 00 Door Hardware ALLEGION 08 80 00 Glazing PMSM
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09 05 61 Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation PMSM 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies PMSM 09 22 00 Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board PMSM 09 24 00 Portland Cement Plaster PMSM 09 30 00 Tiling PMSM 09 65 13 Resilient Flooring Base PMSM 09 68 13 Carpet Tile PMSM 09 91 00 Painting and Coating PMSM
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 14 24 Signage PMSM 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories PMSM
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 36 60 Countertops PMSM
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
TABLE OF CONTENTS 3
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Protection GM 21 13 13 Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems GM
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing GM 22 05 19 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping GM 22 05 23 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping GM 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment GM 22 05 48 Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment GM 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment GM 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation GM 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping GM 22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties GM 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping GM 22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties GM 22 34 00 Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters GM 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures GM 22 47 00 Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers GM
DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC GM 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment GM 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment GM 23 05 48 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment GM 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment GM 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC GM 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation GM 23 11 23 Natural Gas Piping GM 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping GM 23 31 13 Metal Ducts GM 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories GM 23 34 43 Ceiling Fans GM 23 37 13 Grilles, Registers and Diffusers GM 23 81 26 Split System Air Conditioners GM
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical GM 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables GM 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems GM 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems GM 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems GM 26 24 16 Panelboards GM 26 27 26 Wiring Devices GM 26 51 00 Interior Lighting GM
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
TABLE OF CONTENTS 4
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 17 23 Pavement Markings PMSM
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
EXHIBIT A Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials – Fire Station 28 LA Testing Test Report: Lead in Paint Chips – Fire Station 28 LA Testing
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1
SECTION 01 10 00
SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Type of the Contract.
3. Work phases.
4. Use of premises.
5. Owner's occupancy requirements.
6. Work restrictions.
7. Specification formats and conventions.
8. Deferred Approvals.
9. Pollution Control.
10. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan.
11. Lead-Containing materials.
12. Additional DSA requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit written statement of responsibility per CBC 1706A.1
B. R & B Schultz Early Childhood Education Building
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: City of Glendale Fire Department Fire Station 28 Renovation
1. Project Location: 4410 New York Ave, Glendale, CA 91214
B. Owner: City of Glendale
C. Architect: PMSM.
D. The Work consists of the following:
1. The Work includes exterior and interior renovations to building residential and work areas.
The work is inclusive of architectural, structural and mechanical renovations.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2
2. The intent of these drawings and specifications is that the alteration, rehabilitation or
reconstruction is to be in accordance with Title 24, California Code of Regulations. Should
any existing conditions such as deterioration or non-complying construction be discovered
which is not covered by the contract documents wherein the finished work will not comply
with Title 24, California Code of Regulations, a Construction Change Document, or a
separate set of plans and specifications, detailing and specifying the required repair work
shall be submitted to and approved by the City of Glendale before proceeding with the
repair work.
1.5 TYPE OF CONTRACT
A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.6 WORK PHASES
A. The Work shall be conducted in single phase.
1.7 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated
on Drawings by the Contract limits.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project
site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public.
2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and
available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use
these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
1.8 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction
period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate
Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations.
Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities
without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
B. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and
to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion,
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 3
provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of
equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of building.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for
occupied portions of building.
1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. On-Site Work Hours:
1. Comply with General Conditions.
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
1.10 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 49-
division format and CSI's Master Format 2004 numbering system.
1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are
not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine
numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the
Specifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words
implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be
interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as
the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 4
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
1.11 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Provide positive methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of the soil, water
or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from the construction operations.
1.12 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP)
A. The contractor shall submit a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan for approval by the City’s
Public Works and Community Development Departments. The plan shall show erosion control
measures and indicate locations of staging, fueling, equipment and employee parking, and
storage/stockpile locations. Locations for concrete washout shall be shown, as well as gravel site
entrances and/or metal grates to keep soil from being deposited on City streets. The plan shall
note that street sweeping shall occur as often as necessary, to ensure that no dirt or dust will
remain on City streets. Drip pans shall be used under parked equipment and visqueen shall be
shown on the plan to protect the soil in the fueling area. Only minor vehicle maintenance shall
occur on-site. Maintenance shall occur in the fueling area and soil shall be protected by drip pans
and visqueen.
B. Prepare a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and file a Notice of Intent with the
State Water Resources Control Board for this project. The SWPPP will provide Best
Management Practice (BMP) methods and controls for wet weather grading activities and erosion
control for both onsite and offsite improvements, in accordance with the requirements of the
NPDES General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity. The
SWPPP shall include an erosion control plan.
1.13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
A. Noise and Dust Control: As specified in General Conditions.
1.14 LEAD-CONTAINING MATERIALS.
A. The Contractor shall assume that all ceramic tile and painted or varnished surfaces in the school
district contain detectable levels of lead which trigger compliance with California Code of
Regulation, Title 8, Section 1532.1. In addition, waste products from these materials could
contain lead at levels which are subject to the hazardous waste requirements in the California
Code of Regulations, Title 22, Sections 666260.1 - 66263.12 and 66268.1 - 66268.124 and the
health and Safety Code Section 25157.8 and 25163, subdivision (c).
B. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to handle and dispose of these materials in accordance with
the regulations. If failure to comply with these regulations results in a site or worker
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 5
contamination, the Contractor will be held solely responsible for all costs involved in any required
corrective action.
C. Lead-based paint should be removed only by professionals trained in hazardous material removal.
A trained professional must follow very detailed procedures to minimize, control and contain lead
dust generated by the removal process.
1. The room should be sealed from the rest of the building. All furniture, carpets and drapes
should be removed.
2. Workers should wear respirators designed to avoid inhaling lead.
3. No eating or drinking should be allowed in the work area. All food and eating utensils
should be removed from the room. All cabinets as well as food contact surfaces should be
covered and sealed.
4. Occupants should be kept out of the room until the job is completed.
5. Clothing worn in the room should be disposed of after working. The work clothing should
not be worn in other areas of the building.
6. Debris should be cleaned up using special vacuum cleaners with HEPA (high efficiency
particle absorption) filters. A wet mop should be used after vacuuming.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 1
SECTION 01 23 00
ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in
the Contract Documents.
1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract
Sum.
1.4 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work
of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in
writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or
deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to
alternates.
C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D. All substitutions affecting access compliance safety, fire life safety, or structural safety shall be
considered as Construction Change Document or Addenda, and shall be approved by the City of
Glendale prior to fabrication and installation.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ALTERNATES 01 23 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE
A. As indicated on Drawings.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 1
SECTION 01 26 00
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after Contract award.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect may issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, or Changes not affecting the
Structural Safety, Access Compliance or Fire & Life Safety portions of the work, on
AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions" or an equivalent form acceptable
to the City of Glendale.
1.4 REQUESTS FOR PROPOSAL (RFP)
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect may issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal Requests issued are for information only. Do not consider them instructions
either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a
quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary
to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 - 2
d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish
times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE PROCESS
A. Changes or alterations of the approved plans or specifications after a contract for the work has
been let affecting the Structural, Access or Fire-Life Safety portions of the project shall be made
only by means of Construction Change Documents submitted to and approved by City of Glendale
prior to commencement of the work shown thereon. Construction Change Documents shall
comply with the City of Glendale’s Construction Change Document Submittal and Approval
Process requirements. All Construction Change Documents and supplementary drawings shall
be stamped and signed by the architect or engineer in general responsible charge of observation
of the work of construction of the project and by the architect or registered engineer delegated
responsibility for observation of the portion of the work of construction affected by the change
order, shall bear the approval of the City of Glendale and shall indicate the associated change in
the project cost, if any. One copy of each Construction Change Document is required for the files
of the City of Glendale.
B. Construction Change Documents shall be signed by Architect of Record, Structural Engineer
(when applicable), Delegated Professional Engineer (when applicable), and the City of Glendale.
C. No changes shall be made to approved documents without the City of Glendale’s approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1
SECTION 01 29 00
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative
requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule
and Submittals Schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum
to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for
Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and
schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
b. Submittals Schedule.
c. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days
before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. No payment applications will be signed by the Architect prior to the Contractor submitting,
and the Architect reviewing, a schedule of values.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 2
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.
3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.
b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value.
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to
total 100 percent.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and
stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified,
include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.
7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times:
1. The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and
Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is
the period indicated in the Agreement.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 3
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Products list.
5. Schedule of unit prices.
6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
7. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
8. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
9. Copies of building permits.
10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.
11. Initial progress report.
12. Report of preconstruction conference.
13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
15. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.
G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that
taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 4
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1 RFI FORM
RFI FORM
Project: RFI No: Project No: To: Date: From:
Subject: Discipline: Category Specification Section Title: Section Number: Page: Article/Paragraph: Sheet Number: Detail:
Question: Suggestion:
Attachment: Undersigned certifies:
• Both drawings and specification sections were thoroughly reviewed.
• Processing time for frivolous RFIs will be charged back to Contractors at A/E billable rates.
Desired Response Date: (However, A/E still have specified days to respond.) Cost Impact: $ Schedule Impact: days Drawing Impact: Submitted by: Signed: Date:
Answer: Answered by:
Signed: Date:
Copies: Owner Consultants
File
1. A/E review of or responses to RFI's shall not constitute an approval, direction, or procedure related to the construction site safety precautions, procedures, or methodology of the Contractor.
2. The use of a RFI is limited to clarification of the contract documents. Contractor will limit each RFI to a single issue. Information that is discernable from the contract documents; construction means and methods; product substitution submittals; product submittals; and construction site safety will not be addressed by the A/E in responding to a RFI.
3. A/E response to a RFI is not a change order or directive authorizing an increase in construction cost or time.
End of RFI Form
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 2 RFI FORM
Blank Page
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1
SECTION 01 31 00
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Project meetings.
2. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
3. Project Coordination
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and
control points.
3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or
after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required
for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 2
C. Each Prime Contractor shall participate in these coordination requirements. Each Prime Con-
tractor shall advise during Progress Meetings, the status of overall coordination progress. When
necessary, such as in congested spaces where multiple prime contracts are involved, the prime
contractors shall meet with the Architect, Owners Representative and other prime contractors
involved to resolve critical coordination areas.
D. In the event of coordination disputes or questions, the prime contractors involved shall submit
the question or dispute to the Architect. The Architect will provide specific direction relating
to the question or dispute. The Owner will not consider requests for additional time or com-
pensation associated with direction provided to prime contractors in response to coordination,
questions, or disputes.
E. Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for installation of products
and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited
space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of differ-
ent components.
F. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
2. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
4. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
5. Delivery and processing of submittals.
6. Progress meetings.
7. Pre-installation conferences.
8. Project closeout activities.
9. Startup and adjustment of systems.
10. Project closeout activities.
G. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
11. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated
into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are
designated as Owner's property.
1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 3
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the
meeting.
4. Frequency of Attendance by Architect: Limited by Architect/Owner Contract.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction,
at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the
Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the
meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Phasing, if any.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
f. Procedures for RFIs.
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Preparation of Record Documents.
l. Use of the premises.
m. Work restrictions.
n. Owner's occupancy requirements.
o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
p. Construction waste management and recycling.
q. Parking availability.
r. Office, work, and storage areas.
s. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
t. First aid.
u. Security.
v. Progress cleaning.
w. Working hours.
3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. The Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 4
d. Related Change Orders.
e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work
and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings
with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do
so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 5
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Status of correction of deficient items.
14) Field observations.
15) RFIs.
16) Status of proposal requests.
17) Pending changes.
18) Status of Change Orders.
19) Pending claims and disputes.
20) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised
schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.5 RFIs:
A. General:
1. Contractor may submit a RFI to the Architect seeking clarification or interpretation of the
contract documents. If in the Contractor's opinion the nature of the RFI requires a
discussion, rather than simply an answer, the Contractor shall call the Architect to have
such a discussion. The results of that discussion as well as all other RFI's must be presented
in writing on a form approved in advanced by the Architect along with any supporting
information or data, as well as the Contractor's recommended resolution. An oral RFI or a
RFI presented on an unapproved form, or without adequate supporting information and
Contractor's recommended solution, will be attributed solely to the contractor. Architect's
review of or responses to RFI's shall not constitute an approval, direction, or procedure
related to the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of the
Contractor.
2. Architect's review of or responses to RFI's shall not constitute an approval, direction, or
procedure related to the construction site safety precautions, procedures, or methodology
of the Contractor.
3. The use of a RFI is limited to clarification of the contract documents. Contractor will limit
each RFI to a single issue. Information which is discernable from the contract documents;
construction means and methods; product substitution submittals; product submittals; and
construction site safety will not be addressed by the Architect in responding to a RFI.
4. Architect's response to a RFI is not a change order or directive authorizing an increase in
construction cost or time.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 6
B. All substitutions and Requests for Information (RFI) that affect Structural Safety, Fire-Life
Safety, Access Compliance or Energy (as applicable) shall be submitted to the Division of the
State Architect for review and approval.
C. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,
and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will
be returned with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work
or work of subcontractors.
D. Frivolous or Unnecessary RFIs: Cost of design professional’s time will be billed or deducted from
progress payment.
E. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the
following:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Contractor.
4. Name of Architect.
5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
10. Contractor's signature.
11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,
thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies,
and attachments.
F. Hard-Copy RFIs: Form at end of this Section.
1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
G. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.
Allow 21 days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be
considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will start again.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 7
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract
Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1
Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
H. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMS
A. Electronic versions of attached forms will be provided upon request.
1. RFI Form.
2. RFI Log.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1
SECTION 01 32 00
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submittals Schedule.
3. Three Week Look-Ahead Schedule.
4. Daily construction reports.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing
meeting and conference minutes.
3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category (action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or review.
B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three opaque copies of schedule, large enough
(minimum 11 x 17) to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
C. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction
activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 2
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts,
Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Concurrent with the development of the Contractor's construction schedule, prepare a complete
schedule of submittals. Submit the submittal schedule with the Contractor's construction schedule
described above.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the list
of products as well as the Contractor's construction schedule.
2. The Architect will review the schedule and indicate which submittals may be deleted from
the submission requirement. The deletion of the submittal requirement for an item does not
release the Contractor from any requirements of the Construction Contract, General
Conditions or Plans and Specifications.
B. Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include submittals required during the first 90 days
of construction. Provide the following information:
1. Scheduled date for the first submittal.
2. Related Section number.
3. Submittal category.
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the part of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for resubmittal.
7. Scheduled date the Architect's final release or review.
C. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post
copies in the project meeting room and field office.
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.
Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the
Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.
D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart type Contractor's
construction schedule. Submit within 15 days of the date established for "Commencement of the
Work". The Construction Schedule must be submitted and accepted prior to approval of first pay
application.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 3
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous
vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of
units of the Work as identified in the "Schedule of Values".
2. Within each time bar indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments.
As work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion.
3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable reproducible media, of
sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period.
4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities;
include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper
sequence. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for completion of related portions of
the Work.
5. Coordinate the Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of
subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other schedules.
6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate
Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
B. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the Work is affected by
requirements for phased completion to permit work by separate Contractors and partial occupancy
by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion.
C. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,
including testing and installation.
D. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for each
major portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced or
integrated with other activities.
E. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a two item cost correlation line, indicating
"pre-calculated" and "actual" costs. On the line show dollar-volume of work performed as of the
dates used for preparation of payment requests.
1. Refer to Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.
2.3 THREE WEEK LOOK-AHEAD SCHEDULE
A. Prepare weekly (or as determined by scheduled meeting times), prior to Project meetings, a
computer-generated 3-week look-ahead schedule (bar chart) which is consistent with the
Contractors schedule and depicts daily labor activities. The schedule will consist of the prior
week, current week and the following 3 weeks.
2.4 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. List of separate contractors at Project site.
3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4. Equipment at Project site.
5. Material deliveries.
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
7. Accidents.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 4
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events (refer to special reports).
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.
12. Emergency procedures.
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14. Change Orders received and implemented.
15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
16. Services connected and disconnected.
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.
18. Partial Completions and occupancies.
19. Substantial Completions authorized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such
meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates changes, including, but not limited
to, changes in durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of reviewed schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
3.2 FORMS
A. Electronic versions of attached forms will be provided upon request.
1. Submittals Schedule Form.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. Consult individual sections of specifications for specific submittals required under those sections
and for further details and descriptions of requirements.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the
Schedule of Values.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing
meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings.
3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.
4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.
5. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
6. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
7. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
8. Other Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Processing: All costs for printing, preparing, packaging, submitting, mailing, or delivering
submittals for initial submittals and all costs for re-printing, re-drawing, re-drafting, re-packaging,
re-submitting, and re-mailing or re-delivering as required for all re-submittals shall be included
in Contract Sum.
B. Sequence: Transmit each submittal in sequence which will not result in Architect’s approval
having to be later modified or rescinded by reason of subsequent submittals which should have
been processed earlier or concurrently for coordination.
C. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
D. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related
construction activities.
E. Multiple Reviews: The Contractor shall also be responsible for all costs to Architect or Architect
consultants for reviews requiring more than 2 reviews for same specification section.
F. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance
of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Review: Allow 21 days for review of each submittal. Architect will request for more time
if needed.
G. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Each submittal number shall be unique as follows:
1) Format shall be as follows:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3
a) Sequential Number - Revision Number - Project Specification Section
Number (e.g., 1-1-09910). Do not use letters.
2) Submittal number shall be sequential starting with 1 (e.g., 1-#-#####).
3) First submittal for each section shall have number 1 as the “revision” number.
(e.g., #-1-#####)
4) Resubmittal for same specification section shall have same first digit as the
original submittal and sequential second digit revision number (e.g., #-2-
##### as in second submittal).
5) Sample submittal log would look like the following in the submittal number
column: Note that 1-2-09910 is second submittal.
Submittal Number
1-1-099100
1-2-099100 (revised submittal: shown for clarity)
2-1-055000
3-1-077200
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
l. Other necessary identification.
H. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
I. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect
observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve
as final submittal.
1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of
copies to Architect.
2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken
and will be returned.
J. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without
review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810.
K. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked “Approved” or “Furnish as Noted”.
L. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
M. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating approval by Architect.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
a. Circle items applicable.
b. Cross-out items not applicable.
c. Select item number if required.
3. Submittal data must include complete documentation relating to all the specified features
4. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer’s Submittal Form with all the options selected when available.
b. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
c. Manufacturer's product specifications.
d. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
e. Standard color charts.
f. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
g. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
h. Printed performance curves.
i. Operational range diagrams.
j. Mill reports.
k. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.
l. Compliance with specified referenced standards.
m. Testing by recognized testing agency.
n. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
o. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
6. Number of Copies: Submit 6 copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect
will return 2 copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Do not use words "by others." Use words which depict exactly who is responsible
for the work.
c. Identification of products.
d. Fabrication and installation drawings.
e. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
f. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
g. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
h. Templates and patterns.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 5
i. Schedules.
j. Design calculations.
k. Compliance with specified standards.
l. Notation of coordination requirements.
m. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
n. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
o. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
p. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit 4 sets of prints.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit 1 full set of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample
sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a
Project Record Sample.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be
demonstrated.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 6
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include
the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
2. Number and name of room or space.
3. Location within room or space.
4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit 2 copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed
by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Quality Requirements."
B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply
with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification
(WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7
F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
G. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
J. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation
of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on
comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
K. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Quality Requirements."
M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before
installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed for adhesion.
O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation
of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in
the Contract Documents.
P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8
Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance
and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of
assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load
diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations.
Include page numbers.
R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product
or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making
report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
2.3 DEFERRED APPROVALS AND DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit 3 copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
1. Coordinate the work; do not delegate responsibility for coordination to any subcontractor.
2. Anticipate the interrelationship of all subcontractors and their relationship with the total
work.
3. Resolve differences or disputes between subcontractors and materials suppliers concerning
coordination, interference, or extent of work between sections.
4. Trade submittals with “By Others”, “By General Contractor”, or similar coordination and
work scope are not allowed. Identify, acknowledge, and resolve scope of work prior to
submittal by Contractor. No extras will be allowed. Provide complete and coordinated
submittals.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
F. Architect’s and Consultant’s review shall neither be construed as complete check nor relieve the
Contractor, Subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator, or supplier from responsibility for any
deficiency that may exist or from any departures or deviations from the requirements of the
Contract unless the Contractor has, in writing, called the Architect’s attention to the deviations at
the time of submission as specified.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1
SECTION 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this
Section.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of
required tests and inspections.
2. Other Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed
construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities
performed by Architect.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2
C. Mockups:
1. Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify
selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination,
testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by
which the Work will be judged.
2. Comprehensive, completely integrated mockups of separate trades showing interface
conditions, transitions, and relationships between materials and finishes.
D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant,
mill, factory, or shop.
F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,
Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such
as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to
tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
I. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a
minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before
proceeding.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on
the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Description of test and inspection.
3. Identification of applicable standards.
4. Identification of test and inspection methods.
5. Number of tests and inspections required.
6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the
Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well
as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A licensed professional engineer who is legally qualified
to practice in California and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system,
assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and
extent.
F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall
be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing
the Work.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: A City of Glendale approved NRTL, an NVLAP, or an
independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified
in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to
authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
B. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
C. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
D. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and
-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-
control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date
established for commencement of the Work.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1
SECTION 01 42 00
REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes list of references.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. “AHJ”: Agency having jurisdiction.
C. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
D. “Compatible”: When used for products, it shall comply with requirements including products
recommended/ required by the manufacturer for warrantee acceptance.
E. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
F. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings,
in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted,"
"scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
G. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
H. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
I. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 2
J. “Owner”: As defined in Division 1 section “Summary”.
K. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
L. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied
directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of
the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
2. Copies of standards and applicable building codes (Title 24 Parts 1-6 and 9) shall be kept
on-site during construction.
D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms
are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of
the standards and regulations.
E. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized names.
F. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized names.
G. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized names.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: (Effective January 1, 2017)
1. Part 1 - 2016 California Building Standards Administrative Code, Title 24 C.C.R.
2. Part 2 - 2016 California Building Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2015 International Building Code
of the International Code Council, with California Amendments).
3. Part 3 - 2016 California Electrical Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2014 National Electrical Code
of the National Fire Protection Association, NFPA).
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 3
4. Part 4 - 2016 California Mechanical Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2015 Uniform Mechanical
Code of the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, IAPMO).
5. Part 5 - 2016 California Plumbing Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2015 Uniform Plumbing Code
of the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials, IAPMO).
6. Part 6 - 2016 California Energy Code, Title 24 C.C.R.
7. Part 8 - 2016 California Historical Building Code, Title 24 C.C.R.
8. Part 9 - 2016 California Fire Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2015 International Fire Code of the
International Code Council).
9. Part 10 - 2016 California Existing Building Code, Title 24 C.C.R. (2015 International
Existing Building Code of the International Code Council, with amendments).
10. Part 11 - 2016 California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen Code), Title 24
C.C.R.
11. Part 12 - 2016 California Referenced Standards Code, Title 24 C.C.R.
12. NFPA 13 - Automatic Sprinkler Systems (California Amended), 2016 Edition.
13. NFPA 14 - Standpipe Systems (California Amended), 2013 Edition.
14. NFPA 17 - Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems, 2013 Edition.
15. NFPA 17A - Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems, 2013 Edition.
16. NFPA 20 - Stationary Pumps, 2016 Edition.
17. NFPA 24 - Private Fire Service Mains (California Amended), 2016 Edition.
18. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (California Amended) 2016 Edition
(Note: See UL Standard 1971 for “Visual Devices”).
19. NFPA 80 - Fire Door and Other Opening Protectives, 2016 Edition.
20. NFPA 101- Life Safety Code. 2015 Edition
21. NFPA 105 – Standard for Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives, 2016
Edition
22. NFPA 252 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
23. NFPA 253 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems, 2015 Edition.
24. NFPA 257 – Standard for Fire Tests for Window and Glass Block Assemblies, 2012
Edition
25. NFPA 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems (California Amended), 2015
Edition.
26. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Title II or Title III.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TESTING & INSPECTIONS 01 45 29 - 1
SECTION 01 45 23
TESTING & INSPECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1. Selection and payment.
1.1.2. Contractor submittals.
1.1.3. Laboratory responsibilities.
1.1.4. Laboratory reports.
1.1.5. Limits on testing laboratory authority.
1.1.6. Contractor responsibilities.
1.1.7. Schedule of inspections and tests.
1.2. SELECTION AND PAYMENT
1.2.1. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent Class 1 Inspector of Record, and a testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing as specified in this Section.
1.2.1.1. Unless specified as the Owner's responsibility, all other testing, mix design preparation and related quality control and certification requirements shall be paid by the Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.
1.2.1.2. All concrete mix designs shall be prepared at Contractor's cost and in compliance with Section 03 30 00, and Division 3.
1.2.1.3. All grout and mortar mix designs shall be prepared at Contractor's cost and in compliance with Division 3.
1.2.2. Only local legally constituted public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work, and the City of Glendale or their designated representative shall be authorized to direct testing and inspection to determine compliance or non-compliance to the requirements of the Work.
1.2.3. The Contractor shall reimburse the City of Glendale, through Contract adjustment, for inspection and testing costs caused by the following Contractor actions:
1.2.3.1. All testing costs incurred after initial test established non-conformance with contract requirements.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TESTING & INSPECTIONS 01 45 29 - 2
1.2.3.2. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's scheduling of work requiring inspections of less than 4 hours duration without written approval.
1.2.3.3. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's failure to complete work requiring inspection within the scheduled duration period shown on Contractor's initial construction schedule.
1.2.3.4. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's failure to order sufficient or required quantity of material.
1.2.3.5. Inspection costs of items repaired following damage caused by Contractor.
1.2.3.6. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's substitution of material, system or process, where such inspection and testing is required by the Architect, Owner or jurisdictional authority to demonstrate compliance with specified criteria.
1.2.3.7. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's use of batch plant that does not comply with criteria waiving batch plant inspection.
1.2.3.8. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's use of a supplier or subcontractor requiring inspection services to be performed at a location exceeding a 100 mile radius of project site.
1.2.3.9. Inspection costs caused by Contractor's failure to complete work within normal hours and days, requiring overtime costs.
1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located, and currently approved by the City.
1.3.2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.
1.3.3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.
1.3.4. Welding Inspectors shall be certified in accordance with AWS QC1 Standard for Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI).
1.4. LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES
1.4.1. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.
1.4.2. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
1.4.3. Promptly notify Architect of observed irregularities or non - conformance of Work or Products.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TESTING & INSPECTIONS 01 45 29 - 3
1.4.4. Perform special inspections for areas of work as shown on drawings and specified in respective sections of the specifications in compliance with Section 4-333, Part 1, Title 24, CCR.
1.4.5. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect or Project Manager
1.5. LABORATORY REPORTS
1.5.1. After each inspection and test, promptly submit copies of laboratory report to Architect, Project Manager, Structural Engineer, Contractor, the City of Glendale, Project Inspector and other parties as required by referenced sections and applicable regulations.
1.5.2. Include:
1.5.2.1. Date issued.
1.5.2.2. Project title, Architect, project number.
1.5.2.3. Name of inspector.
1.5.2.4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
1.5.2.5. Method of obtaining sample.
1.5.2.6. Identification of product and Specifications section.
1.5.2.7. Location in the Project.
1.5.2.8. Type of inspection or test.
1.5.2.9. Date of test.
1.5.2.10. Results of tests.
1.5.2.11. Conformance with Contract Documents.
1.5.2.12. Indicate samples taken but not tested.
1.5.3. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results.
1.5.4. Testing agency shall provide a verified report in compliance with Chapter 4, Part 1, Section 4-336, of Title 24, CCR.
1.5.4.1. Provide such reports in duplicate, on approved form.
1.5.4.2. Provide reports each time work on the project is suspended (dates to be confirmed and coordinated during construction) and at completion of project.
1.5.4.3. Reports shall document actions taken, tests made, and other aspects of the construction operations for the period prescribed.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TESTING & INSPECTIONS 01 45 29 - 4
1.5.5. In addition, Testing Agency shall provide semi-monthly reports as required by Section 4-337, Part 1, Title 24, CCR.
1.6. LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY
1.6.1. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
1.6.2. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
1.6.3. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.
1.6.4. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.7. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
1.7.1. Deliver or make available to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
1.7.2. Do not incorporate material or products requiring compliance with specified testing and inspection criteria without receiving documentation of compliance from approved agency.
1.7.3. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities.
1.7.4. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to assist testing laboratory in obtaining and handling samples, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples.
1.7.4.1. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.7.4.2. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction.
1.7.4.3. Repair and protection is Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.
1.7.5. Contractor shall prepare integrated schedule for the course of construction showing all required inspection and testing. Determine the time required for the laboratory to perform testing and to issue reports and findings. Provide all required testing and inspection time within the construction schedule.
1.7.5.1. Notify Project Manager, Architect, Project Inspector and laboratory minimum two working days prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TESTING & INSPECTIONS 01 45 29 - 5
1.7.5.2. Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1.7.6. Notify the Project Manager with sufficient time in advance of the manufacture or material to be supplied by Owner under the Contract Documents, which must by terms of the Contract be tested, in order that the Owner may arrange for testing at the source of supply.
1.8. SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS BY OWNER'S TESTING AGENCY (WHEN REQUIRED)
1.8.1. Site Excavation, Fills and Foundation Preparation (Title 24, Part 2)
1.8.1.1. All earthwork, including earth fill compaction – 1704A.7, 1705A.6, 1804A.5, APP.J 107
1.8.1.2. Inspection of Excavation/fill Installation – J106
1.8.1.3. Inspection of site soil and backfill– 1705A.6, Table 1705A.6
1.8.2. Concrete (Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 19A)
1.8.2.1. Materials
1.8.2.1.1. Portland Cement – ACI 318 Sec. 3.2, 1903A.1, ASTM C150
1.8.2.1.2. Concrete Aggregates - ACI 318 Sec. 3.3, 1903A.5, 1704A.4.1, 1916A.1
1.8.2.1.3. Reinforcing Bars - ACI 318 Sec. 3.5, 1903A.7, ASTM A615, ASTM 706, 1704A.4.1, 1708.a.2 and 1916.A.2.
1.8.2.1.4. Shotcrete Aggregates – 1903A.5, 1913A.3
1.8.2.1.5. Admixtures– ACI 318-08 Sec 3.6
1.8.2.2. Concrete Quality
1.8.2.2.1. Proportions of Concrete – 1905A.2, 1905A.3, 1905A.4, ACI 318 sec 5.2
1.8.2.2.2. Strength Tests for Concrete – 1905A.1.2, 1905A.6, 1916A.1, ACI 318 sec. 5.6.2
1.8.2.2.3. Shotcrete Cores – 1913A.5
1.8.2.2.4. Shotcrete Proportion – 1913A.2
1.8.2.2.5. Composite Construction Cores – 1916A.4
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TESTING & INSPECTIONS 01 45 29 - 6
1.8.2.2.6. Portland Compile Tests – 1704A.4.1, 1916A.1
1.8.2.2.7. Cement Tests – 1913A.1
1.8.2.2.8. Aggregate Tests – 1903A.6
1.8.2.2.9. Rebar Tests – 1913A.2
1.8.2.2.10. Post Installed Anchors – 1913A.7
1.8.2.3. Concrete Inspection
1.8.2.3.1. Job Site Inspection - 1905A.7, ACI 318 Sec. 5.7
1.8.2.3.2. Batch Plant Inspection – 1705A.3.3
1.8.2.3.3. Waiver of Batch Plant Inspection and Tests – 1704A.4.3
1.8.2.3.4. Reinforcing Bar Welding – 1903A.8, 1704A.3.1.3, 1705A.2.2.1.2
1.8.2.3.5. Shotcrete Inspection – 1704A.17, 1916A.5
1.8.2.3.6 Cast-in-place deep foundation- 1705A.8
1.8.3. Structural Steel (Title 24, Part 2, Chapter 22A)
1.8.3.1. Materials
1.8.3.1.1. Structural Steel –2205A
1.8.3.1.2. Cold Formed Steel – 2209A, 2210A
1.8.3.1.3. Material Identification - 2203A.1
1.8.3.1.4. Welded Filler Metal – A3.4 (b) AISC 341-10
1.8.3.2. Inspection of Structural Steel
1.8.3.2.1. Tests of Structural and Cold Formed Steel – 2203A.1, 1704A.3
1.8.3.2.2. Fabrication – 1704A.2.5
1.8.3.2.3. Tests of High Strength Bolts, Nuts, Washers– 2212.A.1
1.8.3.2.4. Shop Fabrication Inspection – 1704A.3.2
1.8.3.2.5. High Strength Bolt Inspection – 2213A.1
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TESTING & INSPECTIONS 01 45 29 - 7
1.8.3.2.6. End-welded studs Inspection – 2213A.12
1.8.3.2.7. Welding Inspection – 1705A.2.2.5, J6 AISC 341-10
1.8.4. Miscellaneous Fasteners
1.8.4.1. Anchorage test methods as shown on drawings and specified in respective sections.
1.8.4.2. Tests for post-installed anchors in concrete per CBC 1910A.5 - When post-installed anchors are used in lieu of cast-in place bolts, the installation verification test loads, frequency and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION 01 45 29
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work
restrictions.
2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of
implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.
3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
4. Other Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in
those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,
insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are
closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.4 USE CHARGES
A. General: Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but
not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sewer Service:
1. Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.
C. Water Service:
1. Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.
D. Electric Power Service:
1. Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction
operations.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 2
E. Sanitary Facilities:
1. Pay sanitary service use charge for temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water
for use of construction personnel.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use
as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails.
Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
B. Wind Screen Fabric: Green.
2.2 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES
A. Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations
adequate for normal loading located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines.
Comply with NFPA 241.
B. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
C. Sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly.
Furnish and equip offices and pay for services for following:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 3
1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
racks, and bookcases.
2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle
on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack board.
3. Drinking water and private toilet.
4. Coffee machine and supplies.
5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F.
6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.
7. Telephone service to field office and Inspector's/Architects' field office at time of project
mobilization.
8. Facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to field office and Inspector's/Architects'
field office at time of project mobilization.
9. Internet access with an DSL or Cable (if available) service separate from the dedicated
telephone line to field office and Inspector's/Architect's field office at time of project
mobilization. If a high speed connection is not available, provide dial up service. Switch
to high speed service if it becomes available during the project Provide, maintain and pay
for a computer (including programs) with graphics capabilities, printer and scanner so as
to be able to support communication with the Architect over the internet for reports, logs,
RFIs, change drawings and clarifications distributed by email. This equipment shall be
made available to the Inspector, Architect.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures. Minimum rated at Class 2A-10B:C.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, electric, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic
control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille
in system and remove at end of construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 4
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Install temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E. Heating and Cooling: Install temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Install temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
G. Electric Power Service: Install electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
H. Lighting: Install temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
B. Parking: Provide temporary or use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas if approved
for construction personnel.
C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 5
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification. Install signs where
directed to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not
permitted.
1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
3. Provide a 4'-0" x 8'-0" project sign constructed of 1/2 inch plywood or 10 mil corrugated
mounted to 4"x4" posts 8'-0" long set 2'-0" deep into earth.
4. Project sign shall include a graphic of the building (available from the Architect), Architect,
Consultants, District, project, funding members with titles, and Contractor with contact
information for the contractor. Text and layout shall be submitted for approval prior to
installation.
5. Location of project sign shall be coordinated with District’s representative.
E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."
B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around
excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy
rains.
D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems
from damage, flooding, and erosion.
E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance
gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient
to accommodate construction operations or as indicated on Drawings.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 6
F. Install full coverage with green wind screen fabric to block viewing through construction fencing.
Wind screen fabric shall be anchored or weighted sufficiently to resist design wind loads indicated
on Drawings.
G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
I. Covered Walkway: Erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of
individuals along adjacent public street(s). Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and
obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing.
2. Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails,
barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions
for protection and safe passage.
3. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence.
4. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect.
J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress
and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
K. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,
and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side.
2. Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 3-mil polyethylene sheet on each side.
Cover floor with 2 layers of 3-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the
sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant plywood.
a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with
not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in
vestibule.
3. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas.
4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.
5. Protect air-handling equipment.
6. Weather strip openings.
7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses.
1. Comply with CFC Chapter 33 – Fire Safety During Construction and Demolition.
2. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
3. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 7
4. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at
Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
5. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1
SIMILAR INSTALLATION LIST FORM
SIMILAR INSTALLATION LIST FORM
Provide minimum 5 similar installations within last 3 years.
Project: ____________________________ From: _________________________________________
To: ____________________________ Date: _________________________________________
Date of
Installation
Project Name Owner Info GC Info Architect info
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
End of Previous Project List Form
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1
PRODUCT LIST FORM
PRODUCT LIST FORM Preliminary Product List.
Complete Product List.
Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.
Project: ____________________________ From: _________________________________________
To: ____________________________ Date: _________________________________________
Spec Section Early
approval?
Yes
No
Product Model
No.
Manufacturer Supplier Installer Delivery
Date No. Title
End of Product List Form
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 2
PRODUCT LIST FORM
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
Substitutions are only allowed within number of days specified. Use this form for requesting “or equal” products and materials.
Project: Substitution Request Number:
From:
To: Date:
Project Number:
Specification Section Title:
Section Number: Page: Article/Paragraph:
Specified Item:
Proposed Substitution:
Manufacturer: Address:
Contact Name: Phone Number:
Comparison between proposed substitution and specified product is attached. Note all differences.
Reason for not using specified item: Specified product is no longer available. Substitution will improve lead time by ______ days Substitution will save Owner $ _____________ Other:
List 3 similar installations including project name, address, owner, and date installed is attached.
Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: No Yes; explanation attached.
Supporting Data Attached:
Product Data (indicate any options to be included) Drawings Test Reports Samples Color Chart Other:
Undersigned certifies:
• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.
• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.
• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable is available.
• Proposed substitution will not affect or delay Construction Progress Schedule.
• Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived.
• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.
• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including architectural or engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 2 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
• Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects.
• Substitutions for products or systems involving structural, fire/life safety and access compliance will require AHJ approval. This will add time required to review those substitutions requiring AHJ approval. Contractor is solely responsible for all documentation, cost, and time required to obtain AHJ approval.
Submitted by: Firm:
Signature: Date:
Comments:
A/E Review:
Approve Substitution. Approve Substitution as Noted. Reject Substitution. Use specified product. Reject Substitution. Use specified product. Substitution request received too late.
Signed by: Date:
Comments:
Owner’s Review and Action (Approval of substitution is not valid without Owner’s signature)
Substitution approved. Substitution approved as Noted. Substitution rejected. Use specified product.
Signed by: Date:
Comments:
End of Substitution Request Form
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 - 1
SECTION 01 73 00
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
4. Progress cleaning.
5. Starting and adjusting.
6. Protection of installed construction.
7. Correction of the Work.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for
coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.
2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and
elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
D. Certified Surveys: Submit 2 copies signed by professional engineer.
E. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, gas, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator
present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to
be installed.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 - 3
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a
detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction
and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required
dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and
topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical
work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level
foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
B. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real
property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by professional engineer, that
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 - 4
principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the
survey.
1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing
improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,
and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.
2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with
authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory
prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate
provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 - 5
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress
cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements
strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature
is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire
work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the
remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period.
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning
units, replace with new units, and retest.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 73 00 - 6
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements
in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Provide protection against weather, rain, wind, storms, frost and heat so as to maintain all work
and materials free from injury or damage.
C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that
cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 1
SECTION 01 73 29
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other Work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before
the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the
following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why
they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and
patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and
those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be
disrupted.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 2
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and
patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cutting, boring, sawcutting or drilling through the new or existing structural elements to be done
only when so detailed in the drawings or accepted by the Architect and Structural Engineer with
the approval of DSA Representative.
B. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their
load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
C. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
D. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in
a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to
perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
E. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic
qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 3
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide
protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during
cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting
to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering
and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 4
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-
core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable spec sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching
and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface
of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint
coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove
paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 19 - 1
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for environmental-protection
measures during construction.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling,
reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation
for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation
into the Work.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates for
salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total waste generated by the Work.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 19 - 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 30 days of date established for the
Notice to Proceed.
B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit three
copies of report. Include the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons.
4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.
5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.
C. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and
invoices.
D. Qualification Data: For Waste Management Coordinator.
E. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for
recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery
was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date
refrigerant was recovered.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification
program.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste
Management Coordinator.
2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.
3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and
disposal facilities.
5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 19 - 3
1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure
throughout waste management plan.
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of construction waste generated
by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each
type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.
1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name,
address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location
on Project site where materials separation will be located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Architect. Provide handling,
containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste
management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.
1. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation,
termination, and removal requirements.
B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for
implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator
shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project.
C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures,
as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 74 19 - 4
2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor.
C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they
are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at
each container and bin.
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if
found.
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining
trees.
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
3.3 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 77 00 - 1
PUNCH-LIST FORM
PUNCH-LIST FORM Preliminary Punch-List.
Final Punch-List.
Project: From:
To: Date:
Item
No.
Room
No.
Area Description Completion
Date
A/E
Verification
End of Punch-List Form
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1
SECTION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. IOR’s Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Extra Materials.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Title 24 Certificate of Acceptance requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. IOR: Inspector of Record.
B. Inspection: IOR will inspect, not the Architect.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a copy of Title 24 Certificate of Acceptance forms submitted to enforcement agency.
1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting IOR’s inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the
list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 2
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. IOR’s Inspection: Submit a written request for IOR’s inspection for Substantial Completion. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with IOR’s inspection process or notify
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion after IOR’s inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list
or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
1.6 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final IOR’s inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed
or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list
shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. IOR’s Inspection: Submit a written request for final IOR’s inspection process for acceptance.
On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with IOR’s inspection process or notify
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after
IOR’s inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected
before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 3
1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,
if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use form
attached.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding
from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date specified in General Conditions.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2. Include Table of Contents.
3. Identify content with specification section number and title.
4. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
5. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver to Owner’s facility manager extra materials specified in each section.
B. Organize submitted materials in orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project
Manual.
1. Itemize each material and quantity in 8-1/2 by 11-inch paper.
C. Label each items for easy identification.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator
of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health
or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with
local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance
program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting IOR’s inspection for
certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo
if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that
already show evidence of repair or restoration.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 5
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical
nameplates.
m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces
of diffusers, registers, and grills.
q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with
requirements for new fixtures.
s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
3.2 FORMS
A. Electronic versions of attached forms will be provided upon request.
1. Punch-List Form.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2. Emergency manuals.
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for
operation and maintenance manuals.
3. Other Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work
in those Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting
inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.
Architect will return 1 copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are
acceptable.
B. Final Submittal: Submit 1 copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final
inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 2
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more
than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. List of documents.
2. List of systems.
3. List of equipment.
4. Table of contents.
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance
manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 3
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume
of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment,
and components of one system into a single binder.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data
in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-
reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab
to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment
included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number
and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use
as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual,
insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and
drawing locations.
2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1. Type of emergency.
2. Emergency instructions.
3. Emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1. Fire.
2. Flood.
3. Gas leak.
4. Water leak.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 4
5. Power failure.
6. Water outage.
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
8. Chemical release or spill.
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and
similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification
of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping.
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.
2.4 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual
Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 5
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include
source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,
and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone
number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification
Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related
services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source
information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance
and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and
warranty and bond information, as described below.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 6
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and
component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance
and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts
identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources
of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides
an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 7
B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and
maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional
manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only
sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or
component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,
identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data
applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or
systems.
F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section
"Project Record Documents."
G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1
RECORD PRODUCT DATA FORM
RECORD PRODUCT DATA FORM
Record Product Data is due no later than 10 calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion.
Photocopy for continuation sheets. List products in order by specification section numbers.
Project Name: From:
To: Date:
Spec Section Originally Specified Actually Installed
No. Title Model Manufacturer Model Manufacturer
End of Record Product Data Form
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 2
RECORD PRODUCT DATA FORM
BLANK PAGE
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1
SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents,
including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
3. Other Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in
those Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit 1 set of marked-up Record Prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit 1 copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract
modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit 1 copy of each Product Data submittal.
1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record
Product Data.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and
Shop Drawings.
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up
Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order Documents.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show
cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers,
and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable
paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
2. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 3
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot
be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot
be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
4. Assemble in single binder with table of contents.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record
Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean,
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 4
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record
Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 FORMS
A. Electronic versions of attached forms will be provided upon request.
1. Record Product Data Form.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DEMOSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1
SECTION 01 79 00
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel, including the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit 2 copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and
training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors'
names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.
1. At completion of training, submit 1 complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.
B. Qualification Data: For instructor.
C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction
time.
D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation
of performance-based test.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to
minimize disrupting Owner's operations.
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time,
and course content.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DEMOSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 2
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for
each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include
a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.
B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to
coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of
participants, instruction times, and location.
B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.
D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's
mastery of module by use of a written performance-based test.
E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial
training use.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01 81 19 - 1
SECTION 01 81 19
CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Temporary construction ventilation, dust protection, preconditioning of materials,
protection of materials, sequencing, duct protection, and duct cleaning to insure good
indoor air quality after occupancy to be performed by the CONTRACTOR.
B. Related Sections:
1.2 REFERENCES
A. SMACNA - IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3.
B. ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices
for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size (ANSI approved)
1.3 CLASSIFICATION OF RELEVANT MATERIALS
A. VOC-Emitting Materials
1. Section 06 16 43, Gypsum Sheathing
a. Adhesive applied on-site
2. Section 06 20 00, Finish Carpentry
a. Adhesive applied on-site
b. Composite wood products containing added urea-formaldehyde
3. Section 06 41 00, Architectural Wood Casework
a. Adhesive applied on-site
b. Composite wood products containing added urea-formaldehyde
4. Section 07 13 53, Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing
a. Adhesives
b. Sealants
5. Section 07 25 00, Weather Barriers
a. Adhesives
b. Sealants
6. Section 07 84 00, Firestopping
a. All sealants, caulking, or spray materials.
7. Section 07 92 05, Joint Sealers
a. All joint sealers applied on-site on the interior side of the building envelope
8. Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board Assemblies
a. Adhesives
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01 81 19 - 2
b. Sealants
9. Section 09 30 00, Tiling
a. Adhesives and joint sealers applied on-site on the interior side of the building
envelope
10. Section 09 65 13, Resilient Base
a. Adhesives
b. Sealants
11. Section 09 68 13, Tile Carpeting
a. Carpet
b. Adhesives
12. Section 09 00 00, Painting and Coatings
a. Painting
b. Coatings
13. Section 10 21 16, Shower and Dressing Compartments
a. Adhesives
b. Sealants
B. Porous and Fibrous Materials
1. Section 07 21 11, Thermal Installation
2. Batt insulation (exposed to interior only)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit eighteen (18) photographs documenting compliance with this Section. Provide six (6)
photographs each at three (3) different phases of construction.
B. Contractor shall develop and submit to the Architect for review the Construction Indoor Air
Quality (IAQ) Plan as required in this Section. A template form is provided Appendix A of this
Specification. The plan shall be submitted along with the first submittal for any of the products
listed above.
1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) requirements described below are based upon practices
described in SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995. Any
modifications to or substitutions of requirements described in this Section must comply with the
abovementioned SMACNA guideline.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01 81 19 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection: Contractor shall conduct inspections to confirm that construction IAQ measures
proposed in the Construction IAQ Plan are being followed, and be prepared to report compliance
with the Plan at progress meetings.
3.2 PROJECT CONTITIONS
A. Air Filtration:
1. Systems designed with particle filters shall not be operated without filters in place.
Temporary construction filters shall have a minimum MERV rating of 8.
2. Replace all air filtration media immediately prior to occupancy. Post-construction air filters
shall have a minimum MERV rating of 13.
B. Construction Ventilation: Following building enclosure, maintain continuous temporary
ventilation of areas during installation of voe-Emitting Materials identified in paragraph 1.04 of
this Section. Construction Ventilation shall be provided for post-occupancy touch-up work
involving VOC-Emitting materials. It is not required during Building Flush-Out.
1. Ventilation shall be supplied via open windows and doors, temporary ducts, and temporary
fans, sufficient to provide no less than three (3) air changes per hour.
2. When continuous ventilation is not practical via temporary fans and exhaust to outside,
then ventilation shall be supplied via the building's HVAC system and shall comply with
the following requirements:
a. Provide temporary air filters at return air grilles.
b. Provide 100% outside air. Relative humidity not to exceed 60%.
c. Provide a minimum of three {3) air changes per hour.
3. Maintain continuous ventilation for a minimum period of 72 hours after installation of
VOC-Emitting Materials, unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in these Specifications.
4. Ventilate areas directly to outside; ventilation to other enclosed areas is not acceptable.
C. Preconditioning: Prior to installation, allow contractor-furnished contractor-installed VOC-
Emitting Furnishings and Equipment as identified in paragraph 1.04 of this Section to off-gas in
dry, well-ventilated space for 14 calendar days to allow for reasonable dissipation of odors and
emissions
1. Remove containers and packaging to maximize off-gassing of VOCs.
2. Precondition products in ventilated warehouse or other ventilated building.
Preconditioning at the project site is acceptable, provided that Temporary Construction
Ventilation and Sequencing measures are taken as described elsewhere in this
Specification.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01 81 19 - 4
3. Products requiring preconditioning include, at minimum, contractor-furnished and
contractor-installed VOC-Emitting Furnishings and Equipment that contain vinyl or other
flexible plastics, resins, adhesives, foam rubber, and fiberboards with urea-formaldehyde
binders. Products bearing Greenguard certification (www.greenguard.org) shall be
excluded from the preconditioning requirement.
3.3 SEQUENCING
A. On-Site Application: Where voe-Emitting Materials as identified in paragraph 1.03 of this
Specification are applied on-site, apply prior to installation of Porous and Fibrous Materials as
identified in paragraph 1.04 of this Specification. Maintain continuous ventilation for a period of
72 hours before installation of porous and fibrous materials.
1. Where this sequencing requirement is not possible, protect porous materials with
polyethylene vapor retarders. Tape all polyethylene edges to insure a complete seal.
Maintain continuous ventilation per temporary construction ventilation requirements
described above for a period of 72 hours before removing polyethylene.
B. Completion: Complete interior finish material installation prior to Building Flush-Out as
described in paragraph 3.06 of this Section.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Moisture Protection: Protect interior materials from water intrusion or penetration as described in
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements.
1. Porous or fibrous materials with visible microbial growth shall not be installed.
2. Non-porous materials with visible microbial growth shall be decontaminated.
B. Duct Protection: during dust-producing activities (e.g. sanding, cutting, or grinding), or when
VOC-Emitting Materials (as described in paragraph 1.04 above} are being installed, implement
the following measures:
1. If possible, damper off the return (negative pressure) side of HVAC air distribution system
and seal return system openings with polyethylene sheet.
2. If HVAC system must be operated during dust-producing activities, provide temporary
construction air filters with a minimum MERV rating of 8 at all return air grilles.
3. If HVAC supply air is off, protect diffusers and openings with polyethylene sheet.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Provide the following cleaning in addition to requirements described in Section 01 70 00
Execution Requirements:
1. Clean all coils, air filters, and fans prior to Testing and Balancing.
2. If significant dust collection is observed at diffusers, return air grilles, or in ducts, clean
prior to system start-up.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01 81 19 - 5
3.6 BUILD FLUSH-OUT
A. Just prior to Substantial Completion, but following Testing and Balancing, flush out building
using the building HVAC system, maintaining a minimum temperature of 60° F and maximum
60% relative humidity. Provide a total of 14,000 cubic feet of outside air per square foot of floor
area building flush out as follows:
1. Prior to building occupancy, provide 3,500 cubic feet of outdoor air per square foot of floor
area.
2. Following building occupancy, provide a minimum ventilation rate of 0.30 cfm/sq. ft. of
outside air or the design minimum outside air rate, whichever is greater. Maintain these
conditions beginning a minimum of three (3} hours prior to daily occupancy and extending
through daily occupancy hours, until the remainder of the 14,000 cfm of outside air per
square foot of floor area is achieved.
B. Insure that MERV 13 air filters are in place during Building Flush-Out.
C. Installation of furniture and equipment may occur during Building Flush-Out.
D. Return ventilation system to normal operation following Building Flush-Out period to minimize
energy consumption.
E. Immediately following Building Flush-Out, replace air filters with new MERV 13 air filters.
Air filters that handle solely outside air need not be replaced.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01 81 19 - 6
APPENDIX A
CONSTUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) PLAN
CONTRACTOR [CONSTUCTION MANAGER]:
Name: Title:
Telephone: Fax:
Email:
I have read and understood and will implement the following Construction IAQ Plan:
Signature Date:
1. CONSTRUCTION VENTILATION
List all project materials requiring Construction Ventilation per Specification Section 01 81 19.
Attach additional sheet if necessary.
Y / N
Ventilation will be supplied via open windows, temporary ducts, and
temporary fans. If "Y", then supply air diffusers, return air grilles, and/or
open ducts will be sealed.
Y / N
Ventilation will be supplied via area exhaust fans. If "Y", check applica-
ble:
□ Supply air diffusers, return air grilles, and/or open ducts will
be sealed. Make-up air will be provided through open win-
dows or doors or other transfer air devices.
□ HVAC system will provide make-up air. Return air grilles
will be sealed.
Y / N
Ventilation will be supplied via building's HVAC system. If "Y", check
applicable:
□ Return air grilles are sealed. Exhaust is provided via open
windows or doors.
□ Return air grilles are used for exhaust. HVAC will provide 100%
outside air. Air filters with a minimum MERV rating of 8 will be
provided at return air grilles.
□ Required Areas will be ventilated directly to outside. No ventilated air will be
returned.
□ Required Ventilation will provide no less than three air changes per hour.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01 81 19 - 7
□ Required Ventilation will be continuous for a period no less than 72 hours after
completion of installation.
□ Required All filtration used during Construction Ventilation will be replaced prior to
Substantial Completion.
2. PRECONDITIONING
List all project materials requiring Construction Ventilation per Specification Section 01 81 19.
Attach additional sheet if necessary.
Y / N
Preconditioning will occur in dry and well-ventilated offsite location.
If "Y":
Where is the offsite location?
Y / N
Preconditioning will occur onsite. If "Y", check applicable:
□ Ventilation will be supplied via open windows, temporary ducts,
and temporary fans. See l.2a above.
□ Ventilation will be supplied via area exhaust fans. See l.2b
above.
□ Ventilation will be supplied via building's HVAC system. See
l.2c above.
□ Required Containers and packaging will be removed prior to Preconditioning.
□ Required Preconditioning will occur for fourteen (14) continuous days prior to
installation.
3. SEQUENCING
List all project materials requiring Construction Ventilation per Specification Section 01 81 19.
Attach additional sheet if necessary.
□ Required
Previously installed Porous or Fibrous Materials located in a room where
VOC- Emitting Materials are to be installed will be protected with
polyethylene vapor retarder. Polyethylene will not be removed until
completion of a 72-hour ventilation period.
□ Required Installation of interior finish materials will complete fourteen (14)
days prior to Substantial Completion.
4. PROTECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY 01 81 19 - 8
List all project materials requiring Construction Ventilation per Specification Section 01 81 19.
Attach additional sheet if necessary.
□ Required Porous or Fibrous Materials with visible microbial growth shall not be
installed.
□ Required Materials that are not defined as Porous or Fibrous with visible mi-
crobial growth shall be decontaminated prior to installation.
□ Required
Temporary ventilation will be provided during all dust producing
activities. See Item I Construction Ventilation above. All supply air
diffusers and return air grilles will be covered.
□ Required Ducts will be sealed during transportation, delivery, and construction.
END OF APPENDIX A
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 01 81 23 - 1
SECTION 01 81 23
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section is the primary source of requirements for noise and vibration control in the
project documents. Should conflicts arise between the requirements in these sections and
other portions of the contract documents, the requirements in these sections shall take
precedence unless otherwise directed by the Architect. Under no circumstances,
however, shall the requirements in these sections take precedence over code or life safety
requirements.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3 REQUIRMENTS
A. Objectionable noise and vibration caused by building systems shall be reduced to levels
as close as possible to the maximum allowable noise and vibration criteria required in this
section. All necessary adjustments and retesting of equipment and systems to achieve the
criteria shall be provided at no cost to the Owner.
1.4 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE NOISE CRITERIA FOR PROJECT SPACES
A. Maximum allowable background noise levels in project spaces due to operation of
HVAC, plumbing or electrical equipment are listed below.
Spaces Required Background Noise Level
Sleeping Rooms 30
Office Area 40
Restrooms, Storage 45
Corridor, Laundry 50
B. Should the noise levels in any room exceed the above criteria, the Contractor shall be
responsible for rebalancing, adjusting, or retesting required to meet the criteria, at no
additional cost to the Owner.
1.5 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE VIBRATION CRITERIA FOR ROTATING EQUIPMENT
A. Rotating devices shall be balanced according to the schedule below. The following
vibration displacement levels shall not be exceeded when the equipment is rigidly
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 01 81 23 - 2
grounded to structure (with the isolators blocked or "grounded out.")
Equipment Type RPM mils peak to peak (max)
Fans < 600 4
600 to 999 3
1000 to 2000 2
> 2000 1
Pumps 1800 2
3600 1
B. Should any rotating equipment cause vibration exceeding the above criteria (or
manufacturer’s specifications), the Contractor shall be responsible for rebalancing,
realignment, adjusting, or retesting required to meet the criteria, at no additional cost to
the Owner.
1.6 SOUND POWER LIMITS FOR AIRHANDLING EQUIPMENT
A. The sound generating characteristics of air handling units shall be tested to, and comply
with, all requirements of this specification. Representative samples shall be subjected to
tests in accordance with applicable standards and procedures in order to demonstrate such
compliance. A special test for this project is not required if the manufacturer has
previous certified test results that can be made applicable to this project.
B. Submit complete acoustical test reports showing that proposed air handling units have
been tested in accordance with the latest versions of AMCA Standard 300, Test Code for
Sound Rating, and AMCA Standard 301, Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings
from Laboratory Test Data.
C. Sound power levels for all air handling equipment shall not exceed the levels of the
equipment used as the basis of design for this project.
D. Should sound power levels exceed those used as basis of design, the Contractor shall
arrange and pay for remedial noise control analysis, system redesign, and necessary
additional noise control components at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.7 NOISE CONTROL FOR AIRHANDLING EQUIPMENT
A. Heavy Gauge Ductwork: 18 gauge ductwork shall be provided near air handlers in
locations shown and as scheduled in the Project Documents.
B. Duct and Plenum Lining:
1. 2”-thick lining shall be provided in ductwork and plenums near air handling
equipment in locations shown and as scheduled in the Project Documents.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 01 81 23 - 3
2. 1”-thick lined ductwork shall be provided in all indoor SA and RA ductwork,
except where 2” lining or acoustical flexible duct is scheduled.
3. Minimum 5’ long, 1” thick lined runouts or acoustical flexible duct shall be
provided between dampers and SA outlets or RA intakes in all project spaces
rated at NC-35 or below.
C. Turning Vanes: Turning vanes shall be provided in initial elbows in SA and RA mains
for all airhandling equipment.
1.8 NOISE CONTROL FOR GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS
A. Noise generation from grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be comply with all
requirements of this specification. Representative samples shall be subjected to tests in
accordance with applicable standards and procedures in order to demonstrate such
compliance. A special test for this project is not required if the manufacturer has certified
test results for proposed products.
B. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the following:
1. Submit complete acoustical test reports showing that proposed products have
been tested in accordance with latest editions of ASHRAE Standard 70 and ADC
Standard 1062:GRD-84 and meet the maximum allowable noise criteria (NC)
and A-level requirements specified above. Alternate test standards may be
substituted for the above if approved in advance by the Architect.
2. Submit a tabulation of proposed products, maximum allowable noise criteria, and
product noise criteria (at specified air volumes) for all project spaces.
1.9 NOISE CONTROL FOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS
A. Noise levels emanating from specified lighting equipment shall not exceed the maximum
noise level requirements of this specification. A special test for this project is not
required if the manufacturer has previous experience with similar installations.
B. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the following:
1. Submit complete acoustical test reports showing that proposed products have
been tested for suitable operation in Project spaces with specified maximum
noise criteria (NC) requirements.
2. Submittals shall include a tabulation of proposed products, identification of Project
spaces where proposed products are to be installed, maximum allowable NC for all
Project spaces, and product NC for all Project spaces.
1.10 VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
A. Vibration or noise from HVAC equipment and systems shall not be transmitted to
building structure or components, including, but not limited to, roofs, floors, beams,
columns, walls, partitions, ceilings, studs, ceiling framing and suspension systems.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 01 81 23 - 4
1. Furnish all labor, equipment, and components necessary for HVAC equipment
and system vibration control, including, but not limited to vibration isolators,
bases, seismic restraints, incidental equipment, and related materials. Assure that
deflection, stability and seismic restraint requirements are met. Install, test, and
adjust all vibration isolation equipment per the manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Isolator and spring static deflections are based on typical, anticipated equipment
characteristics, particularly rpm. The Manufacturer shall evaluate the equipment
and propose appropriate or alternate static deflections as necessary.
3. The Manufacturer shall be responsible for all vibration isolation and seismic
control equipment and have no less than five years’ experience in fabrication and
delivery of such equipment.
4. The seismic resistance capability of all equipment shall be certified by a
registered professional engineer in the state in which the project resides. The
requirements of all applicable codes shall be met.
B. Insure that functional integrity, structural integrity, and warrantees of HVAC equipment
and systems are not compromised by installation of vibration isolation equipment.
C. Satisfy the requirements of all applicable codes.
D. The vibration isolation equipment Manufacturer’s responsibilities shall include the
following.
1. Provide written installation instructions to the Contractor.
2. Provide necessary visits to the jobsite before and after equipment is installed to
identify pre-installation issues and post-installation discrepancies and necessary
corrective work.
E. The Contractor’s responsibilities shall include the following.
1. Rigorously avoid short-circuiting of vibration-isolated HVAC equipment and
systems to building structure and components. Oversee all trades to prevent the
short-circuiting of any vibration isolation system and bring conflicts to the
Architect's attention.
2. Remove temporary blocking washers and shims after equipment installations are
complete and HVAC equipment and systems are at operation weight.
3. Obtain "rough-in" and final inspections by the Manufacturer and/or Architect
prior to any permanent closure or covering.
4. All installations that are deemed defective in workmanship or materials by the
Manufacturer and/or Architect shall be corrected at no additional cost to the
Owner.
F. Submittals by the Manufacturer shall include the following:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 01 81 23 - 5
1. Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and procedures, including
written instructions and checklists to be delivered to the Contractor to aid in
proper installation of manufacturer's equipment.
2. A schedule indicating tag number, location and type of all vibration isolators.
This shall be sufficiently clear to suffice as a checklist and index for design load,
static deflection expected under the design load, specified minimum static
deflection, additional deflection to solid under design load, ratio of spring height
to spring diameter under design load.
3. Shop drawings of seismic restraints, steel brackets, steel rails, steel base frames,
and concrete inertia bases showing all steel work, reinforcing, and vibration
isolator and seismic restraint mounting attachment methods.
4. Calculations by a structural engineer licensed in California, certifying that all
seismic restraints, bolts, cables and associated components will conform with all
applicable code requirements.
5. A list of any contract discrepancies or field conditions which might limit the
performance of vibration isolation equipment and components.
G. Submittals by the Contractor (at project completion) shall include the following:
1. A complete tabulation showing for each vibration isolator: (a) the actual static
deflection measured at the project and (b) the specified minimum static
deflection. Assistance from the vibration isolation equipment Manufacturer may
be required.
2. A report certifying a) that each piece of rotating mechanical equipment does not
exceed the maximum displacement levels required in this section.
H. Vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall be provided at all vibration-
producing equipment, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
1. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Equipment: Specific vibration isolation
and seismic control equipment includes, but is not limited to equipment described
in this section. Vibration isolation listed in mechanical drawings and schedules
shall not supersede this section, unless directed by the Architect.
2. Vibration-Producing Equipment: Vibration-producing equipment includes, but is
not limited to, all HVAC equipment with rotating or moving parts, including air
handling equipment, condensing equipment, exhaust fans, boilers, pumps,
chillers, transformers, dimmer racks, etc.
1.11 VIBRATION CONTROL FOR PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Vibration or noise from plumbing or HVAC piping shall not be transmitted to building
structure and components, including, but is not limited to roofs, floors, beams, columns,
walls, partitions, ceilings, studs, ceiling framing and suspension systems.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 01 81 23 - 6
B. Vibration isolation shall be provided at all active piping systems, unless otherwise
directed by the Architect. Specific vibration isolation equipment includes, but is not
limited to equipment described in this section, and plumbing drawings and schedules for
vibration isolation do not supersede this section.
C. Insure that functional integrity, structural integrity, and manufacturers warrantees for
piping systems are not compromised by installation of vibration isolation equipment.
D. Satisfy the requirements of all applicable codes.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT AND PLENUM LINER
A. The sound absorbing characteristics of duct and plenum lining shall comply with this
specification. Representative samples shall be subjected to tests in accordance with
applicable standards and procedures in order to demonstrate such compliance. A special
test for this project is not required if the manufacturer has certified test results for proposed
products.
B. Submittals shall include octave band absorption coefficients and NRC values for specified
thicknesses and densities of lining determined in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM C 423 in an F-25 Mounting configuration. Submittals shall also include, but shall
not be limited to, a complete description of the tested material and the test conditions,
methods, and procedures.
C. All sound absorption measurements and calculations shall be made in complete
conformance with the latest revision of ASTM C 423, Test Method for Sound Absorption
and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method, and ASTM E795,
Standard Practice for Mounting Specimens during Sound Absorption Tests. Test
specimens shall be tested in an F-25 Mounting configuration. Tests shall be conducted by a
laboratory that is accredited under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program (NVLAP) to conduct the test.
D. Duct or plenum lining at specified thicknesses and densities shall have the following
minimum octave band sound absorption coefficients when tested in the F-25 Mounting
configuration in accordance with ASTM E 795:
Octave Band Ctr. Frequency in Hertz
125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
1"-thick, 2.0pcf: .15 .50 .55 .80 .85 .95
2"-thick, 2.0pcf .25 .75 .90 .95 .95 .95
2.3 ACOUSTICAL FLEXIBLE DUCT
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 01 81 23 - 7
A. Flexible insulated round duct, with sound-transparent inner liner constructed of spun-
bonded nylon.
B. Must comply with all applicable codes and UL requirements.
2.4 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Equipment: Vibration isolation and seismic
control equipment shall include but is not limited to the following:
1. Neoprene Pads (with Appropriate Isolation Washers and Bolts): Minimum 0.1”
deflection "Super W" by Mason or approved equal.
2. Neoprene Isolator (with Integral Seismic Restraint): Minimum 0.2” deflection
"BR" by Mason or approved equal.
3. Steel Spring Isolator (with Integral Seismic Restraint): Minimum 2” deflection
"SSLFH" by Mason, "FYS" by Peabody or approved equal. Springs internal to
air handling units shall meet the same stability and deflection requirements as
provided by SSLFH, FYS, or equal.
4. Neoprene Isolation Hanger: Minimum 0.2” deflection "BRD" by A/B, "HD" by
Mason, "RH" by Peabody or approved equal.
5. Steel Spring Isolation Hanger: Minimum 1” deflection "30" by Mason or
approved equal.
6. Rooftop Spring Curb: Min. 2” deflection CMAB by Mason or approved equal.
7. Flexible Pipe Connectors: "MFTNC, MFNEC or MFTFU" by Mason or
approved equal.
8. Flexible Duct Connectors: "KNC-100B" by Peabody or equal.
9. Flexible Electrical Connection: Flexible conduit installed grossly slack.
10. Field-Fabricated Resilient/Airtight Sleeve: Oversized sleeve around pipe,
conduit, or duct penetration. 1” clearance all around penetrating element, packed
with glass fiber and sealed with at least 1/2” deep bead of acoustical sealant.
B. Warrantees: All vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall be warranted
against defective workmanship, operation and materials for the life of the equipment
supported by these items.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 NOISE MEASUREMENTS
For all spaces listed in Paragraph 1.2, building system noise measurements shall be made as
follows, as part of the project TAB measurement, adjustment, and reporting requirements:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 01 81 23 - 8
A. Noise levels shall be quantified in all project spaces and compared with the specified
maximum allowable Background Noise Criteria (NC) as part of the testing, adjusting and
balancing process. Insofar as possible under the jurisdiction of the Air Balance Contractor
and the Mechanical Contractor, adjustments shall be made to air handling equipment to
insure that maximum NC are not exceeded in any project space.
B. Submittals shall include the following:
1. Proposed test procedure and measurement equipment before beginning work.
2. Final air balance report, including tabulation of reject space by room number,
specified maximum NC, measured NC at each measurement location, octave band
sound levels in dB from 63 Hz to 8000 Hz plotted on NC curves at each
measurement location, and notes relating to additionally encountered noise sources
(other than HVAC).
C. The same Air Balance Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of air balancing
including all sound level measurements. The Air Balance Contractor shall have successful
experience in air balancing and sound level measurements including no less than five years’
experience on projects equal to the size and complexity of this work.
D. Measurement equipment shall be recently-calibrated Type 1 Sound Level Meter with Class
II Octave Band Filters and 1/2" random-incidence microphone.
E. The procedure for noise measurements shall be as follows:
1. Sound pressure level measurements shall be made at 5' above floor level in the
center of each project space in all octave bands centered between 63 Hz and 8000
Hz, inclusive. Measured levels shall be recorded in decibels (re .0002 microbar) on
paper in tabular form and plotted against NC curves for the record. Testing shall
be accomplished only during periods when no other trades are working within the
building outside noises are at a minimum. Make note of and record on paper all
noise sources which cannot be removed, such sources might include electrical,
lighting, and plumbing systems.
2. Rebalance or adjust all air handling equipment causing noise in spaces in excess of
maximum allowable NC. Re-measure sound levels in all such spaces to show
compliance with maximum allowable NC. Repeat until noise is minimized to the
satisfaction of the Architect, Mechanical Engineer, and Acoustical Consultant.
3.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
A. After each equipment unit installation is complete and under full operational load,
vibration isolators shall be adjusted so that loads are transferred to them and away from
temporary blocking washers and shims. Blocks and shims then shall be removed and
used as gauges to judge required clearances. Washers shall be moved away.
B. Inspect all vibration-isolated equipment, coordinate the work of all involved trades, and
see that vibration isolators are not short-circuited by seismic restraints, drain lines,
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL 01 81 23 - 9
conduits, stanchions, control tubing, duct connections, pipe connections, etc. Ensure that
hanger isolators and their rods or wires do not touch any other building component.
C. Obtain "rough-in" inspection and approval from the Architect of any installation to be
covered or enclosed, prior to such closure.
D. Schedule final inspection(s) by the equipment Manufacturer after installation as needed.
Obtain "rough-in" inspection by the Manufacturer of any installation to be covered or
enclosed, prior to such closure.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
DEMOLITION 02 41 00 - 1
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Building envelope and interior demolition as denoted in construction documents, inclusive of coordination, abatement and removal of hazardous materials and toxic substances disturbed in the course of completing the project’s overall scope of work.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 29 CFR 1926 – U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
B. NFPA 241 – Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations.
C. 2016 California Codes for demolition Work, safety of structure, electrical disconnection and reconnection dust control and disposal
D. 2016 California Fire Code (CFC), California Code of Regulations, (CCR) Title 24, Part 9, Chapter 33 - Fire Safety During Construction and Demolition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and
construction of barricades and fences. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required. 1. Minimum of 5 years of documented experience.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
DEMOLITION 02 41 00 - 2
B. Obtain required permits from authorities.
C. Notify affected utility companies before starting Work and comply with their requirements.
D. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits.
E. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without prior written notice to the Owner.
F. Conform to procedures applicable when existing hazardous or contaminated materials are disturbed.
PART 2 - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCOPE
A. Hazardous Materials: It is anticipated that hazardous materials will be encountered to complete the Project Scope of Work. When the hazardous materials, as described in Exhibit A, to be disturbed: 1. Notify the City of Glendale’s project representative, the Architect and applicable
regulatory authorities that work will commence in the affected areas, a minimum of fourteen (14) days prior.
2. After notifying that work will commence in the affected areas, proceed with the abatement and the removal of the hazardous materials by conforming to 29 CFR 1926 and state and local regulations.
3. Removal of the hazardous materials must be completed by a qualified and experienced hazmat abatement and removal company.
B. Verify that the abatement and the removal of hazardous materials remediation is complete.
C. Remove paving and curbs as required to accomplish new work.
D. Remove opening metal frames, doors, and glazing as required to accomplish new work.
E. Remove portions of building envelope as required to accomplish new work
F. Remove interior partitions, fixtures, finishes and equipment as required to accomplish new work.
G. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, and recycling.
3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with other requirements specified in Division 01.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
DEMOLITION 02 41 00 - 3
B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits if applicable. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241. 3. Use of explosives is not permitted. 4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be
removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures.
5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the
public. 7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and
occupants. 8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do
not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations.
10. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.
C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from City of Glendale.
D. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed.
E. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
F. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.
G. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and City of Glendale; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.
H. Hazardous Materials: Comply with 29 CFR 1926 and state and local regulations.
I. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management. 2. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 3. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection
point or point of reuse.
J. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01 Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
DEMOLITION 02 41 00 - 4
3.3 EXISTING UTILITES
A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits.
B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.
C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.
D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to City of Glendale.
E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to City of Glendale.
F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary.
G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities.
H. Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition zone; identify and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected, in same manner as other utilities to remain.
3.4 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management.
C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 1
SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide concrete formwork for all cast-in-place concrete.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 2000 - Reinforcing Steel.
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The latest editions of specifications and standards referenced herein and published by the
following organizations applies to the Work of this Section only to the extent specified by the
reference.
ACI American Concrete Institute
PS U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standards
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to requirements of
2016 CBC and the following Publications.
ACI 347 - Standard Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
B. Complete concrete elements to conform to required shape, line and dimensions. Include all
possible loading conditions in the design of formwork and shoring. Ensure all applicable
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 2
safety laws are strictly enforced and maintain a safe construction Project.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications Sections.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform Work in compliance with applicable requirements of
governing authorities having jurisdiction.
Chapter 19 of the 2016 California Building Code including all Applicable State of California
Amendments (CBC).
1. Article 1.05 Design Requirements of this Section 03 1000.
B. Construction and maintenance of all concrete formwork shall be under the continuous
supervision of a foreman with not less than 3 years of successful experience in the forming and
the removal of forms for architectural quality work.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Deliver and store all forms and materials above ground in a manner to protect them from
damage, contamination and deterioration.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work of other Sections and Divisions shown to be incorporated into concrete
elements. Work of others shown passing through footings and concrete walls are only allowed
if detailed on the Structural Drawings.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIAL
A. Forms for Unexposed Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will not be exposed in the
finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material.
1. Lumber: Standard or better grade Douglas Fir, meeting the requirements of WCLIB
“Standard Grading Rules No. 16" or WWPA “Western Lumber Grading Rules 88. Use
boards which are surfaced on at least 2 edges and one side for a tight fit.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 3
2. Plywood: B-B Plyform, Class I, exterior grade meeting the requirements of PS 1, 5/8-
inch minimum thickness for 12 inch stud spacing and 3/4-inch minimum thickness for 16
inch stud spacing.
B. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with
plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel-type materials, to
provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practical sizes to
minimize number of joints. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand
pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection.
C. Framing, Studding and Bracing: “Standard” or “Construction” grade Douglas Fir, S4S,
meeting the requirements of the WCLIB “Standard Grading Rules No. 16” or WWPA
“Western Lumber Grading Rules 88.”
D. Form Coating: Non-grain raising and non-staining type that will not leave residual matter on
surface of concrete or adversely affect proper bonding of subsequent application of other
material applied to concrete surface. Coatings containing mineral oils or other nondrying
ingredients will not be permitted. Form coating for use with form liners shall be of type
recommended by form liner manufacturer.
E. Nails: Common wire, steel.
F. Waterstop: 3/16" thick, ribbed, PVC waterstop by Greenstreak or approved equal.
2.2 TIES AND SPREADERS
A. Form Ties and Spreaders: Standard metal form clamp assembly, of type acting as spreaders
and leaving no metal within 1 inch of concrete surfaces. Inner tie rod shall be left in concrete
when forms are removed. Wire ties or wood spreaders will not be permitted. Form ties shall
be a type which does not leave an open hole through the concrete and which permits neat and
solid patching at every hole.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Concrete below grade may be placed directly against earth in open trenches. Side forms for
footings may be of earth provided the soil will stand without caving and the side of the banks
are made with neat cuts to minimum dimensions indicated on the Drawings.
B. Where footing excavations exceed widths and lengths shown on the Drawings, extend
formwork to bottom of excavation.
C. Make all necessary provisions to prevent cave-ins during the placement of concrete.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 4
D. All forms shall be constructed true to line and level, sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of
mortar, and shall conform per ACI Standards, to the dimensions of the finished concrete as
shown on the Drawings. Finished concrete surfaces shall show no visible signs of bow or
deflection.
E. Wooden supports or spreaders for forms shall not extend into concrete pours.
F. Set and secure all required steel assemblies, angles, pipe sleeves, bolts, inserts, and other such
items required to be anchored in the concrete before the concrete is placed.
G. Construct all forms straight, true, plumb, and square within a tolerance horizontally of one in
200 and a tolerance vertically of one in 500.
H. Keep forms sufficiently wetted to prevent joints opening up before concrete is placed.
I. Bracing:
1. Properly brace and tie the forms together so as to maintain position and shape and to
ensure safety of personnel.
2. Construct all bracing, supporting members and centering of ample size and strength to
safely carry, without excessive deflections, all dead and live loads to which they may be
subjected.
3. Properly space the forms apart and securely tie them together using metal spreader ties
that give positive tying and accurate spreading.
3.2 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Do not disturb or remove forms until the concrete has developed sufficient strength to safely
sustain its own weight and superimposed loads above. After concrete is placed, a minimum
time period of ten days shall elapse before the removal of forms can be considered.
1. Forms for at grade concrete may be removed in 24 hours providing removal does not
damage surfaces and edges of concrete.
B. Use all means necessary to protect workers, passers by, the installed Work of other trades, and
the complete safety of the structure.
C. Cut nail and tie wires or form ties off flush, and level all surfaces smooth and clean.
D. Remove metal spreader ties on exposed concrete by removing or snapping off inside the wall
surfaces and patching up the resulting pockets to match the surrounding areas.
E. Flush all holes resulting from the use of spreaders, rods and sleeve nuts, using water, and then
solidly pack throughout the wall thickness with cement grout applied under pressure by means
of a grouting gun; grout shall be one part Portland cement to 2.5 parts sand; apply grout
immediately after removing forms.
Section continued on next page
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 5
3.3 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND SCHEDULE
A. Include this form with submittals of this Specification Section, unless a substitution product is
being proposed, in which case refer to Division 1 Section “Substitutions” for Substitution
requests.
Contractor’s Contractor is to acknowledge with initials each submittal included.
Initials Attach a letter of explanation for each submittal not included
____________ All submitted products are as specified.
B. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE:
________ 1. Qualifications (relevant experience) of foreman.
END OF SECTION 03 1000
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
REINFORCING STEEL 03 20 00 - 1
SECTION 03 20 00 - REINFORCING STEEL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish, fabricate and install all reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete as
necessary to complete all reinforced concrete work.
B. Furnish and fabricate reinforcing steel only for masonry construction.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 2000 – Reinforcing Steel
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The latest editions of specifications and standards referenced herein and published by
the following organizations apply to the Work only to the extent specified by the
reference.
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AWS American Welding Society
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CBC STDS 2016 California Building Code Standards
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
REINFORCING STEEL 03 20 00 - 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications Sections.
B. Refer to “Submittal Requirements and Schedules” Article at the end of this Section for
required submittals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform Work in accordance with applicable requirements of
governing authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Chapters 19 and 21 of the 2016 California Building Code.
B. Provide mill Reports for all types and sizes of reinforcing steel for review and
acceptance prior to fabrication and transporting reinforcing steel to the construction
site.
1. Mill reports shall contain the steel source, description, heat number, yield point,
ultimate tensile strength, elongation percentage, bend test and chemical analysis.
a. If the reports show that material is satisfactory no tests will be required.
b. For foreign steel, testing as specified below will be required by a testing
laboratory acceptable to the Architect and Building Department.
c. Certification from any other sources will not be acceptable.
2. Ensure that the material delivered for use is that represented by the mill reports
and obtain copies of mill reports, examine them, certify whether the material
represented complies with Specifications requirements, and make distribution of
reports as required. Report chemical composition of each heat, as determined by
ladle analysis.
3. Where materials proposed for use cannot be identified, the Owner shall pay for an
approved testing laboratory to make one series of tests (tensile and bend) from
each 2.5 tons, or fraction thereof, of each size and kind of reinforcing steel.
Include 2 samples, minimum, of sufficient length to allow tests to be made on the
as-rolled bar. The Owner shall then back-charge the Contractor for all testing
fees.
C. Contact Architect for observation of all concrete reinforcing.
D. Testing and Inspections shall comply with Section 014100 and as noted in the Contract
Documents.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
REINFORCING STEEL 03 20 00 - 3
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Bundle reinforcing steel and tag with suitable identification to facilitate sorting and
placing in accordance to the placement drawings.
B. Store above ground, in a manner to prevent excessive rusting and fouling with dirt,
grease, and other bond breaking coatings.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work of other Sections and Divisions shown to be incorporated into
concrete elements. Work of others shown passing through footings and concrete walls
are only allowed if detailed on the Structural Drawings.
B. Coordinate placement locations of all masonry dowels with Section 04 2000 whenever
they are required to be embedded in cast-in-concrete.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be new, free from rust and mill scale. Reinforcing bars shall
comply with ASTM A 615:
Grade 60 for all bars .
B. Reinforcing bars shown welded on the Drawings and welded in the field shall be new
material, free from rust and mill scale, conforming to ASTM A 706, Grade 60 for all
sizes.
C. Tie Wire: 16 gage, annealed conforming to ASTM A 82.
D. Welding Electrodes: AWS A5.1 or Grade E70XX for welding Grade 60, ASTM A
706 bars.
2.2 SUPPORTS FOR REINFORCING BARS
A. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers, concrete block
and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars in place.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
REINFORCING STEEL 03 20 00 - 4
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Bend all bars cold. Comply with ACI 318-14 Section 26.6.3.
2. Do not use bars with kinks or bend not shown on the Drawings.
3. Make bends for stirrups and ties in accordance with details on the Drawings.
B. Fabricate and place reinforcing steel in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice,
ACI” SP-66 and ACI 318-14.
C. Welding of ASTM A 706 reinforcing shall conform to ACI 318-14 Section 26.6.4.
3.2 PLACING
B.A. General: Before commencing with concrete placement, accurately place all concrete
reinforcing steel including dowels for masonry. Secure in place and provide positive
support using concrete block, metal chairs or spacers, or by metal hangers. Set tie-wire
ends directed into concrete, away from formed exposed concrete surfaces. Comply
with ACI 318-14 Section 26.6.2.
1. Reinforcing steel shall be placed in accordance with the Drawings and the latest
edition of the CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice”.
B. Clearance:
1. Preserve clear space between bars of not less than one times the nominal diameter
of reinforcing, but not less than 1.33 times the maximum size of coarse aggregate,
nor less than 1 inch.
2. Provide minimum concrete coverage for reinforcing as noted in the General Notes
shown on Drawings. Minimum concrete coverage dimensions also applies to tie
wires.
C. Splicing:
1. Horizontal and vertical bars:
a. Place bars with minimum lap at splices to develop the strength of the bar.
b. Bars may be wired together at laps.
c. Whenever possible, stagger the splices of adjacent bars.
d. Splice bars a minimum as shown on the Drawings.
e. Clear spacing to be the same as Section 3.2B(1) above.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
REINFORCING STEEL 03 20 00 - 5
3.3 CLEANING REINFORCEMENT
A. Steel reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed, shall be free from rust, loose mill
scale, oil, paint, and all other coatings which will destroy or reduce bond between steel
and concrete, and between steel and grout. Comply with ACI 318-14, Section
26.6.1.2.
Section continued on next page
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
REINFORCING STEEL 03 20 00 - 6
3.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND SCHEDULE
A. Include this form with submittals of this Specification Section, unless a substitution
product is being proposed, in which case refer to Division 1 Section “Substitutions”
for Substitution requests.
Contractor’s Contractor is to acknowledge with initials each submittal included.
Attach a letter of explanation for each submittal not included.
Initials
____________ All submitted products are as specified.
B. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE:
_________ 1. Mill certificates for each size and grade of steel intended for use in
the Project, stating physical and chemical properties and
compliance with ASTM requirements.
_________ 2. Placement sheets and related details. Indicate sizes, fabricated
shapes, dimensions, spacing, material, grade and locations within
concrete and masonry Work.
3. Epoxy adhesive.
END OF SECTION 03 2000
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1
SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide finish, cure, repair, protect and clean (where exposed) all cast-in-place concrete
required for foundations, starter walls, slabs-on-grade, and other concrete indicated.
B. Provide moisture barriers, granular subbase and sand cover for moisture barrier located below
concrete slabs cast-on-grade.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03 2000 - Reinforcing Steel
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The latest editions of specifications and standards referenced herein and published by the
following organizations apply to the Work of this Section only to the extent specified by the
reference.
ACI American Concrete Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
CBC STDS 2016 California Building Code Standards
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications Sections.
B. Refer to “Submittal Requirements and Schedules” Article at the end of this Section for
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 2
required submittals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform Work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Chapter 19 of the 2016 California Building Code including all applicable State of
California Amendments (CBC).
2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
3. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
4. ACI Publication SP-15 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings with
selected ACI and ASTM references. All apply to the Work of this Section where
applicable.
B. Specified aggregates, cement, and color from single sources only.
C. Approved concrete mix designs shall not be altered without approval of the Architect.
D. Testing and Inspection: Shall comply with Special Inspection form D-103, Special Inspections
stated in structural drawings, and with the 2016 CBC except as modified below.
1. Contractor shall coordinate and provide access to all locations for specimen sampling and
inspection.
2. Contractor shall notify Project Inspector at least 48 hours prior to commencing
preparation for placement of concrete. Coordinate and provide access to all locations for
testing and inspection of Concrete Work.
E. Contractor and tradesmen constructing forms, placing and curing Architectural concrete for
walls, columns and piers shall have at least five years of successful experience in this work.
Provide experience records and references to Architect immediately upon receiving notice to
proceed.
F. Concrete must have a Floor Flatness, Ff, of at least 50 with a minimum of 35. Concrete must
have a Floor Levelness, Fl, of at least 40.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Deliver and store all materials in a manner to protect them from damage, contamination and
deterioration.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with Divisions 12, 14, 22, 26 and other Divisions requiring items of their Work to
be embedded into cast-in-place concrete.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 3
B. Notify Architect and Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours prior to each commencement of
concrete placement and before forms are closed-in.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II
B. Course and Fine Aggregates: ASTM C 33
C. Water: Clean and not be detrimental to concrete
2.2 ADMIXTURES
A. Chemical: Water Reducing per ASTM C 494, Type A
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion
B. Vapor Barrier: Class A conforming to ASTM Standard E 1745-11.
C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water
reducing and plasticzing agents, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of
5,000 psi within 28 days.
D. Concrete Adhesive: “SET-XP” Adhesive by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Hilti (Hilti
“HIT-RE 500-V3”), or approved equal.
E. Curing compound:
1. Liquid membrane-forming compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type 1 (1D), Class B,
guaranteed not to affect the appearance of the concrete surfaces, and the bond, adhesion,
or effectiveness of finishes and surface treatment specified herein to be applied to
concrete.
2. Curing compound used on exposed concrete surfaces shall be non-discoloring, fast drying
and shall be conclusively demonstrated not to darken or yellow with age.
3. Curing compound for use on concrete floors to receive adhered covering shall be
specially formulated for such use and shall be certified by the manufacturer not to inhibit
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 4
the bonding qualities of flooring adhesives.
2.4 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS
A. Closed cell polyvinyl chloride form, resilient, recovery of 95 percent if not compressed more
than 50 percent of original thickness.
B. Construction Joint Devices: Non-metallic tongue and groove profile.
C. Sealants and primers: As specified in Section 07 9000.
2.5 CONCRETE MIX
A. Submit concrete mix design(s) prepared by a testing laboratory, designed by a registered civil
or structural engineer, and approved by Architect review and acceptance, prior to delivery of
concrete to site.
1. Provide cast-in-concrete to meet the following:
a. Normal (Stone) weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301, except as noted below
b. Minimum 28-day compressive strength:
1. Slab-on-grade & footings: 2,500 psi
c. Maximum water-cement ratio:
1. Slab-on-grade & footings: 0.45
2. Footings: 0.45
3. Retaining walls: 0.45
4. Caisson: 0.45
d. Slump: 4" (plus or minus 1 inch) unless noted otherwise.
e. Fly Ash - (up to a maximum of 18% of cement content by volume).
f. Coarse aggregate to be Santa Margarita Granite Aggregate, San Gabriel Aggregate,
Heavy-Media Processed; or other clean coarse aggregate of lower or equal
reactivity.
g. Fine aggregate from Santa Margarita Granite Aggregate, Moorpark Source, or other
clean fine aggregate of lower or equal reactivity.
h. Calcium chloride not allowed.
B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM
C 94 and furnish batch ticket information.
2.6 SUBBASE BELOW CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND SLABS-ON-GRADE:
A. Clean, free draining Santa Margarita Granite sand, Moorpark Source, or those pre-approved
non-reactive fine aggregate.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 5
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify requirements for minimum concrete cover over reinforcement.
B. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are
accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing Work, drill holes in existing concrete,
insert steel dowels and fill solid with concrete adhesive.
C. Coordinate the placement of joist devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement
of form accessories.
3.3 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318-14 Section 26.5.2, and ACI Publication SP 15.
B. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction
joints.
C. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
D. Place slabs in checkerboard pattern as indicated.
E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints are
not disturbed during concrete placement.
F. Maintain legible copies of all transit mixed trip tickets signed by a certified weight master and
records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test
samples taken for each load delivered to site.
3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Provide smooth rubbed finish for exposed interior concrete walls.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 6
B. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
1. Steel trowel surfaces for all interior slabs unless noted otherwise.
3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Cure floor surfaces with two (2) coats of spray applied curing compound in accordance with
ACI 308.
D. Curing of concrete shall comply with ACI 318–14 Section 26.5.3.
3.6 PATCHING
A. Notify Architect and Project Inspector to review concrete surfaces immediately upon removal
of forms.
B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete in not acceptable. Notify Architect
upon discovery.
C. Patch imperfections as directed.
3.7 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective Concrete Definition: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details,
dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements.
B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect.
C. Do not patch, fill, tough-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon approval of
Architect for each individual area.
3.8 TESTS & INSPECTIONS
A. Tests and inspections shall comply with Section 01 4100 of these specifications.
Section continued on next page
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 7
3.8 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND SCHEDULE
A. Include this form with submittals of this Specification Section, unless a substitution product is
being proposed, in which case refer to Division 1 Section “Substitutions” for Substitution
requests.
Contractor’s Contractor is to acknowledge with initials each submittal included. Attach a letter
of explanation for each submittal not included.
Initials
________ All submitted products are as specified.
B. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE:
______ 1. Product Data:
a. Concrete Aggregates
b. Cement
c. Admixtures
d. Integral Colors
e. Curing materials
f. Attachment devices
_________ 2. Concrete mix designs.
END OF SECTION 03 30 00
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 1
SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide labor, equipment, supervision and structural steel as shown on the Drawings, specified
herein and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 032000 - Reinforcing Steel
B. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
C. Section 053100 - Metal Deck
D. Section 099100 – Painting
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The latest editions of specifications and standards referenced herein, published by the
following organizations, apply to the Work of this Section only to the extent specified by the
reference.
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction.
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.
AWS American Welding Society.
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications Sections.
B. Refer to “Submittal Requirements and Schedules” Article at the end of this Section for
required submittals.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate structural steel members and assemblies in accordance with AISC Code of Standard
Practice and Specifications. Company performing the Work of this Section shall have a least
five years of satisfactory experience in fabricating structural steel.
B. Qualification of Welders: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance
with AWS D1.1, including the installation of welded studs & metal deck. Provide
certifications that welders to be employed have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests
within the past 12 months. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the
Contractor’s responsibility.
C. Codes and Standards: Perform Work in compliance with applicable requirements of
governing authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Chapter 22 of the 2016 California Building Code including all applicable State of
California Amendments (CBC).
D. Erector: Company specializing in the Work for this Section shall have at least 5 years of
satisfactory experience in the erection of structural steel.
E. Testing and Inspections: Comply with Chapter 22 of the 2016 CBC, Section 01 4100 Testing
and Inspection and as noted on the Structural Drawings.
1. Contractor shall notify Owner’s Testing and Inspection Service at least 48 hours prior to
shop welding and prior to field welding of structural steel. Coordinate and provide
access to all locations for testing and inspection of structural steel Work.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Delivery and Storage:
1. Deliver members and materials to the job site properly marked to identify the location for
which they are intended and in time to insure uninterrupted progress of the construction.
2. Use markings corresponding to markings shown on the approved Shop Drawings.
3. Store materials in a manner to preclude damage and permit ready access for inspection
and identification of each shipment. Store steel materials, either plain or fabricated,
above the ground upon platforms, pallets, skids, or other supports.
4. Keep materials free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter, and protect from
corrosion. Material showing evidence of damage will be rejected and shall be
immediately removed from the site.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations of items to be embedded in and/or attached to the Work of Sections 03
1000, 03 3000 and 05 3100.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 3
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Use only new and undamaged materials. Steel which in the opinion of the Architect is
corroded or physically damaged shall not be incorporated in the construction.
B. Exposed Steel Work: Where steel surfaces are exposed to view in the finish construction, use
only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding or by
welding and grinding; before cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Structural steel wide flange shapes: ASTM A 992, Grade 50.
B. Angles, channels, plates, rods and bars: ASTM A36
C. Structural steel tubes: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
D. Structural steel pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B.
E. Common Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325N. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts where exposed
and where embedded in masonry.
F. Anchor bolts and Rods: ASTM F 1554
G. Automatic End Welded Studs: Studs shall be Nelson Granular Flux filled Shear Connectors or
Anchor Studs, or an approved equal. Studs shall be manufactured of C-1015 cold rolled steel
conforming to ASTM Specification A-108. When welding through deck, the stud diameter
shall not be greater than 2.5 times the beam flange thickness. Comply with AWS D1.1.
H. Filler metal for welding: Meet the requirements of AWS D1.1. Electrodes shall be as
recommended by their manufacturer for position and other conditions of actual use.
Electrodes shall be E70 series.
I. Moment frame welding: Meet the requirements of AWS D1.8.
J. Primer: Manufacturer’s or fabricator’s standard, fast curing, lead free, universal modified
alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility
with finish paint systems indicated and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field
applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure, complying with performance requirements of
Federal Specifications TT-P-645.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 4
K. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,
water reducing and plasticizing additive, capable of developing a minimum compressive
strength of 5,000 psi in 7 days.
L. Galvanize structural steel assemblies, members and connectors not permanently protected
from weather and moisture per ASTM A 123.
M. Templates: Any commercial grade steel, not less than 10 gage.
N. Galvanizing Repair Compound: High zinc dust content galvanizing repair paint conforming
to Mil. Spec DOD-P-21035A, hot applied zinc rich material or equal.
O. Reinforcing steel shall conform to Section 03 2000.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and assemble materials in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Shearing, flame
cutting, and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately. Coordinate connection details
where steel is connected to concrete and masonry. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions, where
possible, just before commencing fabrication of connection details. Correct construction that
does not fit. Schedule and coordinate construction under this Section with that specified
elsewhere. When not otherwise indicated or specified, comply with application requirements
of AISC “Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings”.
B. Before beginning fabrication or Work, wire-brush materials clean of loose mill scale and rust,
and straighten by methods that will not injure the steel and so that they will comply with AISC
tolerances.
C. Welded Connections: Make welded connections in accordance with AWS D1.1. Assemble
and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without
warp. Grind and dress smooth all welds exposed to view in the finish construction, so that the
shape and profile of the item welded is preserved.
D. Automatic End-Welded Studs: The studs shall be automatically end welded in accordance with
AWS D1.1 in such a manner as to provide complete fusion between the end of the stud and the
plate. There shall be no porosity or evidence of lack of fusion between the welded end of the
stud and the plate. The stud shall decrease in length during welding approximately 1/8" for
5/8" diameter studs and under, and 3/16" for stud diameters greater than 5/8" diameter.
Welding shall be done only by qualified welders approved by the welding inspector.
E. Holes: Cut, drill, or punch holes at right angles to the surface of the metal. Do not cut or
enlarge holes by burning. Holes may be enlarged by careful reaming. Holes in base or
bearing plates shall be drilled. Holes shall be provided in members to permit connection the
construction of other trades.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 5
1. Material may be punched 1/16 inch larger than the nominal diameter of the bolt,
whenever the thickness of metal is equal to or less than the diameter of the bolt plus
1/8 inch.
F. Templates: Fabricate individual templates for each and every assembly to be anchored to or
embedded in concrete and/or masonry. Locate working centerlines of each template by
drilling hole or deep center punch. Remove templates prior to erection of members.
2.4 SHOP PAINTING
A. General: Shop paint structural steel except galvanized members or those members or portions
of members to be embedded in concrete or in masonry & grout. On embedded steel which is
partially exposed, paint the exposed portion and the initial 2 inches of embedded areas only.
Do not paint surfaces to be welded.
B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted.
Remove loose rust, loose mill scale and splatter, slag or flux deposits using power tool
cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP-3.
C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply shop primer in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and at a rate to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5
mils. Use painting methods which results in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and
exposed surfaces, without drips, sags, etc.
2.5 GALVANIZING
A. General: All steel and ferrous metal items located on the exterior of the buildings, exposed to
moisture and otherwise indicated to be galvanized shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process,
meeting the requirements of ASTM A 123. All required hot-dip galvanizing shall be done
after fabrication, in the largest sections possible. Items too large for available dip tanks shall
be sprayed, by approved methods, with molten zinc to coating thickness of 0.003 inch to 0.004
inch.
B. Coating Weight: Weight of the Zinc coating per square foot of actual surface shall average
not less than 2.0 ounces and no individual specimen shall be less than 1.8 ounces.
C. Repair of Coating: Restore shop galvanized metal necessitating field soldering or welding
which in any manner removes original galvanizing, by using galvanizing repair compound in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 6
A. Field measure and Templates: Secure field measurements required for proper and adequate
fabrication and installation. Furnish templates for exact location of items to be embedded in
concrete and/or masonry including instructions required for installation.
B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: In accordance with California Code of Regulations (CCR),
Title 8, design, provide temporary shoring, erection bracing and bracing members with
connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and
connections when permanent members are securely in place and final connections are
complete. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structure as erection
proceeds.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Setting Base and Bearing Plates: After the supported members have been plumbed, aligned
and properly positioned, set base and bearing plates. Support plates on adjustable bolt
supports or shims until grout has set. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or
plates to ensure that no voids remain. Follow grout manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Framing: Except as specified herein, erect framing in accordance with AISC Code of
Standard Practice and the 2016 CBC. Plan and layout framing so that cutting will not be
required. Erect construction plumb, square, and true to line, level, and position indicated
within tolerances established in the AISC Code of Standard Practice.
C. Holding and Protection: In assembling and during welding hold the component parts with
sufficient clamps or other adequate means to keep parts straight and in close contact. In
welding, take precautions to minimize “lock-up” stress and distortion due to heat. In wind,
perform welding only after adequate wind protection is furnished and set up.
D. Connections: Bolt field connections except where welding is indicated. Perform welding as
specified for shop welding.
E. On exposed construction, remove erection bolts, temporary welds, run-off plates and backing
strips. Fill erection bolt holes with plug welds and grind smooth.
F. Testing shall comply with Section 01 4100.
Section continued on the next page
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 7
3.3 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND SCHEDULE
A. Include this form with submittals of this Specification Section, unless a substitution product is
being proposed, in which case refer to Division 1 Section “Substitutions” for Substitution
requests.
Contractor’s Contractor is to acknowledge with initials each submittal included. Attach a letter
of explanation for each submittal not included.
Initials
_____________ All submitted products are as specified.
B. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE:
_______ 1. Fabricator’s Qualifications
_______ 2. Erector’s Qualifications
_______ 3. Mill test certificates including heat or melt numbers for each type and size of steel
used in the Work.
_______ 4. Shop and erection drawings including complete details and schedules for
fabrication, shop and field assembly of members and erection bracing. Should
more than one submittal be required, late submittals shall clearly identify
materials added or revised subsequent to previous submittal.
a. Shop drawings and fabricated assemblies and members shall be properly
marked to identify their location on site.
b. Indicate each weld by AWS symbol, size, type and length of weld.
c. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installing anchor bolts
and other steel assemblies into concrete and/or masonry.
d. Identify shop drawing details by reference to sheet and detail number of the
Drawings.
_______ 5. Welder’s Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verify AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
END OF SECTION 05 1200
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-1
SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide cold-formed punched channel studs framing for exterior walls and partitions as shown
and specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications Sections.
B. Refer to “Submittal Requirements and Schedules” Article at the end of this Section for required
submittals.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. System components (studs, track, blocking, etc.) shall be by a single manufacturer.
B. Tolerance: Framing shall be plumb, even and flat to within 1/8" in 10'. Tolerance shall be non-
cumulative.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to project site in manufacturer’s
unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off
ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof coverings.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL FRAMING
A. System Components: With metal framing required, provide manufacturer’s standard steel
runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories
as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete
metal framing system.
B. Materials and Finishes:
1. For 16-gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality
prime steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi; A653.
2. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A653 for
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 2
minimum G60 coating.
3. Fasteners: Provide nuts, bolts, washers, screws, and other fasteners with corrosion-resistant
plated finish.
4. Welding & Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS D1.3 and as recommended by stud
manufacturer.
5. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damage, prepare surfaces and repair in
accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A780.
C. “C”-Shaped Studs: Manufacturer’s standard steel studs of shape and gage indicated on
Drawings, with 1.625 inches flange and flange return lip, unless otherwise noted on the
drawings.
1. Provide stud size as indicated on Drawings.
2. Comply with ICC ESR-3064P.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate
panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform
lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion.
B. Fastening: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding,
bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer. All screws shall be per Hilti [ICC
ESR-2196] or ITW Buildex [ICC ESR-3223].
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Prior to start of installation of metal framing systems, meet at Project Site with installers of
other work including door and mechanical and electrical work.
2. Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate layout and support
provisions for interfacing work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer’s
printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout
at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of
construction involved. For interior partitions, do not exceed 48" o.c. for nail or power driven
fasteners or 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. For exterior partitions, do not exceed 24"
o.c. for nail or power driven fasteners or 16" o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 3
fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.
C. Set studs plum, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Where stud system abuts structural walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of lateral
stiffeners to supporting structure.
E. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or
partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and
furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of
supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer’s
recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting
from item supported.
F. Installation of Wall Stud System: Secure studs to bottom runner tracks by either welding or
screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. Secure studs to top runner tracks as shown
to accommodate building movement.
G. Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0" square with double stud at each jamb of frame except
where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer’s instructions. Install runner
tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud
shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs of wall. Secure stud system
wall opening frame in manner indicated.
H. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints, with separate studs; do not bridge the joint
with components of stud system.
I. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 5'-0" on
center. Weld at each intersection.
J. Field Painting: Touch-up shop-applied protective coatings damaged during handling and
installation. Use compatible primer per Section 099100 for prime coated surface; use
galvanizing repair paint for galvanized surfaces.
Section continued on next page
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 4
3.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND SCHEDULE
A. Include this form with submittals of this Specification Section, unless a substitution product is
being proposed, in which case refer to Division 1 Section “Substitutions” for Substitution
requests.
Contractor’s Contractor is to acknowledge with initials each submittal included.
Attach a letter of explanation for each submittal not included.
Initials
________ All submitted products are as specified.
B. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE:
______ 1. Physical data on each stud.
2. Framing attachments (screws, etc.)
3. Framing clips and bridging.
END OF SECTION 054000
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide all labor, material, equipment and installation to complete framing and sheathing of
exterior and interior walls and partitions as shown and specified.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
061600 – Sheathing
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The latest editions of specifications and standards referenced herein and published by the
following organizations apply to the Work of this Section only to the extent specified by the
reference.
APA American Plywood Association - Visual Inspection
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials.
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
DFPA Douglas Fir Plywood Association
ICC International Code Council
PS Public Standards of the U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of
Standards
CBC STDS 2016 California Building Code Standards
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications Sections.
1. Product data and current ICC Evaluation Service Reports for attachment
accessories.
a. Framing Devices and framing connectors
b. Gun nails
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform Work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Chapter 23 of the 2016 California Building Code (CBC).
2. ANSI/AF&PA NDS-2012 National Design Specification for Wood Construction.
3. Standard Grading Rules No. 17 of the WCLIB or the Standard Grading Rules of the
WWPA. Lumber to have visible grade stamp of an agency certified by the WCLIB.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with Work of other Sections to be attached to, or built into,
wood framing.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER
A. Moisture content: The maximum moisture content of framing lumber shall not exceed 19%
just prior to enclosing or covering framing with plywood, gypsum wallboard and/or plaster.
To ensure compliance, lumber up to 2 inch thick should be seasoned to a moisture content of
19% or less and be stamped “S-Dry”. Lumber over 2 inch thick may be shipped unseasoned
and stamped “S-Green”.
B. Structural lumber shall be S4S stress-marked Douglas Fir-Larch, manufactured and graded in
accordance with WCLIB or WWPA, with minimum grades as follows unless noted otherwise:
1. Joists & Rafters No. 1
2. 4x & 6x Beams/Headers No. 1 or better
3. Wall Studs No. 1
4. Blocking, stripping & misc. No. 2
C. Grade stamp: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection
agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,
grade species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. All Nails shall be common wire nails with dimensions complying with CBC Table 2304.9.1,
manufacture shall conform to Fed. Spec, FF-N-1-1 and shall be hot-dipped galvanized for
exterior locations, high humidity locations and for treated wood; plain finish for other interior
locations; size and type to suit application.
1. Box nails and/or “Sinker” nails are not acceptable for Work shown and/or detailed on the
Structural Drawings.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3
B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers conforming to ASTM A-307 shall be hot-dipped galvanized for
exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interior
locations.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, non-headed type.
D. Lag Screws, Lag Bolts, Pins and Wood Screws: Sized to suit application: hot-dipped
galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for
other interior locations. Comply with NDS Section 11.1.3.
E. Framing connectors: current ICC Evaluation Services Report, sized and profiled to suit
application; hot-dipped galvanized finish, manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, KC
Metals, or approved equal.
F. Gun Nails: Use Common Nails or current ICC Evaluation Services Report special gun nails of
the same wire diameter and length as common nails specified on the Drawings. Box nails
and/or “Sinker” nails are not acceptable for Work shown on the Structural Drawings.
G. Drypack: Cement/sand drypack composed of one part cement to 3 parts sand. Dry mix first
then add with only enough water to hold the mix together. Drypack required under sills as
noted on the Drawings.
2.3 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): Chromated zinc chloride or Wolman salts for
pressure treated members.
B. Pressure treatment of Douglas Fir-Larch plates, nailers, ledgers and other exposed wood
structures, shall be in accordance with the AWPA’s standards for the purchase and
preservation of treated timber, with a retention of a least 0.35 lb. Wolman salts, 0.75 lb
chromated zinc chloride per cubic feet of lumber, or 0.30 lb. per cubic foot of
Pentachlorophenol type “C” light solvent. In exposed conditions, the incising of the lumber
shall be waived.
1. See Architectural Drawings for treatment of trellis members.
C. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear, manufactured by Woodlife, “Res” or equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Shop pressure treat and deliver to the site ready for installation all wood materials requiring
pressure impregnated preservatives.
B. Treat site-sawn ends and holes in pressure treated lumber.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4
1. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction.
2. Allow site applied preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
3.2 FRAMING
A. Layout, cutting and installation of framing shall be under the continuous supervision of a full-
time carpenter foreman experienced in all phases of framing construction and exposed
architectural framing required for the Work of this Section and on the Contract Drawings.
B. Structural members shall not be cut for pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., unless specifically noted or
detailed on the Structural Drawings.
C. Erect wood framing members true to lines and levels. Do not deviate from true alignment
more than 1/4 inch. Install simple span members with crown up.
D. Space framing members at 16 inches on center unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
E. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths except as noted on the
Drawings.
F. Holes in wood for bolts shall be drilled 1/32" to 1/16" larger than the diameter of the bolt.
G. Number of fasteners shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as noted in the ICC Evaluation
Report where number of fasteners are not shown on the Drawings.
H. Sheet metal framing connectors shown on the Drawings shall be Simpson connectors as
manufactured by the Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc., Superspeed Connectors as
manufactured by the KC Metals company or equal.
I. Bolts shall have standard cut washers under heads and/or nuts where in contact with wood.
Bolt threads shall not bear on wood.
J. Lag bolts, lag screws and wood screws shall be screwed (not driven) into wood members. In
placing lag screws or wood screws in wood, a hole of the same diameter and depth of “the
solid shank” shall be bored after which the hole with a diameter equal to the diameter of the
screw at the root of the thread shall be continued to a depth equal to the threaded screw length
portion. Provide cut washers under the heads of lag bolts/lag screws where in contact with
wood.
K. Bolts, lag screws and wood screws shall be re-tightened prior to the application of drywall,
plywood, plaster, etc.
L. Drive nails perpendicular to grain of wood in lieu of toenailing, where feasible.
M. For conditions not covered on the Drawings, provide penetration into the piece receiving the
point of not less than 1/2 the length of the common nail or spike, provided, however, that 16d
nails may be used to connect two pieces of two inch (nominal) thickness.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 5
3.4 CLEAN-UP
A. Clean up leftover materials of this Section and legally dispose off site. Dispose of pressure-
treated wood in an authorized disposal area. Burning of materials on the Site is prohibited.
Do not bury material and/or wood of any type on the job site.
END OF SECTION 06 1000
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM SHEATHING 06 16 43 - 1
SECTION 06 16 43
GYPSUM SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Gypsum sheathing board on exterior face of exterior stud walls.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. See Division 01
B. See section 01 81 22 Acoustical Performance Requirements
C. See section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Schedule installation to keep gypsum sheathing exposure to ultraviolet (UV) rays within
manufacturer's recommended limits.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the
work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer product data for sheathing and fasteners.
1. Submit a list of proposed products and accessories to be used on this project.
B. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or C 754,
provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and
deflections.
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in College
District's name and registered with manufacturer.
D. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information;
1. Low Emitting Materials
2. Local/Regional Materials
3. Recycled Materials
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM SHEATHING 06 16 43 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 5 years of experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Comply with Gypsum Association (GA) publication GA-801 "Handling Gypsum
Board" and applicable requirements of ASTM C 1264 for sampling, inspection, rejection,
certification, packaging, marking, shipping, handling, and storage of gypsum panel products.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide specific protection against problems resulting from defective
materials for 5 years after Substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: G-P Gypsum Products Dens-Glass Gold (Type X) sheathing board complying
with ASTM C 1177, www.gpgypsum.com.
B. National Gypsum Goldbond E2 XP, www.nationalgypsum.com.
C. USG Securock Glass-Mat Sheathing, www.usg.com.
D. Temple Inland GreenGlass, www.templeinland.com.
E. CertainTeed GlasRoc Sheathing, www.certainteed.com.
F. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Gypsum sheathing: One of the following 1/2-inch thick, or equal complying with ASTM C
1177.
1. Dens-Glass Gold (Standard and Type X) sheathing board by G-P Gypsum Products
complying with ASTM C 1177 (basis of design).
2. National Gypsum "Goldbond E2 XP."
3. USG "Securock Glass-Mat Sheathing."
4. Temple Inland "GreenGlass."
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM SHEATHING 06 16 43 - 3
B. Screws: Steel drill screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a
salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
1. For steel framing less than 0.0329-inch thick, attach sheathing in compliance with ASTM
C 1002.
2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112-inch thick, attach sheathing in compliance with
ASTM C 954.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Gypsum sheathing tape: Use only tapes approved by the sheathing manufacturers.
1. 3M" contractor sheathing tape NO.8086-inch by 3M Company.
2. Perm-A-Barrier" wall seam tape by WR Grace &CO.
3. 108JTN" by Royston Laboratories.
4. Polyken 610" by Polyken Technologies.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Joint compound: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Nails, wood framing: 11-gauge galvanized roofing nails with 7/16" head, 1-1/2" min. length for
1/2" panel and 1-3/4" length for 5/8" panel.
D. Screws, metal framing per manufacturers recommendations:
1. Bugle or wafer head, self-tapping, rust-resistant, fine thread for heavy-steel gauge
2. Bugle or wafer head, rust-resistant sharp point, fine thread for light-gauge metal framing
or furring.
E. Screws, wood framing:
1. Rust-resistant, bugle or wafer head, coarse thread, 1-1/4" length sharp point for wood.
2. Attachment to Wood Members: ASTM C 514.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing to support sheathing board and verify that the surface of any framing or
furring member does not vary more than 1/8-inch from the plane of faces of adjacent members.
B. Verify that studs, blocking and supporting materials are in place and ready for sheathing
attachment prior to starting work.
C. Coordinate the exterior placement of electrical, mechanical and plumbing wall devices,
accessories and access panels, wall signage and other type wall construction with other trades
before proceeding with work and during installation.
D. Correct detrimental conditions before proceeding with installation.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM SHEATHING 06 16 43 - 4
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Sheathing must be installed in accordance with the instructions in Gypsum Association
document GA-253 and ASTM C1280. Sheathing can be attached parallel or
perpendicular to wood or metal framing. Use appropriate board orientation for specific
fire assemblies and shear wall applications within this document, other reference
documents or as required by designing authority. The framing width shall not be less than
1-1/2” (38 mm) wide for wood framing and 1-1/4” (32 mm) for steel framing. Framing
members shall not vary more than 1/8” (3 mm) from the plane of the faces of adjacent
framing.
2. Fasteners should be driven flush with the panel surface (not countersunk) and into the
framing system. Locate fasteners at least 3/8” (9 mm) from the ends and edges of the
sheathing. Nails or screws, as listed in the fastener chart, may be used to attach Sheathing
to framing. When a pneumatic fastening system into metal is used to attach Sheathing,
consult with manufacturer for application specifications and shear resistance data.
Sheathing is not to be used as a base for nailing or other fastening.
3. Install Sheathing with joints staggered. Sheathing shall be properly flashed at openings
and preferably located so that no joint will align with an edge of the opening. Ends and
edges of the sheathing should fit tightly. Sheathing panels shall not be less than 7” (178
mm) from the finish grade in fully weather- and water-protected siding systems, and not
less than 12” (305 mm) from the ground for properly drained and ventilated crawl spaces.
4. Provide sheathing board at all exterior locations as required to accomplish new work.
a. Install sheathing board with correct face out.
b. Use maximum lengths possible to minimize number of joints.
c. Attach sheathing board to wood and metal framing per manufacturers installation
guide.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect sheathing panels in place during the construction period against exposure UV rays, to
weather, and to other sources of moisture in excess of manufacturer's recommended limits by
covering exposed sheathing surfaces with products acceptable to manufacturer for
accomplishing these goals.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 1
SECTION 06 20 00
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Finish carpentry items.
B. Hardware and attachment accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. See Division 1
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated
and adjacent components.
B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions.
2. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and
accessories.
1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot.
2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
3. Include certification program label.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 12 inch long.
E. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information:
1. FSC Wood Content
2. Low Emitting Materials
3. Local/Regional Materials
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20
percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.
2. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of
fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.
3. Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work from single fabricator.
B. Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality
certification of completed work.
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS
Grade or Grades specified.
2. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels.
3. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program.
4. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and
products meet the specified requirements.
5. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification.
6. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect work from moisture damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS
A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade.
B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as required
by applicable code.
C. Woodwork Items:
1. Window exterior sills and casings: Species: Maple; prepare for paint finish.
2.2 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 60 00.
C. Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 3
2.3 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Softwood Lumber: Douglas Fir species, quarter sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent;
with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
B. Hardwood Lumber: Maple species, quarter sawn, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with
vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
2.4 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood Not Exposed to View: Any face species, veneer core; PS 1 Grade A-B; glue
type as recommended for application.
B. Softwood Plywood Exposed to View: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, medium density
fiberboard core; PS 1 Grade A-B; glue type as recommended for application.
C. Hardwood Plywood: Face species as indicated, book matched, medium density fiberboard core;
HPVA HP-1, Grade AA, glue type as recommended for application.
D. Prefinished Paneling: Douglas Fir face species, book matched, V-cut vertical joint scoring; 3/16
inch thick, finished as gloss.
E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; composed of wood chips, sawdust, or flakes of medium density,
made with waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces.
2.5 FASTENINGS
A. Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not containing
formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.
B. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; flush finish in exposed locations. Custom finish to
match wood stain or paint.
C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer.
B. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.
2.7 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9.
B. Cabinet and Drawer Hardware: Provide touch latches and/or U shaped wire pulls at all accessible
casework or equally accessible pull hardware per CBC 11B-309.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 4
2.8 TREATMENT
A. Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type): Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of
providing flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA U1 Treatment using water borne
preservative with 0.25 percent retainage.
C. Provide identification on fire retardant treated material.
D. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.
E. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 6 percent moisture content.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Shop to assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide
trim for scribing and site cutting.
2.10 SHOP FINISHINGS
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and is
of type recommended for the applicable finish.
D. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section
5 - Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 8, Acrylic Cross Linking, Water-based
b. Sheen: Flat.
2. Opaque:
a. System - 4, Latex Acrylic, Water-based.
b. Color: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Flat.
E. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
ready to receive this work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards
requirements for grade indicated.
B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
D. Install prefinished paneling with full bed contact adhesive applied to substrate.
3.3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious
materials.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00 - 1
SECTION 06 41 00
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B. Countertops.
C. Cabinet hardware.
D. Preparation for installing utilities.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. See Division 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and
accessories.
1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot.
2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork
Standards.
3. Submit shop drawings in conformance with the requirements of the Architectural
Woodwork Standards.
4. Furnish a Woodwork Institute Certified Compliance Label on the first page of the shop
drawings.
C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square,
illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.
E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets,
demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.
1. FSC Wood Content
2. Low Emitting Materials
3. Local/Regional Materials
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20
percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.
B. Monitored Compliance:
1. Millwork and the installation thereof for this project shall be monitored for compliance to
the contract documents by a Woodwork Institute Director of Architectural Services.
a. Full particulars of the Woodwork Institute Monitored Compliance Program may be
found at the Institute web site at www.woodworkinstitute.com. or by calling the
administrative office at 9163729943.
2. Schedule inspections by a Woodwork Institute Director of Architectural Services at the
beginning of fabrication, at the time of delivery, at the beginning of installation, at
completion, and such additional times as the Director of Architectural Services considers
appropriate.
a. Written report shall be issued to all parties at the conclusion of each inspection.
3. Millwork and/or installation found to be non-compliant (and not corrected) will be rejected.
4. Issuance of a Monitored Compliance Certificate is a prerequisite of acceptance.
5. Fees charged by the Woodwork Institute for their Monitored Compliance program are the
responsibility of the millwork manufacturer and/or installer and shall be included in their
bid.
1.5 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up of typical base cabinet, wall cabinet, and countertop, including hardware, and
finishes.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect units from moisture damage.
B. Do not deliver casework until the following conditions are met:
1. Building is closed in.
2. Wet work and overhead work are complete.
3. HVAC is on, maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit and humidity
between 45% and 65%.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions
in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINETS AND CASEWORK
A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by
AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for premium.
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-
pressure decorative laminates by one of the following:
1. Wilsonart International (Basis of Design)
2. Formica Corporation.
3. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
4. Or equal
2.2 COUNTERTOPS
A. Solid Surfacing- material Counter tops
1. Applicable standards:
a. 1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein:
b. a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
c. b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
d. c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
e. d. NSF International
2. Fire test response characteristics:
a. a. Provide with the following Class A (Class I) surface burning characteristics as
determined by testing identical products per UL 723 (ASTM E 84) or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less.
c. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less.
3. Allowable tolerances:
a. 1. Variation in component size: ±1/8" (3 mm) over a 10' length.
b. 2. Location of openings: ±1/8" (3 mm) from indicated location.
c. 3. Maximum 1/8" (3 mm) clearance between quartz surfaces and each wall.
4. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide the following product:
a. Corian quartz surfaces from DuPont (basis of design)
b. Or Equal
5. Material:
a. Homogeneous quartz surfaces material.
b. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties specified.
6. Thickness: 2 cm (3/4").
7. Edge Treatment per drawings
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00 - 4
8. Seam width: less than 1/8” unless otherwise noted
9. Sink Mounting – Underlayment unless otherwise noted
10. Backsplash: Same material unless otherwise noted
11. Endsplash: Same material unless otherwise noted
12. Colors and patterns to be selected by the Architect
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application and comply with SCAQMD VOC
levels.
B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or
chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel, or chrome-plated finish in exposed
locations.
D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
E. Grommets: Standard plated metal grommets for cut-outs, in color as scheduled.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9 and CBC 11B-309, types as recommended by fabricator for quality
grade specified and as modified below:
B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards
or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated shelf rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal
1 inch spacing adjustments.
C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers.
D. Cabinet and Drawer Locks: Schlage CL100PB and CL200PB with C Keyway with satin chrome
finish #626.
1. Provide a Schedule for the cabinet locks installed.
2. Schedule to conform to BHMA A156.9 and include the following information:
a. Building that they are installed in.
b. Room number (use College's Room Numbers) where lock is installed in.
c. Manufacturer.
d. Model number of cylinder used.
3. Format of Schedule: Excel.
E. Catches: Magnetic.
F. Drawer Slides:
1. Type: Full extension.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00 - 5
2. Static Load Capacity: As required by WI standards.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Stops: Integral type.
5. Features: Provide self-closing/stay closed type.
6. Products:
a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com.
b. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com.
c. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
G. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, BHMA No. grade 1, steel with polished
finish.
1. Provide hinges with provision for attachment to all-glass doors where indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate in accordance with WI's Architectural Woodwork Standards for specified quality levels.
B. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings.
C. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel
arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.
D. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center.
2.6 SHOP FINISHINGS
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding
surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
C. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards (ARS),
Section 5 - Finishing for Grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System -12, Polyurethane, Water-based.
b. Stain: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 06 41 00 - 6
B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with WI's Architectural Woodwork Standards and approved shop drawings.
B. Seismically secure casework in accordance with CBC and WI's ARS.
C. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
D. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
E. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
F. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not
use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust installed work.
B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1
SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Foam-plastic board insulation.
a. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation
b. Unfaced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels
c. Geotextile-Faced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels
d. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation
e. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation
2. Cellular-glass insulation.
3. Glass-fiber board insulation.
4. Mineral-wool board insulation.
5. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
6. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
7. Loose-fill insulation.
8. Spray-applied cellulosic insulation.
9. Spray polyurethane foam insulation.
10. Radiant barriers.
11. Vapor retarders.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to
Project site before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation in metal framed walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder
B. Insulation in and below metal framed ceiling structure: Batt insulation with no vapor barrier
C. Insulation attached to structural deck above Tavola Beam ceilings: Select Sound Black acoustic
board
D. Insulation directly above all metal ceilings: Rolled 1” thick mineral fiber glass insulation
E. Insulation above roof metal deck: Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation
2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Rmax, Inc.
d. AEP Span.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 3
e. Or equal.
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
2.3 GLASS-FIBER BOARD INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Johns Manville Ins
3. Knauf Insulation.
4. Owens Corning. (Select Sound Acoustic Board as basis of Design)
5. Or equal.
B. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber board insulation as follows:
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no
formaldehyde.
2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than
0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
C. Product Description
1. SelectSound Acoustic Board is a lightweight and resilient insulation material with a black
mat faced finish that can be used for eliminating sound and light reflections or for pre-
venting insulation from showing through most surface treatments.
D. Perfromance Requirements
1. Product shall be available in standard thickness of 1”, 2” and 4”. All thicknesses shall
have a Standard density of 3.0 pcf.
2. SelectSound Acoustic Board shall be available in 24” x 48” and 48” x 96” standard sizes.
Pre-cut sizes up to 48” x 96” shall also be available upon request
3. Product shall be dimensionally stable with no capability for shrinking or warping.
4. Product shall have a resilient composition with good resistance to damage from job-site
impact.
5. Product shall be composed of inorganic glass fibers.
6. Product’s mat face shall be able to be cleaned by vacuuming.
7. Product shall not be susceptible to rot or mildew contamination.
8. Product shall not cause corrosion greater than caused by sterile cotton to steel and alumi-
num, When tested in accordance with ASTM C665.
9. Acoustical Performance (Tested to ASTM C423, Type A mounting)
Product Density Thickness Octave Band Center Frequencies, Hz
Pcf
(kg/m3)
In (mm) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC
SelectSound
Acoustic
Board
3.0 (48) 1.0 (25)
2.0 (51)
0.05
0.25
0.25
0.73
0.61
1.08
0.94
1.11
1.06
0.99
0.86
0.99
0.70
1.00
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 4
10. Surface Burning of Core Material (tested to UL 723, or CAN/ULC-S102-M): Flame
spread 25, smoke developed 50.
11. Water vapor sorption – by weight (Tested to ASTM C1104): <3% at 120oF (49oC) at
95% relative humidity.
12. Minimum Compressive Strength (Tested to ASTM C165):
3 lb. Density
1. At 10% deformation 25 lb/ft2 (1197 Pa)
2. At 25% deformation 90 lb/ft2 (4309 Pa)
13. Fungi resistance: Meets all requirements of ASTM C1338
2.4 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation.
5. Owens Corning.
6. Or equal.
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Coated Rolled 1” thick mineral fiber glass insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; Category 1 (membrane
is a vapor barrier). Rolls Form available in 16”, 24” and 48” widths. Available in 1” and 2”
thickness. Face and edge coated in black.
D. Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-
reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1
(membrane is a vapor barrier).
E. Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective faced),
Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor
barrier).
F. Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective
faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane
is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
G. Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class B
(faced surface with a flame-propagation resistance of 0.12 W/sq. cm); Category 1 (membrane is
a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 5
H. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to
fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic
spaces and vented eaves.
I. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no
formaldehyde.
2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than
0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating
of 0.13 perm.
B. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to
an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not
less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm.
1. Products:
a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW.
b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65.
c. Or equal.
C. Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene
film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord or
polyester scrim and weighing not less than 22 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating
of 0.1317 perm and with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 5 and 60,
respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Products:
a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 2FR.
b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-55 FR.
c. Or equal.
D. Foil-Polyester-Film Vapor Retarders: Two layers of 0.5-mil- thick polyester film laminated to
an inner layer of 1-mil- thick aluminum foil, with maximum water-vapor transmission rate in
flat condition of 0.0 g/h x sq. m and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of 5, per ASTM E 84.
1. Products:
a. Alumiseal Corporation; Zero Perm Vapor Barrier.
b. Or equal.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 6
E. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
F. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.
G. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.
H. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has
demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
2.6 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of
holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer
in place.
1. Products:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.
b. Gemco; Spindle Type.
c. Or equal.
2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting
spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with
self-locking washer in place.
1. Products:
a. Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers.
b. Or equal.
2. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with
each leg 2 inches square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized-
steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation
securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.
1. Products:
a. AGM Industries, Inc
b. Gemco
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 7
c. Or equal.
2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:
a. Crawl spaces.
b. Ceiling plenums.
c. Attic spaces.
d. Where indicated.
D. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle
of insulation anchor to maintain air space of min. 1 inch between face of insulation and
substrate to which anchor is attached.
1. Products:
a. Gemco; Clutch Clip.
E. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
1. Products:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.
b. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including
removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 8
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 12 inches below exterior
grade line.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior
walls.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c.
both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation
between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press
units firmly against inside substrates.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing
members according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at
vented eaves.
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to
flanges of metal studs.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 9
6. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as
follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling
flanges to sides of framing members.
b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of
adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is
installed over it.
7. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and
seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward as indicated on Drawings.
b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity.
D. Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written
instructions. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to
uniform density, but do not compact excessively.
1. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with CIMA's Bulletin #2, "Standard
Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."
E. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and
electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not
indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of
studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.
F. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum
volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.
2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket
insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up
either side of partitions.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES
A. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation
anchors as follows:
1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive
according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 10
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and
application indicated.
2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between
concrete substrate and insulation.
3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over
spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not
to compress insulation below indicated thickness.
4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers
to tips of spindles.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN-WALL INSULATION
A. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction where indicated on Drawings according to
curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions.
1. insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window
frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold
insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of
dimension indicated between insulation and glass.
2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fire-containment system to prevent
insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to
extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with
adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.
1. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of
wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
2. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing
including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings.
Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-
retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape.
Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
3. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder
fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarders.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 11
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation
is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 1
SECTION 07 27 00
AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01. SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for supplying labor, materials, tools, and equipment
to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings Architectural Division as specified
herein including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Adhesive/Primer
2. Self-Adhered Water Resistive Air Barrier
3. Air Barrier
4. Sealant
1.02. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. DIVISION 06 – Section 06 16 43 – Gypsum Sheathing
B. DIVISION 07 – Section 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation
C. DIVISION 07 – Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
D. DIVISION 07 – Section 07 92 05 – Joint Sealants
E. DIVISION 08 – Section 08 51 13 – Aluminum Windows
1.03. REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1. AAMA 711-13 - Voluntary Specification for Self-Adhering Flashing Used for
Installation of Exterior Wall Fenestration Products
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic
Sheeting
2. ASTM D903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive
Bonds
3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
4. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
5. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
6. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials
C. International Code Council Evaluation Services (ICC-ES):
1. ICC- ES AC38 - Acceptance Criteria for Water Resistive Barriers
D. US Green Building Council (USGBC), Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
(LEED)
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 2
1.04. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field operations to
establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work
with related and adjacent work. Agenda for meeting shall include but not be limited to the
following:
1. Review of submittals.
2. Review of surface preparation, minimum curing period and installation procedures.
3. Review of special details and flashings.
4. Sequence of construction, responsibilities and schedule for Subsequent operations.
5. Review of mock-up requirements.
6. Review of inspection, testing, protection and repair procedures.
1.05. SUBMITTALS
A. Provide the following requested information in accordance with Section 01 33 00
Submittal Procedures.
B. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Air Barrier Manufacturer’s guide specification
b. Air Barrier Manufacturer’s complete set of technical data sheets for assembly
c. Air Barrier Manufacturer’s complete set of details for assembly
2. Certificates:
a. Product certification confirming assembly components are supplied and
warranted by a single source Air Barrier Manufacturer
b. LEED HPD declaration
3. Tests and Evaluation Reports:
a. Acceptance criteria for water-resistive barriers: ICC – ES AC38
4. Warranty:
a. Sample warranty as specified
1.06. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility:
1. Obtain air barrier and auxiliary materials including adhesive/primer, air barrier,
flashings, and sealants from a single Air Barrier Manufacturer regularly engaged in
the manufacturing and supply of the specified products.
2. Verify product compliance with federal, state, and local regulations.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Air Barrier Manufacturer shall demonstrate qualifications to supply materials of
this Section by certifying the following:
a. Air Barrier Manufacturer must not issue warranties for terms longer than they
have been manufacturing and supplying specified products for similar scope
of Work.
C. Applicator Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in installation of air barriers with minimum three years’
experience and certified by air barrier manufacturer.
OR
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 3
2. Currently accredited by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) whose
applicators are certified in accordance with the ABAA Quality Assurance Program.
1.07. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials:
1. Deliver materials to the jobsite in undamaged and clearly marked containers
indicating the name of the manufacturer and product.
B. Storage of Materials:
1. Store materials as recommended by the manufacturer and conform to applicable
safety regulatory agencies. Refer to all applicable data including, but not limited to,
Safety Data Sheet (SDS), Technical Data sheet (TDS), product labels, and specific
instructions for personal protection.
2. Keep solvents away from open flame or excessive heat.
3. Store materials in original packaging.
4. Protect rolls from direct sunlight until ready for use.
5. Refer to manufacturer’s product TDS.
C. Handling:
1. Refer to Air Barrier Manufacturer’s product TDS.
1.8. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Do not perform Work during rain or inclement weather.
2. Do not perform Work on frost covered substrates or surfaces that are wet to touch.
B. Protection:
1. It is the responsibility of the installing Subcontractor to protect all surfaces not
included in scope of Work from overspray including, but not limited to, windows,
doors, adjacent areas, and vehicles.
2. Cap and protect exposed back-up walls against wet weather conditions during and
after application of air barrier assembly.
C. Complete preparation Work prior to installing air barrier.
D. Ground all equipment during operations.
1.9. WARRANTY
A. Material Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
fluid-applied air barrier membrane materials that fail within specified warranty period
when installed and used in strict conformance with written manufacturer's instructions.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to maintain air permeance rating not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. under
a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57 pst) (equal to 0.02 Us. x sq. m. @
75 Pa), when tested per ASTM E2178, within specified warranty period.
b. Failure to maintain a vapor permeance rating greater than 10 perms when tested
in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 4
c. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01. MANUFACTURERS
A. Air Barrier and auxiliary materials shall comply with the following system requirements:
1. Obtain air barrier and auxiliary materials as a single-source from the manufacturer
to ensure total system compatibility and integrity. Basis of Design: Blueskin®
VP100 Self-Adhered Water Resistive Air Barrier by Henry Company
2. Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Barriers:
a. ICC – ES AC38: Pass
3. Air leakage:
a. ASTM E2178: Pass
4. Water resistance:
a. ASTM E331: Pass
5. Nail Sealability:
a. AAMA 711: Pass
b. ASTM D1970: Pass
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Henry® Company
2. Or, approved equal
2.02. MATERIALS
A. Primary Sheet-Applied, Vapor Permeable Water Resistive Air Barrier (Basis of Design):
1. Self-adhered vapor permeable, water resistive air barrier consisting of a reinforced,
modified polyolefin tri-laminate film surface and patented permeable adhesive
technology with split-back poly-release film; having the following typical physical
properties:
a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® VP100 Self-Adhered Water Resistive Air
Barrier
b. Color: Blue
c. Thickness: 19 mils (0.48 mm)
d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 33 perms
e. Air Permeance (ASTM E2178): Pass
f. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass
g. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84):
1. Flame Spread: Class A
2. Smoke Development: Class A
h. Low Application Temperature: 40 degrees F (5 degrees C)
B. Assembly Auxiliary Materials:
1. Adhesives/Primers:
a. Standard VOC adhesive:
1. Synthetic rubber based quick setting adhesive; having the following
typical physical properties:
a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Adhesive
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 5
b. Color: Blue
c. Maximum VOC: 450 g/L
d. Drying time (initial set): 30 minutes
e. Low Application Temperature: 10 degrees F (-12 degrees C)
b. Low VOC adhesive:
1. Synthetic rubber based quick setting adhesive with low VOC content;
having the following typical physical properties:
a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® LVC Adhesive
b. Color: Blue
c. Maximum VOC: <240 g/L
d. Drying time (initial set): 30 minutes
e. Low Application Temperature: 10 degrees F (-12 degrees C)
2. Polymer emulsion water based quick setting adhesive with low VOC
content; having the following typical physical properties:
a. Basis of design: Henry® Aquatac™ Primer
b. Color: Aqua
c. Maximum VOC: 50 g/L
d. Drying time (initial set): 30 minutes
e. Low Application Temperature: 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C)
c. Aerosol spray adhesive:
1. Quick drying spray adhesive used to prepare construction surfaces for the
application of flashings; having the following typical physical properties:
a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Spray Prep Adhesive
b. Color: Clear amber
c. Solids by weight: 35%
d. Drying time (initial set): 3 minutes
e. Low Application Temperature: -10 degrees F (-23 degrees C)
2. Liquid-Applied Flashing:
a. Moisture-curing single component elastomeric liquid-applied flashing using a
highly advanced Silyl-Terminated Polyether (STPE) polymer curing to a
monolithic membrane; having the following typical physical properties:
1. Basis of design: Henry® Air-Bloc® LF Liquid-Applied Flashing
2. Color: Blue
3. Air Permeance (ASTM E2178): Pass
4. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 21.8 perms @ 25 mils
5. Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies (ASTM E2357): Pass
6. Water Resistance (AC212/ASTM D2247): Pass
7. Nail Sealability (AAMA 711): Pass
8. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84):
a. Flame Spread: Class A
b. Smoke Development: Class A
9. Elongation (D412): 264%
10. Low Application Temperature: 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C)
3. Self-Adhered Flashing:
a. Non-Vapor Permeable Flashing:
1. Non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor barrier
consisting of a synthetic butyl compound integrally laminated to a white
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 6
engineered polypropylene film surface; having the following typical
physical properties:
a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Butyl Flash
b. Color: White
c. Thickness: 14 mils (0.36 mm)
d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 0.14 perms
e. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass
f. Elongation (ASTM D412): 825% minimum
g. Low Application Temperature: 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C)
2. Flexible non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor
barrier consisting of a synthetic butyl compound integrally laminated to a
creped, white engineered film; having the following typical physical
properties:
a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® Flexible Butyl Flash
b. Color: White
c. Thickness: 54 mils (1.3 mm)
d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): <0.1 perms
e. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass
f. Low Application Temperature: 10 degrees F (-12 degrees C)
3. Non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air and vapor barrier
consisting of an SBS rubberized asphalt compound integrally laminated
to a blue engineered thermoplastic film surface; having the following
typical physical properties:
a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® WB25 Window and Door
Flashing
b. Color: Blue
c. Thickness: 25 mils (.63 mm)
d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 0.05 perms
e. Elongation (ASTM D412-modified): 200% minimum
f. Low Application Temperature: 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C)
4. Low temperature non-vapor permeable, self-adhered water resistive air
and vapor barrier consisting of an SBS rubberized asphalt compound
integrally laminated to a blue engineered thermoplastic film surface;
having the following typical physical properties:
a. Basis of Design: Henry® Blueskin® WB Window and Door Flashing
Color: Blue
b. Thickness:35 mils (0.9 mm)
c. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 0.05 perms
d. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass
e. Elongation (ASTM D412-modified): 200% minimum
f. Low Application Temperature: 10 degrees F (-12 degrees C)
b. Vapor Permeable Flashing:
1. Self-adhered water resistive vapor permeable air barrier consisting of a
reinforced modified polyolefin tri-laminate film surface and patented
adhesive technology with split-back poly-release film; having the
following typical physical properties:
a. Basis of design: Henry® Blueskin® VP100 Self-Adhered Water
Resistive Air Barrier
b. Color: Blue
c. Thickness: 19 mils (0.48 mm)
d. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E96): 33 perms
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 7
e. Nail Sealability (ASTM D1970): Pass
f. Low Application Temperature: 40 degrees F (5 degrees C)
4. Sealants:
a. Building Envelope Sealant:
1. Moisture cure, medium modulus polymer modified sealing compound;
having the following typical physical properties:
a. Basis of design: Henry® 925 BES Sealant
b. Color: Varies
c. Elongation: 450 – 550%.
b. Termination Sealant:
1. One-part high performance synthetic rubber sealant; having the
following typical physical properties:
a. Basis of design: Henry® 212 All Purpose Crystal Clear Sealant
b. Color: Clear
c. Elongation: 200% minimum
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01. EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Verify substrates to receive Work and surrounding adjacent surfaces are in
accordance with manufacturer’s installation guide and as specified in this Section
prior to installation of self-adhered air barrier assembly.
2. Continuous substrate:
a. Existing substrate must be continuous and secured prior to application of air
barrier.
b. Securely fasten sheathing panels and install flush to ensure a continuous
substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s installation guide and as
specified in this Section.
c. Fastener penetrations must be set flush with sheathing and fastened into solid
backing.
d. Refer to manufacturer’s details.
3. Strike masonry joints flush.
4. Concrete surfaces shall be smooth and without large voids, spalled areas or sharp
protrusions. Refer to manufacturer’s details for substrate gap limitations.
5. Remove concrete forms and allow new concrete to cure for a minimum of fourteen
(14) days.
6. Curing compounds or release agents used in concrete construction must be resin
based without oil, wax or pigments.
7. Do not install air barrier over substrates that are wet to touch.
B. Notify Contractor in writing of any conditions that are not acceptable.
C. The installing contractor shall examine and determine that surfaces and conditions are
ready to accept the Work of this Section in accordance with the manufacturer’s
installation guide and as specified in this Section. Commencement of Work or any parts
thereof shall mean installer’s acceptance of the substrate.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 8
D. Do not apply air barrier until substrate and environmental conditions are in accordance
with manufacturer’s installation guide and as specified in this Section.
3.02. PREPARATION
A. All surfaces must be sound, dry, clean, and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, frost,
laitance, loose and flaking particles, or other contaminants.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces not included in scope of Work to prevent spillage and
overspray.
C. Cap and protect exposed back-up walls against wet weather conditions during and after
application of the air barrier assembly.
3.03. INSTALLATION
A. Ensure substrate is ready to receive air barrier in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation guide and as specified in this Section.
B. Temperature limitation:
1. Primary air barrier:
a. Substrate temperature must be above 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and rising.
2. Auxiliary products:
a. Temperature limitations may vary. Refer to manufacturer’s product TDS for
product specific temperature limitations.
C. Application of flashing:
1. Self-adhered flashing:
a. Where required install adhesive/primer continuously at rate recommended by
manufacturer ensuring complete substrate coverage of anticipated flashing
installation area.
1. Allow adhesive/primer to cure to a tacky film prior to application of
flashing.
2. Primed areas not covered by end of day must be re-primed prior to
installation of flashing.
b. Measure and cut self-adhered flashing to ensure adequate length to achieve
continuous coverage of desired installation.
c. Peel protective film from self-adhered flashing and align top of membrane
verifying proper positioning prior to complete film removal and flashing
placement.
d. Press self-adhered flashing firmly into place by applying hand pressure to the
middle of the membrane and working the pressure to the edges; eliminating
wrinkles and air bubbles.
e. Install self-adhered flashings in shingle fashion to eliminate reverse laps.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 9
f. Where required, prime laps at rate recommended by manufacturer to ensure
complete coverage of anticipated lap installation.
g. Lap adjoining edges a minimum of two (2) inches.
h. Roll flashing and laps with countertop roller to obtain thorough adhesion.
i. Seal reverse laps at self-adhered flashing with sealant. Sealant
recommendations may vary due to product or sequence of construction. Refer
to manufacturer details for recommended sealant.
2. Liquid-applied flashing:
a. Apply a uniform film of aerosol spray adhesive to raw edges of gypsum
sheathing at rate recommended by manufacturer completely encapsulating
loose gypsum core at the cut edge of gypsum sheathing.
b. Allow adhesive to cure to a tacky film prior to application of liquid-applied
flashing.
c. Apply flashing in accordance with and at rate recommended by manufacturer.
d. Spread flashing to achieve a monolithic membrane over substrate requiring
flashing.
e. Allow flashing to cure prior to subsequent installations.
D. Detailing/Flashing:
1. Complete detailing and flashing installations per manufacturer’s installation guide,
details, and this specification.
2. Refer to manufacturer details for further clarification and installation procedures
including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Inside corners
b. Outside corners
c. Pipe penetrations
d. Shelf angles
e. Wall to foundation transitions
f. Reverse laps
g. Construction joints
h. Rough openings:
1. Install rough opening details per Window Manufacturer’s installation
guide details and in accordance with ASTM E2112.
2. Wall assemblies containing a vapor retarder on the interior wall
assembly:
a. Extend flashing into rough opening to ensure sufficient membrane
for connection with vapor retarder and provide a continuous air
barrier assembly.
3. Transitions:
a. Contact manufacturer to coordinate transition of self-adhered air barrier to
adjacent areas including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Roof to air barrier
2. Air barrier to vertical or horizontal waterproofing
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 10
3. Fastener penetrations
E. Application of Primary Sheet-Applied Vapor Permeable Water Resistive Air Barrier:
1. Where required, install adhesive/primer continuously and at rate recommended by
manufacturer to ensure complete substrate coverage of anticipated flashing
installation area.
a. Allow adhesive/primer to cure to a tacky film prior to application of air
barrier.
b. Primed areas not covered by end of day must be re-primed prior to installation
of air barrier.
2. Peel protective film from primary air barrier and align top of verifying proper
positioning prior to complete film removal and placement.
3. Press primary air barrier firmly into place by applying hand pressure to the middle
of the membrane and working the pressure to the edges; eliminating wrinkles and
air bubbles.
4. Install primary air barrier in shingle fashion to eliminate reverse laps.
5. For lap adhesion enhancements, install standard or low VOC adhesive continuously
and at rate recommended by manufacturer to ensure substrate coverage of
anticipated flashing installation area.
a. Allow adhesive/primer to cure to a tacky film prior to subsequent primary air
barrier installation.
6. Horizontal applications:
a. Horizontal seams: two (2) inch minimum.
b. Vertical seams: three (3) inch minimum.
7. Roll primary air barrier and laps with countertop roller to obtain thorough adhesion.
8. Seal permanent reverse laps of primary air barrier with termination sealant.
F. Fastener Penetrations Through Primary Air Barrier:
1. It is the responsibility of the installer penetrating the air barrier assembly to install
fasteners/assembly components in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation
guide and as specified in this Section.
2. Installation requirements:
a. Drill fasteners/assembly components with sufficient compression to maintain
continuity in the air barrier assembly.
b. Refer to “Self-tapping fasteners” and/or “Pre-drilled fasteners”.
3. Supplemental sealant:
a. Penetrations that do not meet installation requirements require the addition of
termination sealant at point of insertion through the air barrier to maintain
continuity in the air barrier assembly.
4. Self-tapping fasteners:
a. Fastener head/assembly component must be larger in diameter than the
fastener shank.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 11
b. Install fastener head/assembly component to provide a continuous
compression firmly against the air barrier creating a gasketing seal without
damaging the membrane.
c. Do not install fastener head/assembly components through the air barrier over
unsupported areas of the substrate such as sheathing joints.
d. Remove overdriven fasteners, improperly installed fasteners, defective/broken
fasteners, or fasteners not properly fastened into the building structure beyond
the air barrier membrane and seal the vacated hole with termination sealant
prior to the installation of the exterior cladding.
5. Pre-drilled fastening assemblies:
a. Fastening head/assembly component must be larger in diameter than
predrilled hole.
b. Install fastening head/assembly component to provide a continuous
compression firmly against the air barrier creating a gasketing seal without
damaging the membrane.
c. Do not install fastening head/assembly components through air barrier over
unsupported areas of the substrate such as sheathing joints.
d. Seal improperly drilled and/or vacated holes with termination sealant prior to
the installation of the exterior cladding.
3.04. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Final Observation and Verification:
1. Owner’s representative, Builder, or manufacturer shall complete the final inspection
of the air barrier assembly as required by warranty. Do not cover installed weather
barriers until required inspections have been completed.
a. Contact manufacturer for warranty issuance requirements.
B. Install cladding as soon as practical after application. Air barrier assembly not designed
for permanent UV exposure. Refer to manufacturer’s product TDS for product
limitations.
3.05. CLEANING
A. As the Work proceeds, and upon completion, promptly clean up and remove from the
premises all rubbish and surplus materials resulting from the foregoing Work.
B. Clean soiled surfaces, spatters, and damage caused by Work of this Section.
C. Check area to ensure cleanliness and remove debris, equipment, and excess material from
the site.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
Metal Wall Specification 07 42 13 - 1
SECTION 07 42 13
Metal Screen Wall
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes
1. Factory-formed: exposed-fastener, metal wall panels.
2. Finish must conform to the "Metal Construction Association Certified Premium
Painted™" designation
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 5 Section “Structural Steel”
B. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”
C. Division 7 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”
D. Division 7 Section “Air Barriers”
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide metal wall panel assemblies that comply with performance requirements
specified as determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those
indicated for this Project, by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
B. System shall meet performance criteria as installed. Either test data or signed and sealed
engineering calculations shall document the performance of the panel system to meet design
loads required.
C. Wind Loading: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by wind
pressures as follows:
1. Positive pressure: 39 psf – 40.6 psf normal to panel.
2. Negative pressure: 0 psf normal to panel.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
Metal Wall Specification 07 42 13 - 2
D. Maximum Deflection under Design Loads:
1. 1/180 of span
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's current product specifications and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Include small-scale elevations, as required. Show details of trim and
flashing conditions, fastening and anchorage methods, weatherproofing techniques,
terminations, and penetrations.
C. Samples:
1. Selection Samples: Submit actual metal chips with full range of colors available for
Architect's selection.
2. Verification Samples: Submit two samples of each type of metal panel required, not less
than 12 inches (305mm), and illustrating finished panel profile.
D. Product Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports or load tables verifying performance
capability of panel system:
1. Metal Wall Panels: Include reports for UL 790/ASTM E 108, ASTM E 283, ASTM E
331, Field Tested, UL 2218, ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Rating, Paint Performance Tests.
2. Fastener test and pull-out calculations
3. Load tables
4. Maintenance Data
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Company specializing in the type of work required for this project, with not less
than 2 years of documented experience.
B. Pre-Installation meeting: Convene meeting not less than one week prior to beginning
installation between general contractor, installing contractor, owner's representative and
manufacturer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Do not deliver materials of this section to project site until suitable facilities for storage and
protection are available.
B. Protect materials from damage during transit and at project site. Store under cover, but
sloped to provide positive drainage. Do not expose materials with strippable protective film
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
Metal Wall Specification 07 42 13 - 3
to direct sunlight or extreme heat.
C. Do not allow storage of other materials or allow staging of other work on installed metal
panel system.
D. Upon receipt of delivery of metal panel system, and prior to signing the delivery ticket, the
installer is to examine each shipment for damage and for completion of the consignment.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-
applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form in which Wall Installer agrees to repair or
replace components of custom-fabricated sheet metal wall that fail in materials or
workmanship within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: All panels are to be factory formed and packaged per job
requirements.
1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the factory
fabrication of metal wall panels.
2. Manufacturer must be certified to ISO 9001:2008 with design.
B. Specification is based upon the products of ATAS International, Inc. No other manufacturer
of metal wall systems shall be accepted as an alternate product without prior written approval.
These substitution requests must meet specifications and must be submitted a minimum of ten
(10) days prior to date of bid.
C. Coordinate with insulation requirements as noted by Architect.
D. Secondary framing members as required for load criteria and wind requirements.
2.2 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A. Exposed-fastener, Lap seam Metal Wall Panels: Provide Factory-formed, designed to be field
assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to
supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weather tight
installation.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
Metal Wall Specification 07 42 13 - 4
B. Ribbed-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels
1. Basis-of Design Product: ATAS International, Inc.; Belvedere™ BWK360
2. Available Manufacturers:
a. ATAS International, Inc.
b. Or, approved equal
3. Profile: Ribbed as indicated on drawings.
4. Material: Metallic coated steel sheet - 24 gauge thick
a. Texture: Perforated, 3⁄8″ holes, 9⁄16″ staggered centers, 40% open area
b. Finish: KYNAR 5000® PDVF or HYLAR 5000® Finish
c. Color: Standard color to be chosen later
4. Panel Coverage: 36"
5. Panel Height: 1-1/2"
6. Panel Application Orientation: Horizontal.
7. Major Rib Spacing: 6"
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Panels:
1. Panels to be Factory fabricated in a controlled environment.
2. Panels to be tension leveled during roll forming process.
3. Panels to be produced in longest lengths possible, except when modular units are utilized.
B. Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or
defects. Cut panels to precise lengths indicated on approved shop drawings or as required by
field conditions.
C. Accessories: Factory fabricates trim and flashing components in standard 12-foot lengths.
1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp
and buckle.
2. Fabricate wall panels as required to maintain fabrication tolerances and to withstand
design loads.
D. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel
and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
E. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
Metal Wall Specification 07 42 13 - 5
F. Panels, fabrication and installation shall meet the requirements of the Metal Construction
Association Preformed Metal Wall Guidelines
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements
1. Field measurements should be taken by the installer for verification of dimensional
correctness in relationship to original plans, prior to providing manufacturer with a bill of
material.
B. Delivery, Storage and Handling
1. Do not deliver materials of this section to project site until suitable facilities for storage
and protection are available.
2. Protect materials from damage during transit and at project site. Store under cover, but
sloped to provide positive drainage. Do not expose materials with strippable protective
film to direct sunlight or extreme heat.
3. Do not allow storage of other materials or allow staging of other work on installed metal
panel system.
4. Upon receipt of delivery of metal panel system, and prior to signing the delivery ticket,
the installer is to examine each shipment or damage and for completion of the
consignment.
C. Sequencing and Scheduling
1. Installer shall coordinate with general contractor as to scheduled delivery time after
receipt of field verified bill of material by manufacturer as it relates to actual project
scheduling.
3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings.
Install panels perpendicular to girts and subgirts, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal
wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal
and structural movement.
1. Field cutting of metal wall panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten metal wall panels and allow for thermal expansion and contraction as
required by the panel manufacturer. Pre-drill panels as required.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
Metal Wall Specification 07 42 13 - 6
3. Install screw fasteners.
4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
5. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and
concrete, and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing
and material compatibility.
6. Provide weatherproof seals for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.
B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of size and length as required for compatibility with substrate.
1. Steel Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners or metallic coated fasteners for surfaces
exposed to the exterior and galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
2. Exposed fasteners shall have a high performance factory applied coating to match paint
color.
3. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive
substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous
coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other
permanent separation as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required
for weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies.
D. Provide water and air infiltration retarder / barriers as noted within project documents.
3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting
and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items.
2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions,
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and NRCA Waterproofing Manual.
Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as
indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight
and weather resistant.
3. Panels, fabrication and installation shall meet the requirements of the Metal Construction
Association Preformed Metal Wall Guidelines.
B. Coordinate with installation of:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
Metal Wall Specification 07 42 13 - 7
1. Cold Formed Metal Framing, as noted in Section 5
2. Rough Carpentry, as noted in Section 6
3. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim, as noted in Section 7
4. Water and Air Infiltration Retarder / Barriers, as noted in Section 07 27 00
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are
installed. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. Protection:
1. Provide as required completed work of this section will be without damager or
deterioration at date of substantial completion.
C. Touch up minor abrasions with matching paint provided by panel manufacturer. Remove and
replace panels that cannot be satisfactorily touched up. See Metal Construction Association
Technical Bulletin #95-1051.
D. Sweep and remove chips, shavings and dust from roof on a daily basis during installation
period. Leave installed work clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains. Remove all
protective masking from material immediately after installation of product.
E. Upon completion of installation, remove scraps and debris from project site.
F. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions,
dirt and sealant.
END OF SECTION 07 42 13
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 1
SECTION 07 51 13
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM
PART I – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Site Specific Projects New construction.
1. Set up and staging areas will be decided upon at the job walk. Roofer will use enclosed
chutes and dumpsters to help minimize debris. New Roofs: Clean deck thoroughly prior
to roofing installation.
2. The roof decks will be inspected by a City Project Manager or site representative and
material manufacturer.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cold Process Built-up asphalt roofing system.
2. Remove existing roof system and insulation down to the T & G wood decks on the
Lower and Upper Roof Sections.
3. New metal edging and flashing as required.
4. Remove and Replace all damage or rotted wood decking to match existing in size and
shape.
5. Clean the wood decks of all debris and excess asphalt or adhesives.
6. Remove existing metal curb, and all metal flashing.
7. Install one layer of one half (1”) Tremco Blur Ridge coated fiberboard to the insulation,
with mechanical fasteners to the wood decks, one every 2 square feet.
8. Install one ply of Burmastic Composite Ply HT to the heavy duty coated fiberboard with
PowerPly Cold Adhesive LV. Apply adhesive to fiberboard at a rate of 3½ gallons per
100 square feet.
9. Install two plies of Burmastic Glass (33lb.) to the base layer, with PowerPly Cold
Adhesive LV, at a rate of 3 gallons per 100 square feet.
10. Install. PowerPly Standard FR G24 Membrane to roof system on all elevations, set into
PowerPly Adhesive, at a rate of 2½ gallons per 100 square feet.
11. All parapet, curbs, base, and walls are to be installed with Reinforced TPA Flashing
Membrane to be applied up and over the parapet wall and turned down one-inch past
stucco joint. Membrane to be set into Sheeting Bond Adhesive.
12. Seal edge of flashing with Rock-it Adhesive and two layers of Burmesh Membrane.
Embed into the Rock-it Adhesive a layer of # 11 White Granules.
13. Install new 22-gauge or better metal scuppers to the perimeter of all elevations at existing
locations.
14. Install new TPA Flashing to all drains and scuppers.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 2
15. Install new wood nailers to match the height of the insulation. Wood Nailers to be level
with roof insulation.
16. Termination Bars and sealant tape to be installed at the top of all curbs and boxes.
17. Install new 24-gauge metal or better metal edge to the perimeter of all elevations. Metal
edge to match existing in size and shape.
18, Seal the outside of the scuppers with Tremseal D.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
B. Cold Process Built Up Roofing - An asbestos free formulation of asphalt, solvent, thixotrope,
mineral stabilizer and reinforcing fibers used as an interply adhesive and flood coat.
C. Initial Emittance: Minimum initial emittance of roofing surface (system) threshold in
compliance with Cool Roof Rating Council requirements.
D. Initial Reflectance: Minimum initial reflectance threshold of roofing surface (system) in
compliance with Cool Roof Rating Council requirements.
E. Comply with Title 24, 2007 California Building Energy Standards, Section 118
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not
permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement,
and exposure to weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based
on testing and field experience.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test- response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by
UL. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes
indicated.
2. U. L. Class A
1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR NONE PRE-APPROVED MATERIALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 3
1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations.
2. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.
3. Insulation fastening patterns.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. 4-by-12-inch square of base sheet.
2. 4-by-12-inch square of ply sheet.
3. 4-by-12-inch square of modified cap sheet.
4. 4-by-12-inch square of roof insulation and cover board.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is
approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system
complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and manufacturer's technical representative as
specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Indicating compliance of proposed products with requirements,
including:
1. Product Compatibility: Indicate manufacturer has verified compatibility of roofing
system components, including but not limited to: Roofing base and ply sheets, membrane
backer and flashing sheets, reinforcement fabric felts and mats, adhesives, mastics,
coatings, and sealants.
H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system and system
components.
1. Include report showing compliance with ASTM 2523 load-strain properties requirements.
I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
K. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed
roofing installation.
L. Certificate of Insurance showing Products Liability in the amount of $ 10 million minimum and
provide an affidavit signed by a corporate officer showing corporate net worth of $10 million
minimum.
M. Provide certification listing on the current Energy Star® Roof Products Qualifying Products
List.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 4
N. Provide a list often (10) projects available for inspection employing same roof system. Provide
location, contact name, and telephone number.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's warranty.
B. Installer Shall:
1. Submit an affidavit attesting that Contractor has in place and fully implemented a written
Health, Safety and Environmental Plan and the plan is compliant with all applicable
Federal, State and Local regulations. .
2. Be experienced in cold applied roofing applications for 10 years minimum.
3. Be acceptable to Owner.
4. Be a manufacturer Certified Contractor.
5. Not have been in Chapter 7 bankruptcy during the last ten (10) years.
6. Provide a list of ten (10) projects available for inspection employing same roof system.
7. Acquire inspection service days utilizing manufacturer's technical inspectors.
a. The minimum number of full time Technical Consulting Service inspection days
will be Six (6) days for a project of 200 squares or less.
b. The number of days will increase at a rate of two (2) day for each additional 100
squares.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing approval for roofing
system identical to that used for this Project.
D. Manufacturer Shall:
1. Be Associate Member in good standing with National Roofing Contractors Association
(NRCA) for at least five (5) years.
2. Be nationally recognized in the roofing, waterproofing and moisture survey industry.
3. Be approved by Owner.
4. Has not been in Chapter II bankruptcy during the last five (5) years.
5. Provide evidence of financial responsibility: Certificate of Insurance showing Products
Liability in the amount of $ 10 million minimum and provide an affidavit signed by a
corporate officer showing corporate net worth of $10 million minimum.
6. Provide a copy of Corporate Health, Safety and Welfare policy.
7. Manufacturer must manufacture a minimum of 70% of the materials that they supply,
by dollar volume, in facilities owned or solely leased by said manufacturer, including
equipment used in manufacturing operations.
8. Provide evidence of twenty (20) quarters of continuous plant inspections of roofing
manufacturing sites over the previous five (5) years by an independent Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as defined in 29 CPR Ch. XVII (7-1-93 Edition)
from the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
9. Be ISO 9001; 2000 registered for at least the prior five (5) years
10. Furnish a service agreement / warranty.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 5
11. Provide Owner names of at least five (5) qualified applicators.
12. Employ full-time Field Technical Services Representatives for daily job-site monitoring
and production of daily reports.
13. Require local Field Representatives to make periodic job-site visits and produce work
quality and progress reports.
14. Provide a Project Closeout Report upon delivery of the project warranty. This report to
include:
a. Project Specifications.
b. Project Summary.
c. Progress reports as a result of roof inspections.
d. Job-site progress photos.
e. Warranty document.
f. Owner's Manual describing maintenance and emergency repair.
E. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized full-time employee
representative of manufacturer experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified
roofing system and qualified to determine Installer's compliance with the requirements of this
Project.
F. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved in writing by
roofing system manufacturer.
G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in
Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination. Review methods and procedures
related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck
Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers
of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 6
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions
for storage.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written
instructions and warranty requirements.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Tremco QA Plus 20 Year Manufacturer's Warranty and Service Agreement
in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.
1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane
accessories, roof insulation, all sheet metal-related details, and termination details.
2. Manufacturer will provide, at no cost to owner, the following services in Years 2, 5, 10
and 15:
a. Inspection by a Technical Representative and delivery of a written inspection
report documenting roof conditions.
b. Preventative maintenance and necessary repairs, including splits, tears, or breaks in
the roof membrane system and flashings that threaten the integrity of the roof
system and are not exempt from coverage due to neglect, negligence, vandalism, or
other exclusion.
c. General rooftop housekeeping and clean-up, subject to limits, but generally
including removal of incidental debris.
3. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 7
system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards,
substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following
warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Technical Instruction and Inspections:
1. Manufacturer shall provide Technical Consulting Instruction and Inspection on the project for
Six (6) days at a cost of $ 800.00 per day.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:
1. Built-up Asphalt Roofing;
a. Tremco, Inc.
Contact: Bill Calagna
323-587-3014 or 818-429-2584
2.2 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS
A. Backer Sheet: Tremco Burmastic Composite Ply HT ASTM D 460 I-04, Type II, SBS-modified
asphalt-coated Tri-laminate reinforced high-strength ply sheet, with polyester/glass-
fiber/polyester-reinforcing coated with waterproofing asphalt. Burmastic Composite Ply
Premium Green contains 14-per cent post-industrial recycled content.
1. Weight 38 Ibs/100 sq. ft. ASTM D 228-05
2. Tensile Strength MD 190 lbf/in ASTM D 5147-02
3. Tensile Strength XMD 180 lbf/in ASTM D 5147-02
4. Tear Strength MD 260 lbf ASTM D 5147-02
5. Tear Strength XMD 230 lbf ASTM D 5147-02
2.3 ROOF SURFACING
A. SBS Modified Bitumen Membrane: Tremco Power Standard FR,
glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet.
2.4 INTERPLY MEMBRANES
A. Burmastic Felt Membranes: 33 Pounds
2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS:
A. Metal Flashing Sheet: 24 gage galvanized sheet metal.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 8
1. Metal counter flashing.
2. Metal gravel stop.
3. Metal coping.
4. Metal termination bar.
B. Metal edge stripping ply: 2 plies of composite ply.
C. TPA Flashing.
1. TPA Flashing Membrane – Reinforce 0.045 inches thick.
2. Flashing Adhesive – Sheeting Bond Adhesive.
3. Heat Seaming.
4. Termination Mastic – Rock-it Adhesive and Burmesh Membrane.
5. Surface with White # 11 Granules.
2.5 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Primer: Tremco Tremprime WB ASTM D 41.
B. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Tremco PowerPly LV standard asphalt-based, I-part asbestos-free,
cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with built-up roofing
membranes and flashings. Each container labeled with UL and FM logos indicating material
was manufactured under the specified UL and FM quality assurance programs.
1. Asbestos Content ASTM D 276 None
2. Viscosity ASTM D 2196 80,000-200,000 cP
3. Density ASTM D 1475 8.2 b/gal
4. VOC ASTM D 3960 Compliant with local building
codes
2.6 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with built-up roofing.
B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing
system manufacturer for application.
C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion
resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to
substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing
system manufacturer.
D. Roof Surfacing Material:
1. ICE Coating
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 9
2.7 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and
referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thickness indicated.
1. I Inch Coated Fiberboard Insulation
B. Insulation-Board Fasterners:
1. Tremco 1410 Plates and Screws
C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
1. Provide positive drainage through entire valley areas.
2. Polyisocyanurate cricket material with 1/2 inch thick cellulosic-fiber covers board. All
crickets and cant strips to be installed with specified Fas N Free solvent free insulation
adhesive.
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with membrane roofing per warrantable standards.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are securely clamped in place and free flowing.
2. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent
units in excess of 1/16 inch out of plane relative to adjoining deck.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Make sure and protect the inside of the facilities per Districts procedures. Before any re-roofing
can take place, the Districts representative will sign off on the decks and authorize any
replacement per unit costs given by roofer.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 10
B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp
projections.
C. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components, so insulation is not exposed to precipitation
or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch
with insulation.
D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.
3.04 WOOD NAILERS and PANELS
A. Treated wood nailers shall be installed at the perimeter of the roof where no vertical wall exists
and around other projections and penetrations that are to be flashed.
B. Nailers new shall be securely anchored to the deck to resist 200 lbs. per foot applied in any
direction.
The thickness of the nailer shall be provided such that the top of the nailer is flush with the surface to
which the TPA membrane is to be applied.
3.05 WOOD NAILERS and PANELS
A. Treated wood nailers shall be installed at the perimeter of the roof where no vertical wall exists
and around other projections and penetrations that are to be flashed.
B. Nailers new shall be securely anchored to the deck to resist 200 lbs. per foot applied in any
direction.
C. The thickness of the nailer shall be provided such that the top of the nailer is flush with the
surface to which the Insulation is to be applied.
3.06 Insulation Attachment
A. Base layer of Insulation:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 11
1. Install with Screws and Plates, one fastener every two square feet.
3.07 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials in compliance with
requirements in Roofing Manufacturer’s Guide.
C. Install roofing system in accordance with the following NRCA Manual Plates and NRCA
recommendations; modify as required to comply with requirements of references above:
1. Metal Parapet Cap (Coping) and Base Flashing: Plates BUR-I and BUR-I S.
2. Embedded Edge Metal Flashing: Plates BUR-3 and BUR-3S.
3. Surface-mount Counter flashing: Plates BUR-4 and BUR-4S.
4. Base Flashing for Wall Supported Deck: Plates BUR-5 and BUR-5S.
5. Base Flashing for Vented Base Sheet: Plates BUR-SA and BUR-5AS.
6. Expansion Joint with Metal Cover: Plates BUR-7 and BUR-7S.
7. Expansion Joint with Pre-Manufactured Cover: Plates BUR-7A and BUR-7AS.
8. Equipment Support Curb: Plates BUR-9 and BUR-9S.
9. Equipment Support Stand with Typical Rain Collar: Plates BUR-II and BUR-II S.
10. Raised Curb Detail: Plates BUR-13 and BUR-13S.
11. Skylight, Scuttle, and Smoke Vent: Plates BUR-I 4 and BUR 14S.
12. Isolated Stack Flashing: Plates BUR-17A and BUR-17AS.
13. Plumbing Vent: Plates BUR-I 8 and BUR-18S.
14. Penetration Pocket: BUR-I 9 andBUR-19S.
15. Roof Drain: BUR-20 andBUR-20S.
16. Gutter: BUR-22 and BUR-22S.
D. Start installation of built-up roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's
technical personnel. Roofing contractor must have approval from Material Manufacturer and
District to begin.
E. Where roof slope exceeds 2 inches per 12 inches, install sheets of built-up roofing membrane
parallel with slope.
1. Back nail roofing membrane sheets to substrate according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for
installing built-up roofing system.
G. Coordinate installing roofing system components, so insulation and roofing membrane sheets
are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast.
1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and
insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with
joints and edges sealed.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 12
2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water
from entering completed sections of roofing system.
3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
H. Cold Process Asphalt Heating
1. An in-line heat exchange unit may be used to facilitate application.
a. Do not exceed maximum adhesive temperature of 1000 F.
2. Heat exchange unit: Use heat transfer oil approved by heating equipment manufacturer.
3. Follow operation procedures recommended by heating equipment manufacturer.
I. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering
building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.
3.8 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
1A. Install base sheet to Coated Fiberboard Insulation ½ Inch Board with adhesive at a rate of 3½
gallons per 100 square feet.
B. Install two base sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align sheets without stretching.
Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout
thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and
terminate beyond cants.
1. Cut plies in 18'-20' lengths maximum and allow to relax.
2. Embed each ply sheet in a solid coating of cold applied adhesive at rate of 2½ gallons per
I00 sq. ft. to form a uniform membrane without ply sheets touching.
C. Surface Membrane: Install lapped granulated cap sheet starting at low point of roofing system.
Offset laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching. Lap in
direction to shed water. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants.
1. Embed cap sheet in a solid application of PowerPly Cold Adhesive at a rate required
by roofing system manufacturer. Application Rate is 2½ gallons per 100 sq. ft.
2. Side and end laps to be sealed by applying heat seaming method.
D. Embed # 11 White Granules into all excessive adhesive and at all three or five course applications.
3.9 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and
at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.
2. Backer Sheet Application: Mechanically fasten backer sheet to walls or parapets. Adhere
backer sheet over roofing membrane at cants in flashing adhesive.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 13
3. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere to backer sheet in flashing adhesive.
B. Extend base flashing up walls a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 6 inches
onto field of roofing membrane.
C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
1. At parapets walls, extend flashing sheet up entire wail and mechanically fasten at outside
edge of nailer below coping cap.
2. At high parapet walls, extend flashing sheet up wall 8-12 inches above roofing membrane
and secure edge with butyl TF sealant tape and termination bar fastened at 8 inches OIC.
3. Install 24 gauge. Galvanized metal counter flashing at all vertically terminated base
flashings.
4. For existing roofs (as applicable): Architect/District verify the following existing
condition(s): On all parapet walls that are not wrapped with base flashing, prime and
install two coats of Tremco Wall-Tite White Elastomeric Coating.
D. Install 4 inch and 6-inch stripping plies where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up
roofing.
1. Set in flashing adhesive.
E. Install all edge metal, metal counter flashing, and metal coping according to NRCA details and
industry standards and manufacturers warrantable details.
F. Pipe penetrations: Install split lead flashing and strip in edges same as metal edges.
G. Irregular penetrations: Use Chem. Curb flashing component system. Must be approved by
material manufacturer first.
H. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch 4 lb. lead flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on
completed roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with stripping and extend a minimum of 4
inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane.
Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring.
I. Install stripping of not less than two roofing membrane ply sheets, each set in a continuous
coating of asphalt roofing cement.
J. Install new reinforced hypalon, lead jack or sheet metal flashing to all pipes and penetrations, as
required by roofing manufacturer. Seal penetration with a counter flashing umbrella, TF-Tape,
and clamping ring.
K. Install new reinforced hypalon, lead jack or sheet metal flashing to all pipes and penetrations, as
required by roofing manufacturer. Seal penetration with a counter flashing umbrella, TF-Tape,
and clamping ring.
L. Install Reinforced TPA Flashing to all perimeter walls, base, and curb flashing; install batten bars
and flashing tape to middle of walls greater than 12" in height. Install batter bars/termination bars
at the top of all base or curb flashing, with TF-Tape, and secure to wall with fasteners.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 14
M. Install reinforced TPA Flashing up and over the parapet wall, and nail to wood nailer on the
outside.
N. Install new batten bars to middle of TPA Sheeting with mechanical fasteners and two sided sealant-
tape.
O. Install reinforced TPA Flashing around all new TPA metal scuppers.
P. Elastomeric Flashing:
1. Adhere elastomeric sheeting completely to flashing surface, cant, and roofing with
flashing adhesive. After application of adhesive, allow adhesive to remain open for 15
minutes minimum to flash off solvent prior to setting elastomeric sheeting into flashing
adhesive.
2. Apply consistent pressure to entire surface of elastomeric sheeting using a steel hand
roller to achieve full adhesion of the sheet to the flashing substrate. Ensure complete
bond and continuity without wrinkles or voids.
3. Lap sheeting ends 4 inches. Fully heat weld flashing laps.
4. Elastomeric sheeting width: Sufficient to extend at least 6 inches beyond toe of cant onto
new roof.
5. Seal vertical and horizontal edges of sheeting with reinforcing membrane embedded in a
base course of flashing adhesive and a top course of Modified Asphalt Mastic.
Q. Hot air heat welding of TPA:
1. Wipe both sides of lap surfaces to be joined with toluene solvent.
2. Adjust welding equipment air temperature prior to start. Utilize steel roller or weighted
wheel on automatic welding equipment to provide pressure on lap area during heat
welding.
3. Maintain air nozzle temperature, nozzle speed, and lap pressure when joining laps
together.
4. Test lap areas to assure proper bonding. Remove lap sample from the roof. When lap
sample is cool, pull test lap apart. When torn, the reinforcing scrim should become
exposed. Patch test areas with new TPA of the same color and style, using a minimum 2"
lap area.
R. On curb details, plies will extend 2" above cants. Reinforced TPA Sheeting will be set in Sheeting
Bond and nailed inside wood nailer 6" on center. The outside edge of Sheet will be
5-coursed with Burmesh Membrane and Rock-it Adhesive and surfaced with White #11
Granules. Flashing seams shall be with heat seaming or Lap Adhesive Install TF-Tape to
both sides of the TPA Flashing at the Termination Bars.
S. On wall details, plies will extend 2" above cants. Reinforced TPA Sheeting will be set in
butyl-based adhesive or Sheeting Bond onto roof surface 6" and up wall under flashing
metal and fastened to nailer 12" on center. The outside edges of the plies of sheeting will
be 5-coursed with Burmesh Membrane and Rock-it Adhesive and surfaced with White
#11 Granules. Install TF-Tape to both sides of the TPA Flashing at the Termination
Bars.
3.10 SURFACING OF SYSTEM
1. Allow the system to cure for a minimum of 30 days.
2. Clean the roof surface of all debris and dirt.
3. Apply base application of ICE Coating at a rate of 1½ to 2 Gallons per 100 square feet.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COLD PROCESS BUILT- UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEM 07 51 13 - 15
4. Apply top application of ICE Coating at a rate of 1½ to 2 Gallons per 100 square feet.
5. Allow to cure 24 to 48 hours prior to foot traffic.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect
roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect or Owner.
1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
B. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and
damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and
Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements,
repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. Make
sure all drains .are free flowing.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. Coat all projections, foot marks, or
bleed through with specified white on white adhesive.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 1
SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Documents:
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Subcontract apply to this Section.
2. Review these documents for coordination with additional requirements and information that
apply to work under this Section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Flashing and sheet metal work.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "General Requirements."
2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel.
3. Division 06 Section “Finish Carpentry”
4. Division 07 Section "Air Barrier” and “Joint Sealers".
5. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames".
6. Division 09 Section "Painting".
1.2 REFERENCES
A. General:
1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated. Where
differences exist between codes and standards, the one affording the greatest protection shall
apply.
2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one at the time of
commencement of the Work.
3. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Requirements" for the list of applicable regulatory
requirements.
B. BAAQMD Regulation 8-51 - Adhesive and Sealant Products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section "General Requirements."
B. Product Data:
1. Specifications, materials list and schedule for surface preparation procedures.
2. Material safety data sheets.
C. Shop Drawings: Details showing each condition separately and cross-referenced with applicable
details on the Drawings.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 2
D. Closeout Submittals:
1. Material Safety Data: Sealant and adhesive quantity use in accordance with requirements of
BAAQMD Regulation 8-51.
2. Signed guaranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," latest
edition, of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
B. Take field measurements required for proper and adequate fabrication and installation of the work.
Exact measurements are the Subcontractor's responsibility. Furnish templates for exact locations of
items to be embedded.
1.5 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee sheet metal and flashing work provided under this section to be watertight for 5 years
after substantial completion. Guarantee shall include that other work and materials damaged by
leaks shall be promptly repaired at no cost to University.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Galvanized Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim:
1. Fry Reglet Corporation.
2. Heckmann Building Products Inc.
3. Hickman, W. P. Company.
4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; STF Sawtooth Flashing.
5. Or equal.
B. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process
and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755.
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural
quality.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation,
Grade 40; structural quality.
3. Surface: Smooth, flat and mill phosphatized for field painting.
4. Color: As selected by Architect.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 3
2.2 MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish sheet metal in minimum 20-gauge, except 24-gauge for downspouts and gutters, or
as otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise noted, all sheet metal shall be galvanized, FS QQ-S-775d,
Class d, ASTM A525 Class 1.25 commercial galvanizing.
1. Pre-manufactured Reglets: Snap-on type, for two piece flashing, metal to match flashing and
sheet metal, factory formed and sealed corners. Fry Reglet Corp./Springlok System, MM
Systems Corp./Snap-Tite System, Morrison & Co./Cushion-lok, or equal.
2. Pre-manufactured Roof Curbs: Box section design, custom heights, minimum 16 gage
galvanized steel, continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base plate, single and
compound roof pitch requirements, combustible materials and wood of any kind are not
permitted. Custom Curb, Inc. (800-251-3001), Roof Products & Systems Corp. (708-595-
7320), or equal.
B. Lead: ASTM B749, Type L51121, minimum 4 lbs./sq. ft. (0.0625 inches thick).
C. Solder: For use with steel or copper, Class A, Grade I, half-and-half, pig lead and block tin, ASTM
B32, Type 50-50, with rosin flux.
1. For use with stainless steel, 60-40 tin/lead solder, ASTM B32, with acid-chloride flux, except
use rosin flux over tinned surfaces.
D. Mastic: FS SS-S-153, Type 1, black plastic cement.
E. Nails and Screws: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal, or other non-corrosive metal as
recommended by sheet manufacturer, Stronghold type, with large flat heads and sharp points. Use
length sufficient to penetrate wood framing a minimum of 7/8-inch (22 mm). Use lead or neoprene
washers where indicated. Use sheet metal screws or self-tapping screws to fasten sheet metal to
other metal. Match finish of exposed heads with finish of material being fastened.
F. Lap Joint Sealer: Polyisobutylene non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant.
G. Coating for Dissimilar Metals: Bitumastic paint or as required to be compatible with adjacent
materials and finishes. Coordinate requirements with paint systems and coatings furnished under
Division 09 Section "Painting".
H. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part non-corrosive metal seam cementing compound recommended by
metal manufacturer for exterior/interior non-moving joints including riveted joints.
I. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weatherproof
seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet.
J. Paper Slip-Sheet: 5-lb (2.27 kg) rosin-sized building paper.
K. Polyethylene Underlayment: Minimum 6-mil carbonated polyethylene film.
L. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as
required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, non-
corrosive, size and gage as required for performance.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 4
M. Gutter and Conductor-Head Guards: 20-gauge bronze or nonmagnetic stainless steel mesh or
fabricated units, with selvaged edges and noncorrosive fasteners. Use materials compatible with
gutters and downspouts.
N. Other materials are described under Part 3, Execution.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Review drawings for sheet metal work. Coordinate to achieve proper incorporation of this work
within membrane waterproofing work.
3.2 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
B. Fabricate shapes as detailed and approved.
C. Accurately fabricate and fit parts, with surfaces free from warp, wave, buckle, dent or other defects,
and with square corners and angles, unless otherwise shown.
D. Install water and weather tight where exposed to the weather, with the provision for free expansion
and contraction without causing leaks.
E. Clean soldered surfaces prior to soldering. Fully flow soldered joints fully. Scrape and finish
exposed solder smooth. Remove traces of flux or acid.
F. Provide locked-butt joints. Where impractical and unless otherwise detailed, provide joints with full
backup strips, riveted to one end and soldered; lap other end and seal with lap joint sealer. Turn lock
joints, where exposed, in direction of flow.
1. Solder joints and miters.
2. Make ample provisions for expansion and contraction in sheet metal assemblies, and provide
by slip joints. In long runs, provide slip joints every 20 feet (6 m) minimum, unless
otherwise shown on Drawings. In runs less than 20 feet (6 m), provide one slip joint.
3. Provide reinforcements as required.
4. Shop fabricate corners at parapet wall copings with miters and all joints soldered.
G. Exposed fasteners are not permitted.
H. Provide heavy coating of bitumastic paint to insulate dissimilar metals from each other.
I. Fold, bead, hem or return exposed edges of fabricated sheetmetal; no raw edges will be permitted.
J. Close all ends.
K. Etch sheet metal surfaces which will be concealed in the finish work with an approved acid wash,
and then shop paint with one coat of approved galvanized primer. Sheet metal surfaces which will
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 - 5
be exposed in the finished work are specified to be treated and prime-painted under Division 09
Section "Painting".
1. Confirm compatibility of shop primers and surface preparation used on concealed surfaces
with paints and coatings provided in Division 09 Section "Painting".
L. Underlayment: Where stainless steel is to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates,
install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment.
M. Install continuous gutter guards on gutters, arranged as hinged units to swing open for cleaning
gutters. Install "beehive"-type strainer guards at conductor heads, removable for cleaning
downspouts.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Immediately upon completion of this work, remove from site all debris and scrap material and clean
up all dust and dirt resulting from this work.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 1
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Firestopping systems.
B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant
assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. See Drawings for additional requiremnts for firestopping. Where drawings and this section
conflicts, drawings to govern.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly,
and firestopping test or design number.
C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information
1. Low Emitting Materials
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings
when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock
Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at
www.icc-es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 2
3. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above
substantiation exists.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:
1. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type.
2. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type.
3. Approved by firestopping manufacturer
D. Products to conform with SCAQMD VOC levels.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions
during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after
installation of materials.
B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested
assembly design.
2.2 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E814 that
has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and T Rating Equal to F Rating
and that meets all other specified requirements.
B. Acceptable manufacturers providing code approved systems:
1. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
2. Bio Fireshiel, www.bioshield.com.
3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hiltLcom.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements.
2.3 FIRESTOPPING; GENERAL
A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the
substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation Construction Documents
FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 3
of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use
only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified
testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.
C. Firestopping Materials are either "cast-in-place" (integral with concrete placement) or "post
installed." Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement.
2.4 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES
A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
B. Fire Ratings: Use only those systems listed by UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock Hersey) or tested in
accordance with ASTM E 814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and
minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05 - 1
SECTION 07 90 05
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sealants and joint backing.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Based on ASTM C 920 Substrates:
1. M type substrates: Concrete, concrete masonry units, brick, mortar, natural stone. The
term "masonry" means brick, stone, and concrete masonry work.
2. G type substrates: Glass and transparent plastic glazing sheets.
3. A type substrates: Metals, porcelain, glazed tile, and smooth plastics.
4. 0 type substrates: Wood, unglazed tile; substrates not included under other categories
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,
substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.
C. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 inch long illustrating sealant colors for selection.
D. Color selection: Color selection shall be made from manufacturers standard color selection.
Selection shall be made by Architect.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
F. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information
1. Low Emitting Materials
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05 - 2
C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years of experience.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound
(VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168.
B. Type SJ-1 - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.
c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.
d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
C. Type SJ-2 - Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Multi-component self-leveling polyurethane
sealant, ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T.
1. Size as indicated on drawings, if not detailed, then per manufacturer's recommendation to
provide weathertight seal when installed.
2. Provide product recommended by manufacturer for traffic-bearing use.
3. Applications: Use for:
a. Exterior horizontal joints in concrete flatwork and extruded curbs.
D. Type SJ-3 - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses NT, A, G;
single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, non-bleeding.
1. Color: Match adjacent finished surfaces.
2. Movement Capability: Plus 100 percent, minus 50 percent.
3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F.
4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35
5. Applications: Use for:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05 - 3
a. Glazing at aluminum frames.
E. Type SJ-4 - Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: One-part non-sag silyl terminated polyether
sealant: ASTM C-920, Type S. Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, T, M, G, A, O.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.
F. Type SJ-5 - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP,
Grade NF single component, paintable.
1. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Interior joint sealant between window frames and wall or curb below
d. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
G. Type SJ-6 - BathtublTile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C920, Uses I, M and A; single
component, mildew resistant.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.
b. Joints between countertops with faucets and wall surfaces and backsplash.
H. Type SJ-7 - Acoustical Sealant: Non-skinning, sound dampering; single component, solvent
release curing, non-skinning.
1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:
a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track
and floor.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM 0 1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width; Backer Rod manufactured by Backer Rod
Manufacturing, Inc., Denver, CO.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05 - 4
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when
sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G. Tool joints concave.
H. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and
intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.
I. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal all joints
with adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect sealants until cured.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. Control and Expansion Joints in Paving: Type SJ-2.
B. Joints Between Concrete Panels and Between Panels and Adjacent Work: Type SJ-1.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
JOINT SEALERS 07 90 05 - 5
C. Control Expansion, and Soft Joints in Masonry, and Between Masonry and Adjacent Work:
Type SJ-1.
D. Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Type SJ-4.
E. Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work (except masonry): Type SJ-1.
F. Joints Between Interior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work (except masonry): Type SJ-5.
G. Under Exterior Door Thresholds: Type SJ-4.
H. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type SJ-5; None; N/A.
I. Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs and Floors: Type SJ-2.
J. Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Countertops and Walls:
Type SJ-6.
K. In Sound Rated Walls, Between Metal Stud Track/Runner and Adjacent Construction: Type SJ-
7.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1
SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.
B. Steel frames for wood doors.
C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy
of referenced grade standard.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and
identifying location of different finishes, if any.
D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special
installation instructions relating to this project.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products including STC rating of sound doors meet
or exceed specified requirements.
F. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information
1. Local/Regional Materials
2. Recycled Materials
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGEM AND HANDLING
A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Doors and Frames:
1. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. (Basis of Design)
2. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.
3. Door Components Inc.; www.doorcomponents.com
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Requirements for Doors and Frames:
1. Accessibility: Comply with CBSC 2016.
2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.
3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.
4. Door Texture: Smooth faces.
5. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded
in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
6. Galvanizing for exterior units: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated
(galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.3 STEEL DOORS
A. Exterior Doors: 16 GA L Series Doors by Steelcraft
1. Grade: ANSI A250.11 Level 4, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.
2. Core: 1” cell, 99 pound Kraft Honeycomb core
3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.70, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1363.
B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 18 L Series Doors by Steelcraft
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.
2. Core: 1” cell, 99 pound Kraft Honeycomb core.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 3
3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
C. Interior Doors, Fire-Rated: 18 L Series Doors by Steelcraft
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless.
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C
("positive pressure").
a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.
b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.
3. Core: As required to meet Fire-Rated assembly.
2.4 STEEL FRAMES
A. General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except:
a. ANSI A250.11: 18 gage frames.
b. ANSI A250.11: 16 gage frames.
c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI
A250.8 for Level 2
2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
3. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head,
flush with top.
4. Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and
overhead structure.
B. Exterior Door Frames: Continuous face welded, dressed and grind smooth.
1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A60/ZF180 coating.
2. Weatherstripping: Integral, recessed into door edge or frame.
C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Continuous face welded, dressed and grind smooth.
D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Continuous face welded, dressed and grind smooth. 1. Fire
Rating: Same as door, labeled.
E. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
2.5 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.1 0, door manufacturer's standard.
B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.
C. Colors and coating to match custom samples provided by the Architect.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in concrete or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior
to installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM
HMMA840.
B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D. Coordinate installation of hardware.
E. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
F. Touch up damaged factory finishes.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed.
C. Test sound control doors for force to close, latch, and unlatch in accordance with ASTM E1408;
adjust as required to comply.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 29 - 1
SECTION 08 14 29
PREFINISHED WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes solid-core doors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" steel door frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers,
and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Other Action Submittals:
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of flush wood door work prepared by or under the
supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those
on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
a. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware
blocking; and other pertinent data.
b. Indicated specific model number of door and frame.
c. Indicated hardware group.
d. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
e. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
f. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for
the following:
1. Faces of Factory-Finished Doors: Show the full range of colors available for stained
finishes.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for
each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of
three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished
work.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 29 - 2
2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edgings
representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber
required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.
3. Corner sections of plastic-laminate-clad doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each
color, texture, and pattern selected.
4. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified.
5. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
1. 2010 Building Standards Administrative Code, Part 1, CBSC.
2. 2010 California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, CBSC (2009 IBC & California
Amendments).
3. 2010 California Electrical Code (CEC), Part 3, CBSC (2008 National Electrical Code &
California Amendments).
4. 2010 California Mechanical Code (CMC), Part 4, CBSC (2009 Uniform Mechanical
Code & California Amendments).
5. 2010 California Plumbing Code (CPC), Part 5, CBSC (2009 Uniform Plumbing Code &
California Amendments).
6. 2010 California Energy Code, Part 6, CBSC.
7. 2010 California Historical Building Code, Part 8, CBSC.
8. 2010 California Fire Code, Part 9, CBSC (2009 International Fire Code & California
Amendments).
9. 2010 California referenced Standards, Part 12 CBSC.
10. Title 8 C.C.R. Chapter 4, Sub-Ch. 6 – Elevator Safety Orders.
11. Title 19 C.C.R., Public Safety, SFM Regulations.
12. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Title II or Title III.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1. Performance duty Level: Extra Heavy Duty.
2. Factory machined for door hardware and high density hardware blocking.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 29 - 3
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work
is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in
materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-
inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a
3-inch span.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair
or replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty:
a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Flush Wood Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product
or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
1. Signature Series by Marshfield Door Systems. (Basis of Design)
2. Algoma Hardwoods Inc.
3. Buell Door Company.
4. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. (Basis of Design - Acoustical Doors)
5. Maiman Company.
6. Marlite.
7. VT Industries Inc.
8. Haley Brothers, Inc.
9. Or equal.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.
B. Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).
2. Species and Cut: Zebrawood Veneer, Quartered.
3. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.
4. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 29 - 4
2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS
A. Core:
1. Stave Lumber Core: May be a combination of solid, low-density hardwood lumber
blocks or strips not more than 2-1/2" wide of one species of wood between 6% to 9%
moisture content. Joints to be tight and staggered in adjacent rows. Lumber density is 25
to 27 lbs. per cubic foot.
B. Doors:
1. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
C. Veneer-Faced Doors:
1. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit
abrasive planed before veneering.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces,
and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of
rabbeted doors same as door stiles.
1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted, meeting rails.
Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door
frames.
D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of
referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
E. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors with water repellent after manufacturing has been
completed.
1. Flash top of out swinging doors (with manufacturer's standard metal flashing).
2.5 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop seal faces and edge of doors, including cutouts, with stain
(if required).
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 29 - 5
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.
B. Finish doors at factory.
C. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors
indicated to receive opaque finish.
D. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.
E. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Finish: NWWDA I.S.1-A System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Effect: Open-grain finish.
5. Sheen: Semigloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-
rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold
is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 29 - 6
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08 14 29
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
BIFOLDING WOOD DOORS 08 14 76 - 1
SECTION 08 14 76
BIFOLDING WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes solid-core, bifolding wood doors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" steel door frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Prefinished Wood Doors".
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware".
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
2. NFPA 80: Standard Methods for builders’ hardware to be used in fire rated swing doors.
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. UL10B: Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies (Note: Neutral pressure standard).
2. UL 10C: Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door, submit door manufacturer current product literature,
including installation instruction. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and
trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Other Action Submittals:
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of bifolding wood door work prepared by or under the
supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those
on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
a. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware
blocking; and other pertinent data.
b. Indicated specific model number of door and frame.
c. Indicated hardware group.
d. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
e. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
f. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for
the following:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
BIFOLDING WOOD DOORS 08 14 76 - 2
1. Faces of Factory-Finished Doors: Show the full range of colors available for stained
finishes.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for
each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of
three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished
work.
2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edgings
representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber
required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.
3. Corner sections of plastic-laminate-clad doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each
color, texture, and pattern selected.
4. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified.
5. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
1. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
2. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Title II or Title III.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1. Performance duty Level: Extra Heavy Duty.
2. Factory machined for door hardware and high density hardware blocking.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Deliver doors, materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged
containers with identification labels intact.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings
D. Store doors as recommended by manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work
is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
BIFOLDING WOOD DOORS 08 14 76 - 3
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in
materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-
inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a
3-inch span.
1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair
or replacement of defective doors.
2. Warranty:
a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. BifoldingWood Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named
product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
1. ProCore Solid Core by Jeld-Wen, Inc. (Basis of Design)
2. Or equal.
2.2 BIFOLD DOORS
A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.
B. Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).
2. Species and cut: Maple, quarter sawn
3. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.
4. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.
C. Flush Doors
1. Core:
a. Stave Lumber Core: May be a combination of solid, low-density hardwood lumber
blocks or strips not more than 2-1/2" wide of one species of wood between 6% to
9% moisture content. Joints to be tight and staggered in adjacent rows. Lumber
density is 25 to 27 lbs. per cubic foot.
2. Doors:
a. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire
unit abrasive planed before veneering.
3. Veneer-Faced Doors:
a. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire
unit abrasive planed before veneering.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
BIFOLDING WOOD DOORS 08 14 76 - 4
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
2.4 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop seal faces and edge of doors, including cutouts, with stain
(if required).
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.
B. Finish doors at factory.
C. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors
indicated to receive opaque finish.
D. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.
E. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Finish: NWWDA I.S.1-A System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Effect: Open-grain finish.
5. Sheen: Semigloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect rough opening for compliance with door manufacturer recommendations. Verify rough
opening conditions are within recommended tolerances
B. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. Trim bottom
of jamb sides to achieve desired distance between door bottom and finished floor height.
a. Reject doors with defects.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
BIFOLDING WOOD DOORS 08 14 76 - 5
3.2 BIFOLD DOOR INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C. Job-Fitted Doors:
1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do
not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer. Machine doors for
hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
2. Fasten overhead track in center of finished opening by inserting screws through pre-
drilled holes.
3. Attach jamb brackets flush to finished floor in line with overhead track.
D. Install door assemblies.
1. Place pivot pin in hole at top corner bracket and place guide wheel in track.
2. Lift door assembly and drop bottom pin into bottom bracket hole.
E. Check positioning and operation. Adjust hardware if necessary
F. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch
from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or
scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.
G. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
H. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08 14 76
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 1
SECTION 08 51 13
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Architectural Aluminum Windows including perimeter trims, stools, accessories, shims
and anchors, and perimeter sealing of window units.
2. Types of aluminum windows include:
a. Horizontal Sliding Window
B. Related Sections:
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
2. 062000 “Finish Carpentry”
3. 071353 “Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing”
4. 072100 “Thermal Insulation”
5. 076200 “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”
6. 0792050 “Joint Sealers”
7. 088003 “Glazing”
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. For fenestration industry standard terminology and definitions refer to American Architectural
Manufactures Association (AAMA) – AAMA Glossary (AAMA AG).
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed window system shall withstand the effects of the
following performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,
installation, or other defects in construction.
B. Window Performance Requirements:
1. Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of performance indicated that
comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 (NAFS)
2. Air Leakage: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. The air
leakage rate shall not exceed 0.30 cfm/ft2 (1.5 L/s·m2) at a static air pressure differential of 6.2
psf (300 PA).
3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 and
ASTM E 547. There shall be no leakage as defined in the test method at a static air pressure
differential of 10 psf (479 Pa).
4. Uniform Load Deflection: A minimum static air pressure difference of 70 psf (3352 Pa) shall
be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. There shall
be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 2
5. Uniform Load Structural Test: A minimum static air pressure difference of 105 psf (5027 Pa)
shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E 330. The
unit shall be evaluated after each load.
6. Component Testing: Window components shall be tested in accordance with procedures
described in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 (NAFS).
7. Energy Efficiency:
a. Thermal Transmittance Test: (U-Factor): When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503,
the conductive thermal transmittance (U-Factor) shall not be more than:
1) U-factor not more than .55 BTU/hr/sf/°F per AAMA 507 or NFRC 100 when using
project specified glass.
b. Condensation Resistance Test (CRF): When tested to AAMA Specification 1503, the
condensation resistance factor shall not be less than (CRF) 50frame and 61glass (clear).
or
Temperature Index (I): When tested to CSA-A440-00, the Temperature Index shall not be
less than (I) 38.2frame and 61.2glass (clear).
8. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM
E 1886 and information in ASTM E 1996 and TAS 201/203.
a. Large – Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of
grade.
b. Small – Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located above 30 feet (9.1 m) of
grade.
9. Blast Mitigation Performance: Shall be tested or proven through analysis to meet ASTM
F1642, GSA-TS01, and UFC 04-010.01 performance criteria.
To meet UFC 04-010.01, B-3.1 Standard 10 for Windows and Skylights, the following options
are available:
a. Section B-3.1.1 Dynamic analysis
b. Section B-3.1.2 Testing
c. Section B-3.1.3 ASTM F2248 Design Approach
10. Forced Entry Resistance: All windows shall conform to ASTM F588, Grade 10.
11. Thermal Barrier Tests: Testing shall be in general accordance with AAMA 505 Dry Shrinkage
and Composite Thermal Cycling test procedure, AAMA TIR-A8, Structural Performance of
Composite Thermal Barrier systems.
12. Sound: Testing per AAMA 1801 with 1" [25.4 mm] insulating glass made with (1/4" [6.35
mm] exterior with, 1/2" [12.7 mm] airspace, 1/4" [6.35 mm] interior): minimum (34 STC) and
(29 OITC).
13. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): Shall have a Type III Product Specific EPD
created from a Product Category Rule specific to North America.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions
of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type
of aluminum window indicated.
1. Recycled Content:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 3
a. Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer
recycled content per unit of product.
b. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product
included in project.
c. Indicate location recovery of recycled content.
d. Indicate location of manufacturing facility.
2. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD):
a. Include a Type II Product-Specific EPD created from a Product Category Rule specific to
North America.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work,
operational clearances and installation details.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes including samples of
hardware and accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required.
E. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum window. Test results based on use of
downsized test units will not be accepted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product:
1. Series 6555 (3-7/8”) Horizontal Sliding Window by EFCO or approved equal
A. Substitutions: Refer to Substitutions Section for procedures and submission requirements.
1. Pre-Contract (Bidding Period) Substitutions: Submit written requests ten (10) days prior to bid
date.
2. Post-Contract (Construction Period) Substitutions: Submit written request in order to avoid
window installation and construction delays.
3. Product Literature and Drawings: Submit product literature and drawings modified to suit
specific project requirements and job conditions.
4. Certificates: Submit certificate(s) certifying substitute manufacturer (1) attesting to adherence
to specification requirements for window system performance criteria, and (2) has been
engaged in the design, manufacturer and fabrication of aluminum windows for a period of not
less than ten (10) years. (Company Name)
5. Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying compliance with each test requirement required by
the project.
6. Samples: Provide samples of typical product sections and finish samples in manufacturer's
standard sizes.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 4
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum window manufacturer for
strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070" (1.78 mm)
wall thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members.
1. Recycled Content: Shall have a minimum of 50% mixed pre- and post-consumer recycled
content.
B. Thermal Barrier:
1. Thermal Barrier: The thermal barrier shall be a nominal 3/8" (9.53 mm) separation consisting
of a two-part, chemically curing high density polyurethane which is mechanically and
adhesively bonded to the aluminum.
C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and
compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.
D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or
iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength
to withstand design pressure indicated.
E. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel
complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron
complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to
withstand design pressure indicated.
F. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's
standard, permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant
manufacturer for joint size and movement.
2.3 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 08 Section “Glazing” for glass units and glazing
requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units.
B. Glazing System: Glazing method shall be a wet/dry type in accordance with manufacturer’s
standards. Exterior glazing shall be silicone back bedding sealant. Interior glazing shall be snap-in
type glazing beads with an interior gasket in accordance with AAMA 702 or ASTM C864.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or
other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly
close, and securely lock aluminum windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and
dimensions.
B. Horizontal Sliding Window Typical Hardware:
1. Steel Roller Assembly
2. Aluminum auto lock
C. Interior Trims: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T6 alloy and temper, extruded to profiles and details
indicated. Seal exterior joints with manufacturer's standard sealant to assure water-tight joints.
1. Interior Trims: The interior face trim minimum wall thickness shall be 0.062" (1.57 mm). The
face trim shall snap-fit onto concealed mounting clip. Exposed fasteners shall not be accepted.
The mounting clip shall be extruded aluminum of 6063-T6 alloy and temper. The minimum
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 5
wall thickness shall be 0.062" (1.57 mm). The trim clips shall be provided in 4" (101.6 mm)
lengths and spaced a maximum of 18" (457.2 mm) center to center.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain
required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent
possible.
B. Window Frame Joinery: Screw-spline, factory sealed frame and vent corner joints.
C. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring windows.
D. Fabricate aluminum windows that are re-glazable without dismantling sash or framing.
E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with
anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and
provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as
indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
F. Sub frames: Provide sub frames with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions
indicated but not less than 0.093" (2.4 mm) thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and
join with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. Provide sub frames
capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
G. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and possible
for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section “Glazing” and with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 (NAFS).
H. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section “Glazing” and
glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match frame.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
1. Factory Finishing: Fluoropolymer Coating, color to be selected by the Architect
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experiences with installation of the
same or similar units required for this project and other projects of similar size and scope.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet
or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion
of test reports, and calculations.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum
windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section “Product
Requirements.” Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect
for review.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup for type(s) of window(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present,
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate and operational
clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in
components to ensure a coordinated, weather tight window installation.
1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris.
2. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints.
Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches (76 mm)
of opening.
3. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without
sharp edges or offsets at joints.
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing
windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install aluminum-framed window system level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or
impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper
relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weather tight construction.
D. Install aluminum-framed window system and components to drain condensation, water penetrating
joints, and moisture migrating within system to the exterior.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08 51 13 - 7
E. Separate aluminum from dissimilar material to prevent corrosion or electrolytic action at points of
contact.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare
test reports.
1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
2. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows:
3. Testing Methodology: Testing Standard shall be per AAMA 502 including reference to ASTM
E 783 for Air Leakage Test and ASTM E 1105 for Water Penetration Test.
a. Air Leakage Test: Conduct test in accordance with ASTM E 783 at a minimum uniform
static test pressure of 6.2 psf (300 Pa). The maximum allowable rates of air leakage for
field testing shall not exceed 1.5 times the project specifications.
b. Water Infiltration Test: Water penetration resistance tests shall be conducted in accordance
with ASTM E 1105 at a static test pressure equal to 2/3 the specified water test pressure.
4. Testing Extent: Architect shall select window units to be tested as soon as a representative
portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for
air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer’s representative present.
5. Test Reports: Shall be prepared according to AAMA 502.
3.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust operating sashes, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and
weather stripping for smooth operation and weather tight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving
parts.
B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
C. Clean glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean
surfaces.
D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and
masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other
contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants
immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Door hardware.
2. Third-party inspection report for fire-rated door assemblies.
3. Cylinders for doors fabricated with locking hardware.
B. Related Divisions:
1. Division 06 – door hardware installation
2. Division 07 – sealant at exterior thresholds
3. Division 08 – metal doors and frames, wood doors.
C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere.
1. Windows.
2. Cabinets, including open wall shelving and locks.
3. Signs.
4. Toilet accessories, including grab bars.
5. Installation.
6. Rough hardware.
7. Corner Guards.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date.
1. American National Standards Institute
a) ANSI 156.18 – Materials and Finishes.
2. BHMA – Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
3. 2016 California Building Code
a) Chapter 11B – Accessibility To Public Buildings, Public
Accommodations, Commercial Buildings and Public Housing
4. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute
5. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association
a) NFPA 80 2016 Edition – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening
Protectives.
b) NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
c) NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
6. UL – Underwriters Laboratories
a) UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
b) UL 305 – Panic Hardware
7. WHI – Warnock Hersey Incorporated State of California Building Code
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 2
8. Local applicable codes
9. SDI – Steel Door Institute
10. WI – Woodwork Institute
11. AWI – Architectural Woodwork Institute
12. NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
B. Abbreviations
1. Manufacturers: see table at 2.1.A of this section
2. Finishes: see 2.7 of this section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS
A. SUBMITTALS: Submit six copies of schedule per D. Only submittals printed one sided
will be accepted and reviewed. Organize vertically formatted schedule into “Hardware
Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item
required for each door or opening. Minimum 10pt font size. Include following
information:
1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items.
2. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18.
3. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
4. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
5. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule.
6. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
7. Mounting locations for hardware.
8. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing.
9. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and
phone number.
10. Catalog cuts.
B. Bid and submit manufacturer’s updated/improved item if scheduled item is discontinued.
C. Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise identify deviations from “Schedule of Finish
Hardware” on submittal with notations clearly designating those portions as deviating
from this section.
D. If discrepancy between drawings and scheduled material in this section, bid the more
expensive of the two choices, note the discrepancy in the submittal and request direction
from Architect for resolution.
E. Substitutions per Division 1. Include product data and indicate benefit to the Project.
Furnish operating samples on request.
F. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested by Owner to meet
existing standard.
G. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying
schedule, riser and point-to-point wiring diagrams, manufacturers’ installation,
adjustment and maintenance information, and supplier’s final inspection report.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Qualifications:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 3
1. Hardware supplier: direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified
architectural hardware consultant (AHC), available at reasonable times during
course of work for project hardware consultation to Owner, Architect and
Contractor.
a) Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.
Detailing implies that the submitted schedule of hardware is correct and
complete for the intended function and performance of the openings.
B. Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware
(latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer.
C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special
knowledge or effort.
D. Fire-Rated Openings: NFPA 80 compliant. Hardware UL10C (positive pressure)
compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching
hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved-bearing hinges, and resilient seals.
Coordinate with wood door section for required intumescent seals. Furnish openings
complete.
E. Furnish hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with specified
performance level and design intent, complying with manufacturers’ instructions and
code requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field).
1. Permanent keys and cores: secured delivery direct to Owner’s representative.
B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers,
complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark packages to indicate
contents, locations in hardware schedule and door numbers.
C. Storage: Provide securely locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture,
sunlight, paint, chemicals, dust, excessive heat and cold, etc.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION:
A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of
members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical the
same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect’s approval.
B. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper
design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar
requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of
omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. Furnish related trades
with the following information:
1. Location of embedded and attached items to concrete.
2. Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops.
3. Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 4
4. At masonry construction, coordinate with the anchoring and hollow metal
supplier prior to frame installation by placing a strip of insulation, wood, or
foam, on the back of the hollow metal frame behind the rabbet section for
continuous hinges, as well as at rim panic hardware strike locations, silencers,
coordinators, and door closer arm locations. When the frame is grouted in place,
the backing will allow drilling and tapping without dulling or breaking the
installer’s bits.
5. Coordinate: flush top rails of doors at out swinging exteriors, and throughout
where adhesive-mounted seals occur.
6. Manufacturers’ templates to door and frame fabricators.
C. Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will
be made for proper hardware installation.
D. Environmental considerations: segregate unused recyclable paper and paper product
packaging, uninstalled metals, and plastics, and have these sent to a recycling center.
1.7 WARRANTY:
A. Part of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale. Provide manufacturers’ written
warranties.
B. Include factory order numbers with close-out documents to validate warranty
information, required for Owner in making future warranty claims:
C. Minimum warranties:
1. Locksets: Three years
2. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Lock: Ten Years
3. Exit Devices: Three years
4. Closers: Thirty years mechanical
5. Hinges: One year
6. Other Hardware Two years
1.8 COMMISSIONING:
A. Conduct these tests prior to request for certificate of substantial completion:
1. With installer present, test door hardware operation with climate control system
and stairwell pressurization system both at rest and while in full operation.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Listed acceptable alternate manufacturers: these will be considered; submit for review
products with equivalent function and features of scheduled products.
ITEM: MANUFACTURER: ACCEPTABLE
ALTERNATE:
Hinges (IVE) Ives Bommer
Key System (SCH) Schlage Owner standard
Mechanical Locks (SCH) Schlage Owner standard
Exit Devices (VON) Von Duprin Owner standard
Closers (LCN) LCN Owner standard
Kickplates (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco
Stops & Holders (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco
Overhead Stops (GLY) Glynn-Johnson ABH
Thresholds (ZER) Zero NGP, Reese
Seals & Bottoms (ZER) Zero NGP, Reese
2.2 HINGING METHODS:
A. Drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees. Doors will actually swing to maximum
allowable. Use wide-throw conventional or continuous hinges as needed up to 8 inches
in width to allow door to stand parallel to wall for true 180-degree opening. Advise
architect if 8-inch width is insufficient.
B. Conform to manufacturer’s published hinge selection standard for door dimensions,
weight and frequency, and to hinge selection as scheduled. Where manufacturer’s
standard exceeds the scheduled product, furnish the heavier of the two choices. Notify
Architect of deviation from scheduled hardware.
C. Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless-steel pins and approved bearings. Hinge open
widths minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing.
1. Out swinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins and
security studs.
2. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric
conditions.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 6
2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS:
A. Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: as scheduled.
1. Chassis: cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable without disassembly.
2. Universal lock case – 10 functions in one case.
3. Floating mounting tabs automatically adjusts to fit a beveled door edge.
4. Latchbolts: 0.75 inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type.
5. Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast lever or solid extruded bar
type levers as scheduled. Filled hollow tube design unacceptable.
a) Spindles: security design independent breakaway. Breakage of outside
lever does not allow access to inside lever’s hubworks to gain wrongful
entry.
b) Inside lever applied by screwless shank mounting – no exposed trim
mount screws.
c) Levers rotate up or down for ease of use.
d) Vandalgard locks: locked lever freely rotates down while remaining
securely locked. This feature prevents damage to internal lock
components when subjected to excessive force.
6. Furnish solid cylinder collars with wave springs. Wall of collar to cover rim of
mortise cylinder.
7. Turnpieces: accessible offset turn-lever design not requiring pinching or twisting
motions to operate.
8. Deadbolts: stainless steel 1-inch throw.
9. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1 inch deep box construction,
lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
10. Scheduled Lock Series and Design: Schlage L series, 06A design.
11. Certifications:
a) ANSI A156.13, 1994, Grade 1 Operational.
b) ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 31 UL Listed.
12. Accessibility: Require not more than 5 lb to retract the latchbolt or deadbolt, or
both, per CBC 2016 11B-404.2.7 and 11B-309.4.
13. Accepted substitutions: None.
B. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: as scheduled.
1. Chassis: cylindrical design, corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled steel, through-
bolted.
2. Locking Spindle: stainless steel, integrated spring and spindle design.
3. Latch Retractors: forged steel. Balance of inner parts: corrosion-resistant plated
steel, or stainless steel.
4. Latchbolt: solid steel.
5. Backset: 2.75 inches typically, more or less as needed to accommodate frame,
door or other hardware.
6. Lever Trim: accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage supported,
minimum 2.00 inches clearance from lever mid-point to door face.
7. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1.00 inch deep box
construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
8. Lock Series and Design: Schlage D series, “Rhodes” design.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 7
9. Certifications:
a) ANSI A156.2, 1994, Series 4000, Grade 1.
b) UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4 feet x 8 feet.
10. Accessibility: Require not more than 5 lb to retract the latchbolt or deadbolt, or
both, per CBC 2016 11B-404.2.7 and 11B-309.4.
11. Accepted substitutions: None.
2.4 EXIT DEVICES / PANIC HARDWARE
A. General features:
1. Independent lab-tested 1,000,000 cycles.
2. Push-through push-pad design. No exposed push-pad fasteners, no exposed
cavities when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming
dampeners, plus anti-rattle devices.
3. Deadlocking latchbolts, 0.75 inch projection.
4. End caps: impact-resistant, flush-mounted. No raised edges or lips to catch carts
or other equipment.
5. No exposed screws to show through glass doors.
6. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all
functions, no extra parts required to effect change of function.
7. Releasable in normal operation with 15-pound maximum operating force per
UBC Standard 10-4, and with 32-pound maximum pressure under 250-pound
load to the door.
8. Accessibility: Require not more than 5 lb to retract the latchbolt, per CBC 2016
11B-404.2.7 and 11B-309.4.
a) Mechanical method: Von Duprin “AX-“ feature, where touchpad directly
retracts the latchbolt with 5 lb or less of force. Provide testing lab
certification confirming that the mechanical device is independent third-
party tested to meet this 5 lb requirement.
B. Specific features:
1. Non-Fire Rated Devices: hex key dogging.
2. Lever Trim: breakaway type, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min. 0.13 inch
thickness, compression spring drive, match lockset lever design.
3. Fire-Labeled Devices: UL label indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”. Vertical rod devices
less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise scheduled.
4. Accepted substitutions: None.
2.5 CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: 4040XP
1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast
iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-
silicon steel spring.
2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.
3. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 8
4. Non-sized, non-handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and
rooms.
5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular
header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.
6. Adjust doors to open with not more than 5.0-pounds pressure to open at exterior
doors and 5.0-pounds at interior doors. As allowed per 2016 California Building
Code Section 11B-404.2.9, local authority may increase the allowable pressure
for fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15-pounds.
a) Exception: exterior doors’ pressure-to-open may be increased to 8.5-
pounds if: at a single location, and one of a bank of eight leafs or fraction
of eight, and one leaf of this bank is fitted with a low- or high-energy
operator.
7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth
valve for delayed action where scheduled.
8. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.
9. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish
data on request.
10. Exterior doors: seasonal adjustments not required for temperatures from 120
degrees F to -30 degrees F, furnish checking fluid data on request.
11. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
12. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted.
13. Accepted substitutions: None.
2.6 OTHER HARDWARE
A. Overhead Stops: Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field-changeable
hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.
B. Kick Plates: Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as
scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware.
C. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.
1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate
fasteners. Where floor type cannot be used, provide wall type. If neither can be
used, provide overhead type.
2. Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with Owner for
furniture locations. Minimum: 90deg stop / 95deg deadstop. Note degree of
opening in submittal.
D. Seals: Four-fingered type at head & jambs. Inelastic, rigid back, not subject to stretching.
Self-compensating for warp, thermal bow, door settling, and out-of-plumb. Adhesive
warranted for life of installation.
1. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.
2. Three-fingered type at hinge jambs of doors fitted with continuous hinges where
jamb leaf of hinge is fastened to the frame reveal.
E. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Comply with CBC 2016 11B-404.2.5.
Substitute products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material’s
thickness. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.
1. Saddle thresholds: 0.125 inches minimum thickness.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 9
2. Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use sealant complying with
requirements in Division 7 "Thermal and Moisture Protection". Minimum 0.25 inch
diameter fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or
approved equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors. National Guard Products’
“COMBO” or Pemko Manufacturing’s “FHSL”.
3. Fire-rated openings, 90-minutes or less duration: use thresholds to interrupt floor
covering material under the door where that material has a critical radiant flux value
less than 0.22 watts per square centimeter, per NFPA 253. Use threshold unit as
scheduled. If none scheduled, include a 0.25in high 5in wide saddle in the bid, and
request direction from Architect.
4. Fire-rated openings, 3-hour duration: Thresholds, where scheduled, to extend full
jamb depth.
5. Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for
specified fastening methods.
6. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Pinned
TORX drive at high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be
slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length
to prevent door compression.
F. Through-bolts: Do not use. Coordinate with wood doors; ensure provision of proper
blocking to support wood screws for mounting panic hardware and door closers.
Coordinate with metal doors and frames; ensure provision of proper reinforcement to
support machine screws for mounting panic hardware and door closers.
1. Exception: surface-mounted overhead stops, holders, and friction stays.
2.7 FINISH:
A. Generally: BHMA 626 Satin Chromium.
1. Areas using BHMA 626: furnish push-plates, pulls and protection plates of
BHMA 630, Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise scheduled.
B. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.
2.8 KEYING REQUIREMENTS:
A. Key System: Schlage Primus Classic 3G high-security utility-patented keyway,
interchangeable core throughout. Key blanks available only from factory-direct sources,
not available from after-market keyblank manufacturers. For estimate use factory GMK
charge. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with Owner’s representative Albert Dee to
determine system keyway(s), keybow styles, structure, stamping, degree of physical
security and degree of geographic exclusivity. Furnish Owner’s written approval of the
system; do not order keys or cylinders without written confirmation of actual
requirements from the Owner. Contractor will install permanent cylinders/cores.
1. Existing factory-registered master key system.
2. Primus Level 3G
3. Construction keying: furnish temporary keyed-alike cores in E keyway. Remove
at substantial completion and install permanent cylinders/cores in Owner’s
presence. Demonstrate that construction key no longer operates.
4. Temporary cylinders/cores remain supplier’s property.
5. Furnish 10 construction keys.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 10
6. Furnish 2 construction control keys.
7. Key Cylinders: furnish 6-pin solid brass construction.
B. Cylinders/cores: keyed at factory of lock manufacturer where permanent records are
maintained. Locksets and cylinders same manufacturer.
C. Permanent keys: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner.
1. For estimate: 3 keys per change combination, 5 master keys per group, 5 grand-
master keys, 3 control keys.
2. For estimate: VKC stamping plus “DO NOT DUPLICATE”.
D. Bitting List: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner at
completion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS:
A. Can read and understand manufacturers’ templates, suppliers’ hardware schedule and
printed installation instructions. Can readily distinguish drywall screws from
manufacturers’ furnished fasteners. Available to meet with manufacturers’
representatives and related trades to discuss installation of hardware.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation. Make
corrections before commencing hardware installation. Installation denotes acceptance of
wall/frame condition.
A. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and
security codes.
1. Notify Architect of code conflicts before ordering material.
1. Locate latching hardware between 34 inches to 44 inches above the finished
floor, per California Building Code, Section 1008.1.9.2 and 11B-404.2.7.
2. Locate panic hardware between 36 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor.
3. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to
remain, match locations of existing hardware.
B. Overhead stops: before installing, determine proposed locations of furniture items,
fixtures, and other items to be protected by the overhead stop's action.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Do not install
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level,
plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper
installation and operation. Remove and reinstall or replace work deemed defective by
Architect.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 11
1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes,
etc; fasten hardware over and through these seals. Install sweeps across bottoms
of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim astragals to
tops of sweeps.
2. Use manufacturers' fasteners furnished with hardware items, or submit Request
for Substitution with Architect.
3. Replace fasteners damaged by power-driven tools.
B. Locate floor stops no more than 4 inches from walls and not within paths of travel. See
paragraph 2.2 regarding hinge widths, door should be well clear of point of wall reveal.
Point of door contact no closer to the hinge edge than half the door width. Where
situation is questionable or difficult, contact Architect for direction.
C. Locate overhead stops for minimum 90 degrees at rest and for maximum allowable
degree of swing.
D. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.
3.4. ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be
adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods: repair or
replace to Owner’s satisfaction.
2. Adjust doors to fully latch with no more than 1 pound of pressure.
a) Door closer valves: turn valves clockwise until at bottom – do not force.
Turn valves back out one and one-half turns and begin adjustment process
from that point. Do not force valves beyond three full turns
counterclockwise.
3. Adjust delayed-action closers on fire-rated doors to fully close from fully-opened
position in no more than 10 seconds.
B. Inspection of fire door assemblies and means-of-egress panic-hardware doors: Per 2016
NFPA-80 5.2.1: hire an independent third-party inspection service to prepare a report
listing these doors and include a statement that there are zero deficiencies with the fire-
rated assemblies and the openings with panic hardware.
C. Fire-rated doors:
1. Wood doors: adjust to 0.125 inches clearance at heads, jambs, and meeting stiles.
2. Steel doors: adjust to 0.063 inches minimum to 0.188 inches maximum clearance
at heads, jambs, and meeting stiles.
3. Adjust wood and steel doors to 0.75 inches maximum clearance (undercut) above
threshold or finish floor material under door.
D. Final inspection: Installer to provide letter to Owner that upon completion installer has
visited the Project and has accomplished the following:
1. Has re-adjusted hardware.
2. Has evaluated maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and
instructed Owner’s personnel.
3. Has identified items that have deteriorated or failed.
4. Has submitted written report identifying problems.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 12
3.5 DEMONSTRATION:
A. Demonstrate mechanical hardware, including adjustment and maintenance procedures.
3.6 PROTECTION/CLEANING:
A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows,
etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion.
B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation / reinstallation
process.
3.7 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE
A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments.
B. Do not order material until submittal has been reviewed, stamped, and signed by
Architect’s door hardware consultant.
SPEXTRA: 451986-2
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE
LOCK
ND50TD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 EV D 626 SCH
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436/FS438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA COAT AND HAT HOOK 571 626 IVE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY INDICATOR
LOCK
L9456T 06N L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 30-120 626 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP ST-1630 689 LCN
1 EA TOP JAMB MTG PLATE 4040XP-18TJ 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA COAT AND HAT HOOK 571 626 IVE
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 13
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY INDICATOR
LOCK
L9456T 06N L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 30-120 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA COAT AND HAT HOOK 571 626 IVE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 04
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70TD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 EV D 626 SCH
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436/FS438 AS REQ'D 626 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 05
Provide each FLD door(s) with the following:
1 SET 2-DOOR BIFOLD
ASSEMB
C-415 KNC
6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4 652 IVE
2 EA DOOR PULL, 3/4" RND 8102HD 6" STD 630 IVE
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 14
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 06
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE PA-AX-XP98-L-F-2SI-06 626 VON
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 EV D 626 SCH
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 ICX 626 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS RIM CYLINDER 20-710 EV D 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP DEL EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18L/FS18S AS REQ'D BLK IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 547A-223 A ZER
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA CORRIDOR
W/DEADBOLT
LV9456T 06N L583-363 630 SCH
1 EA PRIMUS CORE 20-740 EV D 626 SCH
1 EA LOCK GUARD LG12 630 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18L/FS18S AS REQ'D BLK IVE
1 EA GASKETING 429AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 8192AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 547A-223 A ZER
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1
SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass.
B. Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08 51 13, Aluminum Windows
B. Energy calculations or prescriptive compliance documents.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
B. ANSI American National Standards Institute
C. ASTM Formerly the American Society for Testing and Materials
D. CPSC Consumer Products Safety Commission
E. FT Fully Tempered
F. GANA Glass Association of North America
G. HS Heat-strengthened
H. ICC International Code Council
I. IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council
J. IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
K. LBNL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratories
L. LEED Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design
M. Low-E Low emissivity
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2
N. LSG Light to Solar Gain
O. NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council
P. SHGC Solar Heat Gain Coefficient
Q. SC Shading Coefficient
R. USGBC The U.S. Green Building Council
S. VLT Visible Light Transmittance
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developing from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling,
cracking and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
B. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed
to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture or film on interior surfaces of
glass.
C. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge
separation, delaminating material obstructing vision through glass and blemishes exceeding those
allowed by referenced laminated glass standards.
D. Interspace or Airspace: The space between lites of any insulating glass unit that contains
dehydrated air or a specified gas.
E. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass products as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
F. Performance Requirements
1. Energy Characteristics: Certified U-Factor and SHGC of completed glazed assemblies
shall conform to those required in the energy calculations or prescriptive energy
compliance documents included in the Contract Documents.
1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this
section; require attendance by all affected installers.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
C. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size of glass units.
D. Test and Evaluation Reports: Glazing contractor shall obtain compatibility and adhesion test
reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility
and adhesion with glazing sealant as well as other glazing materials including insulating units.
E. Manufacturer Reports: Submit Glass Fabricator's Shop Drawing Review indicating compliance
with glazing standards established by the Glass Association of North America (GANA).
Submittal to include thermal stress and structural load analysis of the proposed glass types,
configuration and sizes.
F. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information
1. Local/Regional Materials
2. Recycled Materials
a. Float glass manufacturing feedstock materials are scrutinized as part of a quality
process given the sensitive nature of glass production. It is common for
manufacturers to produce scrap glass, called cullet, which is stockpiled and then
reprocessed and reutilized into the manufacturing process. The range of cullet
typically comprises between 10%- 20% of the final manufactured glass product, this
should be verified with the manufacturer. Because cullet is generated at the
manufacturing site, the chemical make-up of the cullet is known, and it can be sorted
and stockpiled appropriately prior to reutilization as feedstock. If cullet is being
claimed toward recycled content, it should be determined that the cullet is being fed
from the end of a production line (as waste in the production process) back into the
beginning of the same line. This should be noted in the special environmental
requirements product form.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for
glazing installation methods.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
C. Safety glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI 297.1.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification
label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with ASTM C 1048 and CBC 2406.2.
D. Insulating glass certification program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one
component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing
agencies:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc.
3. National Accreditation and Management Institute.
E. Mock-ups: Before glazing, build mockups for each glass product indicated in section 2.5 Product
Schedule to verify selections and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and
execution.
1. Construction: Build mockups with glass and glazing systems specified for the project,
including typical lite size, framing systems and glazing methods.
2. Scheduling: Notify architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will
be available for viewing.
3. Quality Assurance: Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as
a standard for judging the completed work. Accepted mockups may become part of the
completed work if undisturbed at the time of substantial completion.
1.8 FIELD CONDTIONS
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure,
interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including
replacement of failed units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Non-Fire-Rated Glass Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either
the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
1. PPG Glass
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5
2. Guardian.
3. Pilkington.
4. Visteon.
5. Or equal.
B. Non-Fire-Rated Glazing Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the
named fabricator or an equal fabricator by one of the other fabricators specified.
1. Oldcastle Glass.
2. Viracon.
3. Guardian.
4. Or equal.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass (Safety Glass): ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-
Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated.
1. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass at interior pane of insulated glass unit for all
exterior storefronts, doors and aluminum windows and in place of annealed float glass
where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass
lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article.
2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass).
C. Laminated Glass: 3/8” thickness. Place in interior hollow metal windows, ASTM C 1172, and
complying with other requirements specified and with the following:
1. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency
to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites
and installation.
a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure.
b. For cured-resin interlayers, laminate lites with laminated-glass manufacturer's
standard cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer.
2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances
and air or glass pockets.
D. Fire-Protection-Rated Safety Glazing.
1. Application: Vision lites in fire-resistance-rated doors, sidelights and fire rated windows
2. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing
according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.
3. Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 3/16-inch nominal thickness; faced
on one surface with a clear glazing film; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR
1201 for Category II materials. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6
a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); Standard
FireLite NT
b. Safti First; SuperLite
c. Or equal as approved in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements for
Substitutions.
E. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: ASTM E 774, Class A.
1. Nominal Thickness: 1 inch
2. Glass - Vision Units: Two lites, one fire-rated and one -way mirror glass as scheduled:
a. Exterior Lite: One way transparent mirror clear glass
b. Interior Lite: Clear FireLite NT with premium surface finish, FireLite Plus® with
Premium finish.
3. Air Space Width: Nominal 1/2 inch measured perpendicularly from surfaces of glass lites
at unit's edge.
4. Sealing System: Dual seal, 10 year limited warranty.
5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel.
a. Desiccant: Manufacturer's standard desiccant.
B. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.
2.3 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads
acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with California
Building code.
1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness.
2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery
of glazing materials.
3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.
B. Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building enclosure
vapor retarder and air barrier:
1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.
2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier
and vapor retarder seal.
3. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly
from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.
2.4 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Glazing Putty (Type GP-1): Polymer modified latex recommended by manufacturer for outdoor
use, knife grade consistency; grey color.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7
C. Silicone Sealant (Type SJ-3): Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion
without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class
25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color to match window frame color.
2.5 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I. Length
of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space
minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum
3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive
on one face.
C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15
Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size; black color.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM
C864 Option I; color to match window frame color.
E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.
D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8
3.3 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE
GLAZING)
A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing
junctions with butyl sealant.
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full
contact.
D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
E. Trim protruding tape edge.
3.4 INSTALLATION – EXTERIOR WET & DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND
SEALANT)
A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sight line. Seal corners
by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant.
B. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full
perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal.
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient
pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit.
E. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, 1/4 inch
below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with sight line.
F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with SJ-3 type sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing,
but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line.
G. Apply cap bead of SJ-3 type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line.
flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.
3.5 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT)
A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit.
B. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at 24
inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line.
C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with SJ-3 type sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not
more than 3/8 inch below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and
vapor seal.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GLAZING 08 80 00 - 9
D. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.
3.6 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their
products.
B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after Work is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
3.9 SCHEDULE
A. See Drawings for locations of glass types.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 09 05 61- 1
SECTION 09 05 61
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section applies to all floors identified in the contract documents as to receive the following
types of floor coverings:
1. Ceramic Tile.
2. Carpet Tile
B. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and pH.
C. Remediation of concrete floor slabs due to unsatisfactory moisture or pH conditions.
1. Contractor shall perform all specified remediation of concrete floor slabs. If such
remediation is indicated by testing agency's report and is due to a condition not under
Contractor's control or could not have been predicted by examination prior to entering into
the contract, a contract modification will be issued.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing, so that preliminary cleaning has been completed
for at least 24 hours prior to testing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination
of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; showing:
1. Moisture and pH limits and test methods.
2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure.
B. Testing Agency's Report: Include:
1. Description of areas tested; include floor plans and photographs if helpful.
2. Summary of conditions encountered.
3. Moisture and pH test reports.
4. Copies of specified test methods.
5. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces.
6. Submit report to Architect.
7. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing.
C. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 09 05 61- 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Moisture and pH testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and paid
by Contractor.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing
specified.
1. Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required, with
project Owner's project contact information.
C. Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing:
1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency.
2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start.
3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities.
4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions.
5. Notify Architect when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing
will start.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at
least 48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F.
B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed, and for at least
48 hours prior to testing, at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for
conditions, and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any
recommendation from flooring manufacturer, provide a product with the following
characteristics:
1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-, and alkali-resistant compound, compatible with floor,
floor covering, and floor covering adhesive, and capable of being feathered to nothing at
edges.
2. Latex or polyvinyl acetate additions are permitted; gypsum content is prohibited.
3. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum, after 28 days, when tested in accordance with
ASTM C109/C109M or ASTM C472, whichever is appropriate.
B. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product, suitable for
the moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from
flooring manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for
substrate and floor covering and for conditions present.
C. Remedial Floor Coating: Single- or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended
by its manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 09 05 61- 3
manufacturer's emission limits, resistant to the level of pH found, and suitable for adhesion of
flooring without further treatment.
1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, maximum.
2. If testing agency recommends any particular products, use one of those.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION
A. Perform following operations in the order indicated:
1. Preliminary cleaning.
2. Moisture vapor emission tests; 3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each
additional 1000 square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring
manufacturer.
3. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless
otherwise indicated.
4. pH tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Specified remediation, if required.
6. Patching, smoothing, and leveling, as required.
7. Other preparation specified.
8. Adhesive bond and compatibility test.
9. Protection.
B. Remediations:
1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this
condition before doing any other remediation; re-test after correction.
2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the
level of moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that
adhesive for installation of the flooring; if not, apply remedial floor coating over entire
suspect floor area.
3. Excessive pH: If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no
additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present
is available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation
of the flooring; otherwise, apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire
suspect floor area.
3.2 PRELIMINARY CLEANING
A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, paint, wax, oil, grease, asphalt, residual adhesive, adhesive
removers, film-forming curing compounds, sealing compounds, alkaline salts, excessive laitance,
mold, mildew, and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond.
B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 09 05 61- 4
3.3 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING
A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test
method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements
of this section.
C. Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows.
D. Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method,
as those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.
E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as
indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3
pounds per 1000 square feet per 24 hours.
F. Report: Report the information required by the test method.
3.4 INTERNAL RELATIVE HUMIDITY TESTING
A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test
method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method, comply with the requirements
of this section.
C. Test in accordance with ASTM F2170 Procedure A and as follows.
D. Testing with electrical impedance or resistance apparatus may not be substituted for the specified
ASTM test method, as the values determined are not comparable to the ASTM test values and do
not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.
E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as
indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value exceeds
75 percent relative humidity.
F. Report: Report the information required by the test method.
3.5 pH TESTING
A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test
method or this specification, comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B. Note: This procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710, repeated here for the
Contractor's convenience.
C. Use a wide range pH paper, its associated chart, and distilled or deionized water.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION 09 05 61- 5
D. Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete, forming a puddle approximately 1
inch in diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds, then dip the pH paper
into the water, remove it, and compare immediately to chart to determine pH reading.
E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as
indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if any test value is over 10.
3.6 PREPARATION
A. See individual floor covering section(s) for additional requirements.
B. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
C. Fill and smooth surface cracks, grooves, depressions, control joints and other non-moving joints,
and other irregularities with patching compound.
D. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints, or other moving joints.
3.7 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
3.8 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16- 1
SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B. Metal stud wall non-load bearing framing.
C. Metal channel ceiling framing.
D. Fire rated area separation walls.
E. Acoustic insulation.
F. Cementitious backing board.
G. Gypsum wallboard.
H. Joint treatment and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. See section 01 81 22 Acoustical Performance Requirements
B. See section 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
C. See section 06 16 43 Gypsum Sheathing
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Acoustic Attenuation for Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: STC of 45-49 calculated in
accordance with ASTM E 413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E 90.
B. Shaft Wall: Configure and install components as required to achieve the following:
1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span
deflection of U360.
2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E 90.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16- 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals.
C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing
system.
D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing
compliance with requirements.
E. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or C 754,
provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and
deflections.
F. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information
1. Low Emitting Materials
2. Local/Regional Materials
3. Recycled Materials
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated
assemblies.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and
finishing, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to Listed Assemblies by UL cited in the partition schedule.
B. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.
B. Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16- 3
C. Fire Rated Assemblies:
1. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the
particular assembly.
2. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular
assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory.
2.2 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.
2. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com.
3. Marino\Ware: www.marinoware.com.
4. Phillips Manufacturing Company: www.phillipsmfg.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and
properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum
deflection of wall framing of L/360 at 7.5 psf.
1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs.
2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped.
4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.
C. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties
necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements.
1. Manufacturers - Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories:
a. Same manufacturer as other framing materials.
D. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
E. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of
sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as
indicated on drawings.
2.3 BOARD MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.
3. Lafarge North America Inc: www.lafargenorthamerica.com.
4. National Gypsum Company:, www.nationalgypsum.com.
5. PABCO Gypsum: www.pabcogypsum.com.
6. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.
7. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Impact-Rated Wallboard: Tested to Level 3 soft-body and hard-body impact in accordance with
ASTM C1629.
1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16- 4
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM 03273.
3. Paper-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M.
4. Unfaced Type: Interior fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM
C1278/C1278M.
5. Type: Fire-resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed.
6. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
7. Edges: Tapered.
8. Products:
a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Impact Brand XP Wallboard.
b. Temple-Inland Inc; ComfortGuard AR Abuse Resistant.
c. USG Corporation; Fiberock Brand Panels--VHI Abuse-Resistant.
d. Substitutions: Not permitted.
C. Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:
1. Application: Surfaces adjacent to tile in wet areas including exterior soffits and vertical
walls in toilet rooms not receiving tile.
2. Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimum joints in place; ends square cut.
3. ASTM Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based, cementitious board complying with
ASTM C1288.
a. Application: substrate for tile applications in wet area's.
b. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
c. Products:
1) James Hardie Building Products, Inc; Hardibacker Cement Board.
2) USG; Wonder Board.
4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
5. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated.
6. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch.
7. Regular Board Thickness: 5/8 inch.
8. Edges: Tapered.
9. Products:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board ("Green
board").
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold-Guard Gypsum Board ("Green board").
c. Lafarge North America Inc; Watercheck ("Greenboard").
d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board.
e. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCO Water Curb ("Green board").
f. Temple-Inland Inc; Water-Resistant Gypsum Board ("Green board").
g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels.
h. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Regular Type:
a. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
c. Edges: Tapered.
2. Fire Resistant Type: Complying with Type X requirements; UL or WH rated.
a. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested
assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X.
b. Edges: Tapered.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16- 5
E. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, ends
square cut.
1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM C
1396/C 1396M; water-resistant faces.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustic Insulation:
1. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 518; preformed batt; friction fit, conforming to the following:
a. Flame Spread Index: 5 (class I/A), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
b. Smoke Developed Index: 35 (class I/A), when tested in accordance with ASTM E
84.
c. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
d. Combustibility:
e. Thickness: 3-1/2 inches.
f. Facing: Unfaced.
g. Manufacturers:
1) CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
2) Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.
3) Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
h. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Joint Sealers: As specified in Section 07 92 05.
C. Sheet caulking for junction boxes: "Lowery's Electrical Box Sealer" (800-772-2521 ), or Tremco
sheet caulking (800-321-7906). Sheet caulking for junction boxes at fire-rated assemblies:
"Firestop Putty Pads" by Hevi-duty/Nelson (800-331-7325), Specified Technologies, Inc. (800-
992-1180), or HILTI CP-617 (800-879-8000).
D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
conditions.
1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise
indicated.
2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
E. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed
to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.
F. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members,
and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1 002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior
locations.
G. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954;
steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.
H. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.
I. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit
application; to rigidly secure materials in place.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16- 6
J. Expanding Foam Sealant: Class 1 fire retardant polycell expanding foam by Macklanburg Duncan
(800-348-3571).
K. Cementitious sealant: Spray-applied (40 pct) Monokote Z-146.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.2 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated, if not indicated
on drawings, then space at 16 inches O. C.
C. Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard, in no case shall spacing of studs exceed 16 inches
O. C.
1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.
2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain
clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with
continuous bridging.
4. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Follow details on drawings, assure free movement of
top of stud connections for deflection.
D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less
than double studs at jambs.
E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete and masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board,
not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate
channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.
1. Orientation: Horizontal.
F. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600
requirements.
G. Blocking: Install mechanically fastened steel channel blocking for support of:
1. Framed openings.
2. Wall mounted cabinets.
3. Plumbing fixtures.
4. Toilet partitions.
5. Toilet accessories.
6. Wall mounted door hardware.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16- 7
H. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, toilet accessories,
and hardware. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs.
3.3 BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints,
especially in highly visible locations.
B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges
occurring over firm bearing.
C. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring
members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Use glass mat faced gypsum board
at exterior walls and at other locations as indicated. Place second layer perpendicular to framing
or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.
D. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of
assembly listing.
E. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board except face layer
of non-rated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination if
permitted under testing agency testing.
F. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior
gypsum soffit board with sealant.
3.4 PENETRATION (through Sound-Rated Construction).
A. Cut-outs are to be regular and not fracture core or tear covering of gypsum board and meet the
following requirements.
B. Minimize penetrations of insulated wall and ceiling constructions. Penetrate only where necessary
and fully seal airtight at the perimeter using acoustical sealant.
C. Where ducts and piping greater than 3-inches diameter penetrate insulated wall or ceiling
construction, provide a clearance of 1-inch to 1/4-inch at the perimeter of the penetration.
D. Where conduit piping 3-inches diameter and less (including mechanical, hydraulic, plumbing,
etc.) pass through insulated wall or ceiling construction, provide a clearance of 114-inch I 1/8-
inch between the conduit or piping and the structure, unless otherwise shown.
E. After the ductwork, conduit or piping has been installed, repair the gypsum board perimeter
clearance to the specified tolerance as required. Where the clearance exceeds 314-inch, provide a
sheet metal sleeve within the partition packed with safing insulation batts and caulk both sides
airtight with an acoustical sealant. Where the perimeter clearance exceeds 3/8-inch, use a flexible
backing rod to caulk against.
F. Where penetration clearances are 3/8-inch or less, caulk airtight with acoustical sealant at gypsum
board.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16- 8
G. All gypsum board penetrations (including those resulting from wiring, cables, and electrical
junction boxes) are to be sealed airtight with acoustical sealant.
H. The back and sides of junction boxes in sound-rated construction must be sealed airtight with
sheet caulking. Caulk perimeter face at gypsum board with acoustical sealant.
I. Recessed panel boards, equipment, boxes, etc. with penetration area greater than 25 sq. in. at
sound-rated partitions are to be fully enclosed and sealed with 5/8-inch thick gypsum board or 2
psf sheet lead.
J. Seal multiple conduit penetrations airtight with expanding fire foam sealant.
K. Seal other sound-rated conditions with spray-applied (40 pct) cementitious sealant equal to
Monokote Z 146.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.
B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.
3.6 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint
compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the
completed construction.
C. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840 and
as scheduled below.
1. Above Finished Ceilings Concealed From View: Level 1.
2. Utility Areas and Areas Behind Cabinetry: Level 2.
3. Walls and Ceilings to Receive Flat or Eggshell Paint Finish: Level 4.
4. Walls and Ceilings to Receive Semi-Gloss or Gloss Paint Finish: Level 5.
D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive
finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
E. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after
joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 21 16- 9
3.7 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet
in any direction.
3.8 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE AS INDICATED ON FINISH PLANS
A. Levels of finish are as defined by GA-214.
B. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view.
C. Level 2: Areas behind fixed cabinetry.
D. Level 3: Utility spaces including electrical rooms and mechanical rooms.
E. Level 4:
1. Individual offices
2. Public Areas
3. Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive flat or eggshell paint finish.
F. Level 5:
1. Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 22 00 - 1
SECTION 09 22 00
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel framing for:
a. Interior non-load-bearing walls and ceilings.
b. Interior furred walls.
2. Bridging, bracing, clips, accessories, fasteners and other materials.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel
2. Section 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing
3. Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Welding Society:
1. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
2. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon
Steel Wire.
3. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.
4. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.
5. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to
Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
6. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel
Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum
Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate details and requirements of other work that adjoins or fastens to metal
studs or furring and requires backing or special support framing included in this Section.
1. Coordinate installation of metal frames, anchors, blocking, electrical work, and mechanical
work which is to be placed by others in or behind partition framing. Allow such items to be
installed after framing is complete.
2. Items requiring backing or support include, but are not necessarily limited to, casework,
wall-mounted finish hardware, miscellaneous specialties, handrail brackets, and similar
items.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 22 00 - 2
3. Obtain Owner’s Representative approval of backing method proposed to satisfy
requirements that differ from methods indicated or shown.
B. Preinstallation conference:
1. Contractor shall arrange meeting to be attended by Owner’s Representative, Contractor and
Contractor’s installer, and agents of manufacturers, all of whom shall have had at least one
week’s advance notice.
2. Convene meeting minimum 7 days prior to commencing work of this Section.
3. Meeting shall be held at the job site.
4. Requirements of related work, preparation, storage and handling, materials, specification
requirements, coordination with related or adjoining work, work sequence, items requiring
backing and support, and issues that might affect proper metal support assemblies shall be
discussed.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: List of materials and manufacturer's product information showing compliance
with specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Location of framing assemblies in project.
2. Sizes and spacing of framing components.
3. Methods of fastening framing members to each other and to adjacent materials and
structure.
4. Details of vertical movement devices and connection to framing and structure.
5. Bearing and anchor points and anchor details.
6. Accessory products required for complete installation.
7. Prefabricated assemblies and special details.
8. Alternative elements or components and substitutions requested by.
D. Certificates: Submit mill certificates verifying that products furnished comply with specified
requirements, including:
1. Bare metal thickness, measured to 1/1000 inch.
2. Yield strength of steel.
3. Tensile strength of steel.
4. Total elongation of steel in 2 inch gage length.
5. Chemical analysis of steel.
6. Coating thickness, measured by mass or thickness.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Adequate number of skilled craftsmen thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are familiar with the specified requirements and
methods needed for proper performance of the work.
B. Code Requirements: Comply with pertinent codes and regulations of agencies having
jurisdiction.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 22 00 - 3
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store products in their original unopened packages protected from damage. Do
not store material directly on grade. Provide support so that material is not in direct contact
with ground.
B. Notify manufacturer of damaged materials received prior to installing.
C. Provide adequate storage area to protect materials from damage by other installers.
D. Provide adequate support to prevent bowing of framing members prior to installation.
E. Store framing members at slight angle to allow drainage of moisture.
F. Inspect material before installing to determine its suitability for the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. California Expanded Metal Products Co. (CEMCO),
2. Clark Western Building Systems,
3. Dietrich Industries, Inc.,
4. Or, approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Metal Studs - Manufactured from Prime Mill Certified Steel; re-rolled steel without mill
certificates is not acceptable.
1. Non-Load-Bearing Members: Comply with ASTM C645.
2. Provide galvanized framing members.
3. Galvanized Members: Manufactured from ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet.
a. Galvanizing Coating: G60.
4. Nominal 20 Gage Members: Color code white.
a. Design Thickness: 0.0346 inch.
b. Minimum Thickness (Delivered): 0.0329 inch.
c. Galvanized Members: SQ Grade 33.
5. Nominal 18 Gage Members: Color code yellow.
a. Design Thickness: 0.0451 inch.
b. Minimum Thickness (Delivered): 0.0428 inch.
c. Galvanized Members: SQ Grade 33.
6. Nominal 16 Gage Members: Color code green.
a. Design Thickness: 0.0566 inch.
b. Minimum Thickness (Delivered): 0.0538 inch.
c. Galvanized Members: SQ Grade 50.
7. Nominal 14 Gage Members: Color code orange.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 22 00 - 4
a. Design Thickness: 0.0713 inch.
b. Minimum Thickness (Delivered): 0.0677 inch.
c. Galvanized Members: SQ Grade 50.
8. Nominal 12 Gage Members: Color code red.
a. Design Thickness: 0.0966 inch.
b. Minimum Thickness (Delivered): 0.1017 inch.
c. Galvanized Members: SQ Grade 50.
B. Runner Track: Comply with gauges, configurations, sizes, and physical properties indicated on
Drawings. Material to meet requirements of A653/A653M and with G-60 galvanized coating.
C. Deflection Tracks / Compensation Channels / Slotted Tracks:
1. System 1 (Slip Track):
a. Description: Deep leg track, formed from 16 gauge steel with minimum 2-1/2 inch
flanges with 1-1/2 slots at 1 inch on center and meeting requirements of ASTM
A653/A653M, Grade 50 with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi and with G-60
galvanized coating.
b. Product: Sliptrack Systems, Inc.’s “Slp-Trk”; or equal.
2. System 2 (Fire Trak):
a. Description: 16 gauge steel minimum. Ceiling runner track designed to allow heads-
of-walls to compress or extend with movement of structure above while maintaining
fire rating of wall assembly. Comply with requirements of ASTM C645, of thickness
indicated for studs and of width to accommodate depth of studs indicated with flanges
offset to accommodate gypsum board thickness.
b. Product: Fire Trak Corp.’s “Fire Trak Shadowline and Cavity Shadowline”; or equal.
D. Channels:
1. Typical for Framing, Furring, and Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled steel coated with rust-
inhibitive material.
2. Main Carrying Channels at Gypsum Wallboard Suspended Ceiling Only: 1-1/2 inch hot-
rolled steel carrying channels coated with rust-inhibitive material or galvanized and
weighing 1.12 pounds per lineal foot.
3. Furring (Hat) Channels, Screw-on Type: 7/8 inch formed from 20 gauge galvanized steel
with either plain or perforated flanges to receive screws.
E. Adjustable Wall Furring Bracket: 20 gauge galvanized steel with serrated edges.
F. Partition Bridging: Cold-rolled channel or stud manufacturer’s standard bridging for partition
stud.
G. Backing Plates: 1/4 inch, 12 gauge, 16 gauge, 18 gauge, and 25 gauge unpunched steel studs,
flat steel plates, and bent plates, profiles as shown. Steel to meet requirements of ASTM
A653/A653M and with G-60 galvanized coating
H. Fasteners:
1. Sheet Metal Screws: Self-drilling and self-tapping, flat pan head screws, No. 8 unless
otherwise noted. ITW Buildex’s “Hi-Lo and S-12 Fasteners”; The Rawlplug Co., Inc.’s
“Rawl Self-Drilling Screws”; United States Gypsum Co.’s “USG Screws, Type S-12 Pan
Head”; or equal.
2. Concrete Screws:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 22 00 - 5
a. Description: Heat-treated screws with unique Hi-Lo thread design that cuts threads in
pre-drilled holes in concrete.
b. Product: ITW Buildex’s “Tapcon Anchors”; The Rawlplug Co., Inc.’s “Tapcon
Fasteners”; United States Gypsum Co.’s “HWH Tapcon Anchors”; or equal.
3. Powder Driven Fasteners: Meet requirements noted on drawings.
4. Pin and Clip Anchors for Vertical Hanger Wires at Gypsum Board Ceiling Only: Hilti
Inc.’s “No. CC27DN27P8T Suspended Ceiling Clip”; ITW Red Head’s “L651 Ceiling Clip
and L684, 1-1/2 Inch Drive Pin”; or equal.
5. Expansion Anchors: Meet requirements noted on drawings.
6. Expansion Eye Anchors: ITW Red Head’s “Dynabolt, Tie Wire TW-1614”; or equal.
7. Machine Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Low carbon steel standard fasteners, externally and
internally threaded, ASTM A307; malleable washers.
8. Screw Eye Bolt:
a. Description: Seamless eye, galvanized, 1/4 inch diameter by 3-3/4 inches overall
length.
b. Product: Gardiner Mfg. Co.’s “No. 511 Screw Eye Bolts with Shoulder”; or equal.
I. Hanger, Bracing, and Tie Wires: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1, soft temper. Minimum gauges:
Hangers, 8; Diagonal bracing wire, 12; Single-strand tie wire, 16; Double-strand tie wire, 18.
J. Welding Rods: Complying with AWS D1.3, and as indicated on the drawings.
1. Touch up welds on galvanized surfaces with zinc-rich paint.
2. Do not weld steel less than 0.0428 inch in thickness.
K. Grout: Good grade of commercial non-shrink cement grout; apply to bearing surfaces to
ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry
construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive metal support systems and verify that:
1. Supporting substrates and abutting framing are in compliance with requirements,
including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of framing
members.
2. Bearing surfaces and supporting structures are ready to receive the work.
3. Work by other trades is complete and accurate to the point where installation of the
framing can begin.
4. Field measurements are as indicated in the drawings. Notify in writing of any deviation
between the drawings and actual conditions prior to starting work.
5. Conditions are ready to receive work.
6. Rough-in utilities are in proper location.
7. Layout of hanger wires will not interfere with other work.
B. Immediately notify of any discrepancies in the work, on Drawings or in the specification that
will interfere with the work.
C. Correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 22 00 - 6
D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 ERECTION - GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents, the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations, and reviewed shop drawings.
B. Install framing to support the design loads and to accommodate movement of the primary
building structure and clearances of intended openings.
C. Framing may be shop or field fabricated; fabricate prefabricated assemblies square, with
framing members attached in manner to prevent racking and minimize distortion while lifting
and transporting.
D. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely
fastened, in accordance with the Contract Documents, reviewed shop drawings, and ASTM
C754.
E. Do not splice framing members, except track and studs in non-axial-load bearing walls.
F. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
1. Exception: plasma cutting shall be permitted.
2. Cut framing members square for attachment to perpendicular members.
G. Fasten framing members by welding or screws. Wire tying of framing members is not
permitted.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting weld work.
1. Do not weld steel less than 0.0428 inch in thickness.
2. Touch up welds on galvanized surfaces with zinc-rich paint.
I. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to the Contract Documents, reviewed shop
drawings, building code requirements, or manufacturer's recommendations, whichever is more
stringent.
1. Screws: Penetrate joined members by not less than three screw threads.
2. Bolted Connections: Drill holes maximum of 1/16 inch larger than specified bolt size;
torch cutting of holes is not permitted.
J. Anchors to Concrete: Installed after full compressive strength of concrete has been achieved.
K. Install insulation in spaces inside built-up exterior framing members that will be inaccessible
upon completion of framing work, including headers, sills, boxed joists, and double studs.
L. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized;
determination of all bracing requirements, location of bracing, design and installation, is
responsibility of Contractor.
M. Do not bridge building expansion joints and control joints with framing members; frame both
sides of joints independently.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 22 00 - 7
N. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web
stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, hold-down angles, stud girts, anchors and fasteners to
provide complete and proper framing system.
O. Installation Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb, Level, and True to Line: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.
2. Variation from Plan Location of Individual Framing Members: Plus/minus 1/8 inch, with
cumulative error not more than minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other
finish materials.
3.03 STUD WALLS - GENERAL
A. Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center.
B. Install continuous top and bottom track of size to accommodate studs.
C. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends and at spacing required by the
design, but not greater than the following:
1. Using Power Driven Fasteners: At 24 inches on center.
2. Using Cast-In-Place or Expansion Anchors: At 32 inches on center.
D. Splice abutting lengths of track or butt weld or securely attach each length to supporting
structure as indicated.
E. Install studs with open side facing in same direction, plumb, and aligned in accordance with
ASTM C754.
F. Wall Openings Larger Than Stud Spacing: Frame with headers and supporting studs as
indicated on Drawings.
1. Install headers so that they lie entirely within the width of the wall.
2. Install king studs, jack studs and cripple studs below window sills, above window and
door heads, and elsewhere as necessary to support openings, securely attached to adjacent
supporting members.
3. Design studs above openings to support all imposed loads.
4. Do not use wall track to support any loads unless specifically designed for that purpose.
G. Wall Openings Not More Than Stud Spacing in Width: Frame top and bottom with stud
headers.
3.04 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Install studs securely attached to flanges of top and bottom tracks at corners, openings and
partition intersections.
B. Structural Movement Isolation: Isolate wall framing from building structure to prevent
transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support, using one of the following methods
attached to continuous angles or supplementary framing anchored to the building structure:
1. System 1 (Slip Track).
2. System 2 (Fire Trak).
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 22 00 - 8
3.05 SUSPENDED CEILING
A. Secure suspended ceiling to structural framing using hangers, 1-1/2 inch hot rolled carrying
channels, and furring channels.
B. Interference:
1. Where wide air conditioning ducts or similar obstructions above gypsum board ceiling
interfere with suspension hanger wires, provide independent framing below obstruction to
support the ceiling as an obligation under this section.
2. Support framing from floor structure above. Do not attach framing to ductwork.
C. Do not use Drop-In type expansion anchors for installing suspended ceiling.
D. Hanger Wires:
1. Space hanger wires maximum 4 feet on center along carrying channels spaced maximum 4
feet on center.
2. Plumb hanger wires. Add counterbrace wires when hanger wires are more than 1 in 6 out
of plumb.
3. Fasten hanger wires with not less than three tight turns within a distance of 1-1/2 inches for
vertical wires and four tight turns within a distance of 1-1/2 inches for diagonal wires.
Install hanger or diagonal wire anchors to the structure in such a manner that the direction
of the wire aligns as closely as possible with the direction of the forces acting on the wire.
4. Provide hanger wires to clear furred-area interferences with suspension system. Do not
penetrate ductwork with hanger wires.
5. Separate all ceiling hanging and diagonal wires at least 6 inches from all unbraced ducts,
pipes, conduit, and similar items. It is acceptable to attach lightweight items, such as single
electrical conduit not exceeding 3/4 inch nominal diameter, to hanger wires using
connectors acceptable to [University’s Representative][University’s Representative and the
Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development].
6. At control and expansion joints, provide extra hangers as required to support discontinuous
runners.
7. Splices will not be permitted in any hanger wires unless specially accepted by to
[University’s Representative t][University’s Representative and the Office of Statewide
Health Planning and Development].
E. Carrying Channels:
1. For Gypsum Board Application: Space carrying channels at maximum 4 feet on center and
not more than 6 inches from perimeter walls.
2. For Metal Lath and Plaster Application: Space carrying channels at maximum 3 feet on
center and not more than 6 inches from perimeter walls.
3. Where carrying channels are spliced, lap splices minimum 12 inches with flanges of
channels interlocked and securely tied near each end of splice with wire looped twice
around channel.
F. Gypsum Board Furring Channels:
1. Place perpendicular to carrying at 16 inches on center, not more than 2 inches from
perimeter walls.
2. Lap splices minimum 8 inches.
G. Provide additional metal framing to clear interfering elements in furred area.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 09 22 00 - 9
H. Completely frame openings with channels. Reinforce openings in suspension systems that
interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels with lateral channel bracing. Extend
bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of opening.
I. Entire suspension system, including all intersections, splices, and perimeter joints, shall be
capable of meeting seismic requirements of applicable code requirements.
3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed Work under provisions of Section 01 76 00 - Protecting Installed Work.
B. Protect installed products until completion of project.
C. Replace all damaged products.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 24 00 - 1
SECTION 09 24 00
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior three-coat Portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath system.
2. Integral colored finish coat and field painted finish.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation" for thermal insulations included in Portland
cement plaster assemblies.
2. Section 07 27 00 “Air Barriers” for flashing windows, door, and other openings.
3. Section 07 92 05 "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed with exterior Portland cement
plaster (stucco).
4. Section 09 91 00 “Painting” for field painting of plaster.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Showing details of construction for framing, reinforcement, and trims; including
locations where each type material, mix, coating thickness, material sizes and
thicknesses, and fastenings will be used.
2. Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.
3. Include details of penetration and termination, flashing details, joint locations and
configurations, fastening and anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and
connections to other work.
4. Show locations and extent of weather-barrier (building paper and flashing sheet). Include
details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strip, penetrations, inside and
outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.
a. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of weather barrier.
b. Include details of mockups.
C. Coordination Drawings:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 24 00 - 2
1. Comprehensive, completely integrated set of plans, sections, elevations, and details,
drawn to scale, of separate trades work, indicating interface support/connections, and
relationships between materials, and products, on which the following items are shown
and coordinated with each other, based on input from fabricators and installers of the
items involved:
a. Framing, including backing, blocking, strapping, and similar accessory/sub-
framing materials.
b. Sheathing, including building paper.
c. Portland cement plaster, including trim and self-adhering flashing sheet.
d. Other materials and products that occur in, on, adjacent to, or contiguous with
above work.
2. At a minimum, indicate the following
a. Locations/spacing of trim moldings.
b. Locations/dimensions of self-adhering flashing sheet (underlying trim moldings).
c. Locations/spacing of connections/fastenings of:
1) Sheathing
2) Trim moldings
d. Sequence of installation of:
1) Building paper.
2) Flexible flashing.
3) Trim moldings.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated with
texture and color.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated; 12 by 12
inches, and prepared on rigid backing with color selected.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:
1. 2013 Building Standards Administrative Code, Part 1, CBSC.
2. 2013 California Building Code (CBC), Part 2, CBSC (2012 IBC & California
Amendments).
3. 2013 California Electrical Code (CEC), Part 3, CBSC (2011 National Electrical Code &
California Amendments).
4. 2013 California Mechanical Code (CMC), Part 4, CBSC (2012 Uniform Mechanical
Code & California Amendments).
5. 2013 California Plumbing Code (CPC), Part 5, CBSC (2012 Uniform Plumbing Code &
California Amendments).
6. 2013 California Energy Code, Part 6, CBSC.
7. 2013 California Historical Building Code, Part 8, CBSC.
8. 2013 California Fire Code, Part 9, CBSC (2012 International Fire Code & California
Amendments).
9. 2013California referenced Standards, Part 12 CBSC.
10. Title 8 C.C.R. Chapter 4, Sub-Ch. 6 – Elevator Safety Orders.
11. Title 19 C.C.R., Public Safety, SFM Regulations.
12. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Title II or Title III.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 24 00 - 3
B. Comply with requirements of 2013 CBC Chapter 25.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For Portland cement plaster assemblies with fire-resistance
ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to DSA.
D. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Comprehensive, completely integrated mockups of separate trades work, indicating
interface connections, transitions, relationships between materials and finishes, and
quality of workmanship. Coordinated mockups shall include, but is not limited to, the
following:
a. Work of this Section.
b. Framing, including backing, blocking, strapping, and similar accessory/sub-
framing materials.
c. Sheathing, including building paper.
d. Sealants.
e. Penetrations of Portland cement plaster assemblies.
f. Other materials and finishes that are within indicated area of coordinated mockups,
including barrier/backing/support for above work.
2. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
4. Use of self-furring lath is subject to satisfactory jobsite demonstration for each project of
lath installation, with approval by Inspector of Record.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.
B. Exterior Plasterwork:
1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use
procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings,
and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind.
2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F.
3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has
occurred.
C. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for
environmental conditions for applying finishes.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 24 00 - 4
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of cement plaster system that fail in materials within specified warranty
period. Failure includes, but is not limited to, blistering, peeling, flaking, delaminating, rusting,
checking, crazing, fading beyond manufacturer's published limits, or chipping as a result of
manufacturing defects.
1. Warranty Period: 3 years.
B. Special Waterproof Warranty: Submit cement plaster system manufacturer's warranty
certifying that work of this Section has been properly applied in strict accordance with system
manufacturer's recommended procedures, instructions, and systems current applicable
specifications; has been properly integrated into building construction in accordance with sound
design and building construction practices; and will remain resistant to water penetration for
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 3 years.
C. Weather Resistive Barriers: 10 years.
D. Installer’s Warranty: 2 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Finish-Coat Plaster: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following manufacturers.
1. ColorTek by Omega. (Basis of Design)
2. LaHabra Stucco.
3. Merlex.
4. Sto.
5. Or equal.
B. Metal Lath: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
manufacturers.
1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO).
2. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO).
3. Dale/Incor.
4. Unimast, Inc.
5. Clark Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.
6. Or equal.
C. Weather-Resistant Barrier: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following manufacturers.
1. Jumbo Tex 60 by Fortifiber. (Basis of Design)
2. GM Craft 60 by GMC Roofing.
3. Or equal.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 24 00 - 5
D. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Accessories: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
1. Superior Metal Trim. (Basis of Design)
2. Fry Reglet Corp.
3. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO).
4. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO).
5. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
6. Or equal.
E. Aluminum Trim and Reveals: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the
named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
1. Fry Reglet Corp. (Basis of Design)
2. Gordon, Inc.
3. Pittcon Industries.
4. Or equal.
2.2 METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring.
a. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd.
b. Use: Vertical and horizontal solid support surfaces, such as unit masonry, concrete,
or sheathing. Horizontal open framing up to 16 inches on center.
2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Non-self-furring.
a. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd.
b. Use: Attached with fastener when enforcing authority prohibit use of self-furring
types.
3. 3/8-Inch Rib Lath (High Rib):
a. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd.
b. Use: Horizontal open framing 24 inches on center.
2.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIER
A. FS UU-B-790, Type I Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper with following:
1. Asphalt saturated paper weighing 56 lbs. per 1,000 square feet, having tensile strength of
89 lbs. and 60-minute water resistance rating.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Accessories: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet,
ASTM A 653 G90 zinc coating.
1. Foundation Weep Screed.
2. Cornerite: Fabricated.
3. External-Corner Reinforcement.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 24 00 - 6
4. Cornerbeads.
a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.
b. Small nose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners.
c. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening
rib; use on columns and for finishing masonry corners.
d. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use at
exterior columns.
5. Casing Beads: Square-edged style; with expanded flanges.
6. Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped
configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of
control joint.
7. Expansion Joints: Folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with
expanded flanges.
a. Internal Corners: Double-V, narrow reveal type ("No. 30").
8. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that
is adjustable from 1/4-to-5/8-inch wide; with perforated flanges.
9. Stucco Reglet:
a. Product: “ST” Stucco Reglet by Fry Reglet.
b. Thickness: 24 gage.
10. Surface Mounted Reglet:
a. Product: “SM” Surface Mount Reglet by Fry Reglet.
b. Thickness: 24 gage.
11. Flashing System:
a. Product: Springlok Flashing System by Fry Reglet.
b. Thickness: 24 gage.
12. Continuous Soffit Vents: Perforated screeds, with expanded flanges.
a. Product: Model SRS Superior Reveal Screed by Superior Metal Trim.
b. Vent Width: As indicated on Drawings.
13. Termination Screed: J Mold.
a. Product: SJB Superior “J” Bead by Superior Metal Trim.
14. Window /Door Drip: Door Drip Screed.
a. Product: SWD Superior Window Drip by Superior Metal Trim.
15. Drip Screed: Stucco Drip Soffit.
a. Product: SSC Superior Soffit Corner by Superior Metal Trim.
C. Aluminum Trim and Reveals:
1. Aluminum shall be extruded alloy 6063 T5, with clear anodized finish.
2. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of
damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
C. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063 and CBC
Section 2506.
1. Nails, screws, and staples as specified in CBC.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 24 00 - 7
2. Fastener for use with concrete/masonry for attaching lath and screeds/control joints,
weeps and other shapes.
3. Masonry Applications: Galvanized steel fasteners of furring type and length suitable for
at least 1/2 inch penetration of the brick or block substrate.
4. Wood Stud Applications: Galvanized steel furring nails and or screws, of type and length
suitable for at least a 5/8 inch penetration of the wood stud system.
D. Sheathing: Comply with requirements of Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”.
E. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section “Air Barrier”
for flashing windows, door, and other openings.
F. Thermal Insulation: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section “Building Insulation”.
G. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Comply with requirements of Division 7
Section “Joint Sealants”.
2.6 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Scratch and Brown Coat:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
2. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.
3. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.
B. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents,
and proprietary ingredients.
1. Finish Texture:
a. Exterior: Sand 30/30 finish
2. Colorant: Match color of field finish coating specified in Division 9 Section “Painting”.
2.7 PLASTER MIXES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
B. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters, comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 24 00 - 8
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects
caused by plastering.
B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to
bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design
designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
B. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section “Building Insulation”.
C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless
blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.
D. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting
construction with acoustical sealant.
3.4 INSTALLING METAL LATH AND WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with requirements of Title 24.
1. Use of self-furring lath is subject to satisfactory jobsite demonstration for each project of
lath installation, with approval by Inspector of Record.
B. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.
1. Lath shall be attached to framing members at spacing of not more than 6 inches o.c., 2
inches maximum from longitudinal edges, in accordance with CBC.
C. Weather-Resistant Barrier: Install 2 layers over sheathing.
3.5 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B. Reinforcement for External Corners:
1. Install lath-type external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.
C. Weep screed: Install at foundation plate line on all exterior stud walls per CBC.
1. Minimum 4 inches above earth.
2. Minimum 2 inches above paved areas.
D. Control Joints: Install control joints in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect
as follows:
1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 24 00 - 9
b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft.
2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c.
3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not
greater than 2-1/2:1.
4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.
5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas
(panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension
change.
3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished
plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface.
2. Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with
base-coat plaster material, before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is
indicated or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor.
3. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that
act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate
plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove
finish coat at junctures with metal.
4. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.
B. Three-Coat System: Total minimum thickness of 7/8 inch for lathing base.
C. Curing Time: Comply with CBC, or longer as needed to insure compliance with manufacturer’s
recommendations for quality stucco installation.
1. Portland cement plaster:
a. Minimum period moist curing:
1) First Coat: 48 hours.
2) Second Coat: 48 hours.
b. Minimum interval between coats:
1) First Coat: 48 hours.
2) Second Coat: 7 days.
D. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry plaster bases.
E. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide finish to match texture, finish, and color of Architect
approved sample.
3.7 ASSEMBLY
A. Exterior Side from framing out:
1. Sheathing.
2. Weather-Resistive Barrier.
3. Metal Lath.
4. 3-coat portland cement plaster.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09 24 00 - 10
3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore
cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing
and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to
substrate has failed.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from
doorframes, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and
other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TILING 09 30 00 - 1
SECTION 09 30 00
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tile for floor applications.
B. Tile for wall applications.
C. Trim and Accessories
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section to review installation systems and tile layout. Require attendance by all affected
installers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include
instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions
with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and
setting details.
D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size
illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
E. Samples: Provide one full size sample of marble threshold. This will be returned upon acceptance
of sample.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products are compatible with each other and that they
meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal
methods, and polishes and waxes.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TILING 09 30 00 - 2
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for City of Glendale's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Tile: 2 percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination, but not less than
1 full carton of each type.
I. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information
1. FSC Wood Content
2. Low Emitting Materials
a. For adhesives, sealants, and grouts, documentation including printed statement of
VOC content.
3. Local/Regional Materials
4. Recycled Materials
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118
Series on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products
specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 3
years of documented experience.
D. Tile Flooring Surfaces shall be slip resistant per 2016 CBSC 11B-302.
1.6 MOCK-UP
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B. Construct tile mock-Up where indicated on the drawings, incorporating all components specified
for the location.
1. Mock-Up shall include two walls and an interior corner, size to be 60 square feet of wall
and 10 square feet of floor, in one corner.
2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.
B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar
materials.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TILING 09 30 00 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE
A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.
B. Porcelain Floor Tile: 24”x24”, color per finish schedule or selected by architect.
C. Porcelain Wall Tile: 12”x24” with 6”x24” accent tile, color per finish schedule or selected by
architect.
1. Trim Units: Matching bullnose and 6”x12” cove base tile coordinated with field tile.
2.2 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Thresholds: Marble, Carrara (color to be selected), honed finish; profile indicated on Drawings
by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch thick; beveled at 1:2 along two long edges with
radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams.
1. Applications: Provide at the following locations:
a. At doorways where tile terminates.
b. At open edges of floor tile where adjacent finish is a different height.
2.3 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Provide setting materials made by the same manufacturer as grout.
B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset mastic type. 1. Applications: Wall installation.
C. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.1.
D. Adhesives: Meet LEED Credit EO 4.1.
E. Adhesive Material: Thinset Mortar-exceeds ANSI A 118.4 or as recommended by tile
manufacturer.
F. Organic Adhesive at TCNA W245: ANSI A118.1, thinset bond type.
2.4 SETTING MATERIALS AND GROUT
A. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1.
B. Sand: ASTM C 144.
C. Water: Potable, fresh.
D. Setting bed reinforcing mesh: 2-inch by 2-inch by 16/16, 3-inch by 3-inch by 13/13 or 1-1/2-inch
by 2-inch by 16/13 wire complying with ASTM A 82 or A 185.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TILING 09 30 00 - 4
E. Latex modified dry-set mortar: The following or equal with physical properties equaling or
exceeding those of the products specified.
1. Thin set:
a. MerKrete "705" and "735," Mapei "Ultraflex 1 and 3," or MerKrete "750 RS" or
"Granirapid" as selected by the installer for the conditions of use
b. MerKrete "Integra" or Mapei "Adesilex" for glass tile.
c. MerKrete "200/211" or Mapei "Kerabond/Keralastic" for water features.
2. Medium bed: MerKrete "720 Marble Pro" or Mapei "Franurapid."
3. Mapei makes Adesilex P10 white mortar specifically for glass tile, glass mosaic and marble
mosaic.
F. Portland cement grout: MerKrete "Versatile" or Mapei "Opticolor," or equal with physical
properties equaling or exceeding those of the products specified, sanded or unsanded as applicable
to the joint width and recommended by the grout manufacturer.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Backer Board: See Section 09 21 16.
B. Prefabricated shower pan: "Tile Redi" prefabricated pan of the dimensions indicated to be tiled.
C. Sealant and backup for control joints in tiles: Refer to Section 07 92 00.
D. Cleavage membrane: 10-mil thick polyethylene complying with ASTM D 2103, Type 13300.
E. Waterproof membrane: One of the following:
1. "Hydro-Guard SP-1" by MerKrete.
2. "AquaDefense" by MapeL
3. Or equal with physical properties equaling or exceeding those of the membranes specified
above.
F. Reinforcing fabric: Mapei "Reinforcing Fabric."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive tile.
B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended
by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TILING 09 30 00 - 5
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness
tolerances.
D. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through
A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook
recommendations.
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases
neatly. Align base and wall joints.
D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout
joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.
E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
F. Install thresholds where indicated.
G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
H. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
I. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
J. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
3.4 INSTALLATION – FLOORS – MORTAR BET METHODS
A. Over first floor interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North
America Handbook Method F 111 with crack isolation membrane, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Over second floor interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of
North America Handbook Method F121 with waterproof membrane.
C. Crack Isolation Membrane: Lap edges and ends.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TILING 09 30 00 - 6
D. Waterproofing Membrane: Install as specified in ANSI A108.13.
E. Mortar Bed Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
3.5 INSTALLATION – WALL TILE
A. Over metal studs with a mortar bed, in accordance with The Tile Council of North America
Handbook Method W231, mortar bed with ceramic tile.
1. Provide sheet waterproof membrane (ANSI A118.10).
2. Overlap the wall membrane over the floor membrane to create a watertight assembly.
B. Mortar Bed Thickness: As indicated on drawings but not over 1-1/2 inches thick.
3.6 SEAL GROUT
A. Seal grout no sooner than 30 days after installation.
B. Install per manufacturer's recommendation except seal grout no sooner than 30 days after
installation.
C. Seal floor tiles if recommended by tile manufacturer.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
RESILIENT FLOORING BASE 09 65 13 - 1
SECTION 09 65 13
RESILIENT FLOORING BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient base.
B. Installation accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan.
D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 12 inch in lenght illustrating color for resilient base
product specified.
E. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710.
F. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring
manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-strate is acceptable.
G. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and
suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for the City of Glendale's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Wall Base: 50 linear feet of each type and color.
I. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information
1. Low Emitting Materials
2. Local/Regional Materials
3. Recycled Materials
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
RESILIENT FLOORING BASE 09 65 13 - 2
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient base as recommended by manufacturer.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.
B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a
temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions
above 55 degrees F.
C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient base installation.
D. Install resilient base after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Resilient Flooring demonstrating a coefficient of friction of at least 0.6 per ASTM C1028 shall
be accepted as meeting the intent of slip resistance. CBC Section 1124B.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and
as follows:
1. Height: 4 inch.
2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.
3. Finish: Satin.
4. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Basis of Design: Roppe; Product as indicated on Color Schedule on drawings.
b. Acceptable Manufacturers that comply with these requirements:
1) Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com.
2) Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com.
3) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than
required by the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168.
B. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
RESILIENT FLOORING BASE 09 65 13 - 3
C. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
B. Verify that required wall-mounted utilities are in correct location
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CARPET TILE 09 68 13 - 1
SECTION 09 68 13
CARPET TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes modular, carpet tile.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. 09 65 13 "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories
installed with carpet tile.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical
characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each
type of substrate.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
2. Existing flooring materials to be removed.
3. Existing flooring materials to remain.
4. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
5. Type of subfloor.
6. Type of installation.
7. Pattern of installation.
8. Pattern type, location, and direction.
9. Pile direction.
10. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
11. Transition details to other flooring materials.
C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each
Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated
on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.
D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CARPET TILE 09 68 13 - 2
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
G. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification
indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Provide glue down or firm cushion installation that complies with CBC section 1124B.3
D. Carpet shall have a level loop, textured loop, level-cut or level-cut/uncut pile texture and
maximum pile height of ½” per CBC section 1124B.3
E. Carpet edges shall comply with CBC section 1124B.2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and
Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles,
install carpet tiles before installing these items.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CARPET TILE 09 68 13 - 3
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Carpet Tile: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an
equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
1. Shaw Contract (basis of design)
2. Mohawk
3. Lees
4. Bentley Prince Street
5. Interface
6. Or equal.
2.2 CARPET TILE
A. Product: Shaw Contract Group.
1. Style Name: Per finish schedule or selected by architect
2. Color: Per finish schedule or selected by architect
3. Product Type: Tile
4. Construction: Multi Level Pattern loop
5. Fiber: Eco Solution Q Nylon
6. Protective treatments – SSP Shaw soil protection
7. Primary Backing: Synthetic
8. Secondry Backing: Ecoworx Tile
9. Gauge: 1/12.
10. Density: 6712.
11. Total Thickness: 0.252
12. Stitches per Inch: 11.0.
13. Finished Pile Thickness: .0.118
14. Dye Method: 92% Solution Dyed/8% yarn Died
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CARPET TILE 09 68 13 - 4
15. Pattern Repeat: Not Applicable
16. Tufted Weight: 22.0 oz. per. Sq. yd.
17. Size/Width: 24”x24”
18. Installation Method: Glued Down
19. Indoor Air Quality: Green Label Plus 1098.
20. Foot Traffic Recommendation TARR: Severe
21. NSF 140: Gold.
22. Static:less than 3.5 kv
23. Flammability: Passes DOC-FF-1-70 Pill Test
24. Flooring Radiant Panel Test: Meets NFPA Class 1 when tested under ASTM E-648 glue
down
25. Smoke Density: NBS Smoke Chamber NFPA-258 - Less than 450 Flaming
ModeWarranties:
a. Lifetime Limited Modular Warranty.
b. Lifetime Stain Warranty.
c. Lifetime Static.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining type to suit products and subfloor
conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and as
recommended/ required by the manufacturer for warrantee acceptance or provided by carpet tile
manufacturer for the type of carpet being installed.
1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content
when tested according to ASTM D 5116:
a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h.
b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
c. 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and
potential defects.
B. Concrete Substrates:
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CARPET TILE 09 68 13 - 5
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with
carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to
receive carpet tile installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more
stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
C. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
D. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor
Installations."
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
CARPET TILE 09 68 13 - 6
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 1
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
1. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.
2. Materials for backpriming woodwork.
3. Scope: Finish all interior surfaces and exterior surfaces, where modifications occur,
including the following:
a. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment
before installing equipment.
b. Surfaces inside cabinets.
c. Mechanical and Electrical:
1) In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes,
insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports,
mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
2) In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.
3) On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to
view, including that which is factory-finished.
4) Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating
cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black
paint to visible surfaces.
5) Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard
cabinets to match face panels.
B. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Non-metallic roofing and flashing.
6. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items.
7. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones.
8. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
9. Ceramic and other tiles.
10. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone.
11. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS).
12. Glass.
13. Concrete masonry in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces.
14. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated.
15. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 2
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
B. Dry film thickness (DFT): Thickness of a coat of paint in fully cured state measured in mils
(1/1000-inch).
C. Paint The term, as used in this Section, means all coating system components, including primers,
emulsions, enamels, varnishes, stains, lacquers, sealers, fillers, and other applied materials
whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coat.
D. Sheen: The terms used in these Specifications refer to the following gloss ranges when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 523 test method.
Name
Flat
Low Sheen
Eggshell
Semi-gloss
Gloss
ASTM D 523 Test Method
60-degree meter
60-degree meter
60-degree meter
60-degree meter
60-degree meter
Gloss Range
0 to 7
10 to 15
25 to 30
55 to 60
Gloss Range
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
C. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and
system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on tempered hardboard, 9 x 12 inch in size.
D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color; store where directed.
3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 3
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,
with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with
minimum 5 years experience.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to SCAQMD standards for VOC requirements for products and finishes.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges
required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the
humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F
for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
G. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information by filling out the Special
Environmental Requirements Product Submittal Form located in Appendix A of Section 01 35
43 Special Environmental Requirements.
1. Low Emitting Materials
2. Local/Regional Materials
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 4
H. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer;
no exceptions.
B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.
All submitted paint products shall be first line, top quality, architectural grade products. Paint
products described as commercial or professional grade will not be considered.
C. Paints:
1. Base Manufacturer: Dunn Edwards Paint Company, www.dunnedwards.com.
2. Vista Paint Company; www.vistapaint.com.
3. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com.
4. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.
D. Transparent Finishes:
1. Base Manufacturer: Deft &McCloskey distributed by Vista Paint.
E. Stains:
1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 PAINTING AND COATING - GENERAL
A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half
shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.
4. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure
is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer
categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the
following:
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 5
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards
for Architectural Coatings.
b. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Model Rule, Architectural, Industrial, and
Maintenance Coatings; www.otcair.org; specifically:
1) Opaque, Flat: 50 gIL, maximum.
2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 gIL, maximum.
3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 gIL, maximum.
4) Varnishes: 350 gIL, maximum.
a) Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is
located.
b) USGBC LEED Rating System, edition as stated in Section 01 3543;
for interior wall and ceiling finish (all coats), anti-corrosive paints on
interior ferrous metal, clear wood stains and finishes, sanding sealers,
other sealers, shellac, and floor coatings.
5) Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a
tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds
(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-
ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene,
diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium,
isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene
chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methyl benzene), 1,1, 1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
E. Colors: As denoted in finish schedule
1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without
additional cost to Owner.
2. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect.
3. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the
wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.
4. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors
according to the color-coding scheme indicated.
2.3 PAINTING SYSTEMS – EXTERIOR
A. Paint WE-OP-3L - Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer sealer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8500 Carefree 100% Acrylic Gloss.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.
4. Satin: One coat of varnish; McCloskey's 6509 Spar Varnish.
B. Paint GE-OP-3L - Gypsum Board and Plaster, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer sealer.
2. Flat: Two coats of latex; 2000 Duratone 100% Acrylic Flat.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 6
C. Paint ME-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex rust-inhibitive primer.2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8500 Carefree
100% Acrylic Gloss 3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel: 8400 Carefree 100%
Acrylic Semi-Gloss
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8500 Carefree 100% Acrylic Gloss.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel: 8400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.
D. Paint ME-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel: 8500 Carefree 100% Acrylic Gloss.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.
E. Paint E-Pav - Pavement Marking Paint:
1. Yellow: One coat, with reflective particles; 6900 On-Line Traffic Paint
2. White: One coat, with reflective particles; 7200 Optiline White.
2.4 PAINTING SYSTEMS – INTERIOR
A. Paint CI-OP-3L - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of 100% acrylic block filler.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8400/6400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.
3. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; 8100/6100 Carefree Flat.
B. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with latex corosion resistant primer.
2. Gloss: One coat of latex enamel; 8500 Carefree 100% Acrylic Gloss.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coat of latex enamel: 8400/6400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.
C. Paint Mal-OP-3L - Aluminum, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat etching primer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8500 Carefree 100% Acrylic Gloss.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel: 8400/6400 Carefree 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.
D. Paint GI-OP-3LA - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex-Acrylic, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of acrylic primer sealer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; 8500 Carefree 100% Acrylic Gloss.
3. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel: 8400/6400 Carefree 100%.
4. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel; 1700 Acriglo Velva-Sheen.
5. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; 8100/6100 Carefree Flat.
E. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically
indicated or not; commercial quality.
F. Patching Material: Latex filler.
G. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper application.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.
3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.
5. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.
6. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali
powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate;
rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a
solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
H. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
defects after repair.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 8
I. Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex
patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali
surfaces.
J. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit
adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer.
K. Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.
L. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces to be Painted: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse
floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.
M. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure
water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately
following cleaning.
N. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
O. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2 (hand tool
cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning).
P. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld
splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing
or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution,
ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime
after repairs.
Q. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and
rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime
bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
R. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
S. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound
after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
T. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks
after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAINTING AND COATING 09 90 00 - 9
C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.
E. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
F. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
G. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many
coats as necessary for complete hide.
H. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
I. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
J. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 1
SECTION 10 14 24
SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior and Exterior signage of the following types:
1. ADA compliant interior signage, without borders.
2. Fire evacuation, area of rescue assistance and specialty signs.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. California Building Code, current edition.
B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities.
C. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG); U.S. Architectural Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature.
C. Shop Drawings: List sign styles, lettering, locations and dimensions of each interior and exterior
signs.
D. Selection Samples: One complete set of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of
available colors.
E. Verification Samples: Two full size samples, representing type, style and color specified
including method of attachment.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of California Building Code.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspect products upon receipt. Store products in manufacturer's packaging until ready for
installation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Raised (Tactile) character depth, case, and style: Raised character on sign shall be raised 1/32
inch minimum, uppercase, sans serif style, and shall be duplicated in Braille. (11B-703.2)
B. Braille: Braille shall be contacted (Grade 2). Braille dots shall have a domed or rounded shape
and shall comply with Table 11B-703.31 below. Braille shall be positioned below the
corresponding text in a horizontal format, flush left or center. With multi-lined text, Braille shall
be placed below the entire text. Braille shall be separated 3/8 inch minimum and ½ inch maximum
from any other tactile characters, and 3/8 inch minimum from raised borders and decorative
elements. (11B-703.2)
TABLE 11B-703.3.1 BRAILLE DIMENSIONS
MEASUREMENT RANGE MINIMUM TO MAXIMUM
Dot base diameter 0.059 to 0.063 inch
Distance between two dots in the same cell 1 0.100 inch
Distance between corresponding dots in adjacent cells 1 0.300 inch
Dot height 0.025 to 0.037 inch
Distance between corresponding dots from one cell directly below 1 0.395 to 0.400 inch 1 Measure center to center.
C. Raised character stroke thickness: Stroke thickness of the uppercase letter “I” shall be 15 percent
maximum based on the height of the uppercase letter “I”. (11B-703.2)
D. Raised character height: Raised character height shall be 5/8 inch minimum and a maximum of 2
inches maximum based on the height of the uppercase letter “I”. (11B-703.2)
E. Raised character and line spacing: Character spacing shall be measured between the two closest
points of adjacent raised character within a message, excluding word spaces. Where characters
have rectangle cross sections, spacing between individual raised characters shall be 1/8 inch
minimum and 4 times the raised character stroke width maximum. Where characters have the
other cross sections, spacing between individual raised characters shall be 1/16 inch minimum
and 4 times the raised character stroke width maximum at the base of the cross sections, and 1/8
inch minimum and 4 times the raised character stroke width maximum at the top of the cross
sections. Characters shall be separated from raised borders and decorative elements 3/8 inch
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 3
minimum. Spacing between the baselines of separate lines of raised characters within a message
shall be 135 percent minimum and 170 percent maximum of the raised character height. (11B-
703.2)
F. Tactile sign installation height and location: Tactile characters on signs shall be located minimum
48 inches above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the baseline of the lowest
Braille cells and 60 inches maximum above the finish floor or ground surface, measured from the
baseline of the highest line of raised characters. Where a tactile sign is provided at a door, the
sign shall be located alongside the door at the latch side. Where at double doors with one active
leaf, the sign shall be located on the inactive leaf. Where at double doors with two active leaves,
the sign shall be located to the right of the right hand door. Where there is no wall space at the
latch side of the single door or at the right side of double doors, signs shall be located on the
nearest adjacent wall. Signs containing tactile characters shall be located so that a dear floor space
of 18 inches maximum by 18 inches minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided
beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 decree open position. (11B-
703.4)
G. Raised and visual character proportions: Characters shall be selected from fonts where the width
of the uppercase letter “O” is 60 percent minimum and 110 percent maximum of the height of the
uppercase “I”. (11B-703.2 and 11B-703.5)
H. Raised and visual character format: Text shall be in a horizontal format. (11B-703.2 and 11B-
703.5)
I. Visual character and line spacing: Visual character spacing on sign shall be measured between
the two closest points of adjacent characters, excluding word spaces. Spacing between individual
characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Spacing
between the baselines of separate lines of characters within a message shall be 135 percent
minimum and 170 percent maximum of the character height. (11B-703.5)
J. Visual character height and installation height: Minimum character height shall comply with
Table 11B-703.5.k below. Viewing distance shall be measured as the horizontal distance between
the character and an obstruction preventing further approach towards the sign. Character height
shall be based on the uppercase letter “I”. Visual characters shall be installed at 40 inches
minimum above the finish floor or ground except for the elevator car controls, floor-level exit
signs and emergency procedures information. (11B-703.5)
HEIGHT TO FINISH FLOOR OR GROUND
FROM BASELINE OF CHARACTER
HORIZONTAL
VIEWING DISTANCE MINIMUM CHARACTER HEIGHT
40 inches to less than
or equal to 70 inches
less than 72 inches 5/8 inch
72 inches and greater 5/8 inch, plus 1/8 inch per foot
of viewing distance above 72 inches
greater than 70 inches to less than
or equal to 120 inches
less than 180 inches 2 inches
180 inches and greater 2 inches, plus 1/8 inch per foot
of viewing distance above 180 inches
greater than 120 inches
less than 21 feet 3 inches
21 feet and greater 3 inches, plus 1/8 inch per foot
of viewing distance above 21 feet
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 4
K. Visual character case and style: Visual characters on sign shall be uppercase or lowercase or a
combination of both and conventional in form. Characters shall not be italic, oblique, script,
highly decorative, or of other unusual forms. (11B-703.5)
L. Visual character stroke thickness: Stroke thickness of the uppercase letter “I” shall be 10 percent
maximum of the height of the character. (11B-703.5)
M. Visual character pictogram finish and contrast: Visual characters and their background, and
pictograms and their fields sign shall have a non-glare finish. Characters shall contrast with their
background; and pictograms shall contrast with their field. (11B-703.5 and 11B-703.5)
N. Pictogram field and text descriptors: Pictograms shall have a field height of 6 inches minimum;
characters and Braille shall not be located in the pictogram field. Text descriptions shall be located
directly below the pictogram field; and shall comply with the requirements for raised characters
and Braille. (11B-703.6)
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Interior Flat Signs:
1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com.
2. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com.
3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.3 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR SIGNS
A. See drawings for additional requirements, if any.
B. ADA-Compliant Interior and Exterior Signage, Borderless:
1. See drawings for overall requirements for size, style, layout, and braille requirements.
2. Sign Thickness: 1/4 inch thick or 1/2 inch thick as indicated on drawings.
3. Construction: One-piece and two-piece with inserts; added-on or engraved characters not
acceptable.
4. Lettering Style: Avenir by Adobe.
5. Braille: California contracted Grade 2 Braille, placed directly below last line of letters or
numbers.
6. Performance: Non-static, fire-retardant, and self-extinguishing.
7. Contrast: Letters numbers and symbols shall contrast with background.
8. Corners: Square and round as drawn.
9. Color of Plastic: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
10. Finish of Plastic: Matte.
11. Color of Background: As selected from manufacturer's standard paint colors.
12. Letter and Number Sizes: See drawings.
13. Sign Margins: Letters and numbers, 1/2 inch left margin and 3/8 inch top margin.
14. Sign Sizes: See drawings.
C. Fire Evacuation, Area of Rescue Assistance and Specialty Signs:
1. Style: Fire Evacuation and Area of Rescue Assistance Signs by Best Sign Systems.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 5
2. Emergency Exit Only Signs: 18-1/2 by 6-1/2 inches 'MP' plastic with copy raised with
background and symbol painted 2 standard paint colors.
3. Lettering Style: Typeface as selected, upper case.
4. Letter and Number Size: As selected.
5. Lettering Location: Centered on sign..
6. Symbol Height: As selected.
7. Braille: Grade 2 Braille, placed directly below last line of letters or numbers.
8. Corners: Square.
D. Nonilluminated Message-Strip Directories: Extruded-aluminum profiled frame at top and bottom,
with sheet metal rear cover, housing changeable message strips in configuration indicated.
1. Frame:
a. Top and Bottom Profile: Square.
b. Side Trim: Aluminum angle.
c. Depth: Manufacturer's standard 1-1/2- to 2-1/2-inch (38- to 64-mm) frame depth.
d. Profile Face Dimension: 6 inches (152 mm) high.
e. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic.
f. Cover: Removable, clear acrylic sheet held in place by perimeter frame. Provide
suction cup tool for cover removal.
g. Number of Columns: As indicated on Drawings.
h. Mounting: Surface.
i. Header: Copy applied to top section of profiled frame.
j. Divider Color: As indicated on Drawings.
2.4 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Signs
1. Prespaced characters die cut from 3- to 3.5-mil (0.076- to 0.089-mm) thick, weather-
resistant vinyl film with release liner on the back and carrier film on the front for on-site
alignment and application.
2. Substrate: Glass
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installation areas to ensure that conditions are suitable for installation.
B. Examine signage for defects prior to installation. Do not install damaged signage.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify mounting heights and locations for interior signage will comply with referenced standards.
B. Clean mounting locations of dirt, dust, grease or similar conditions that would prevent proper
installation.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 6
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install signs level, plumb, without distortion, and in proper relationship with adjacent surfaces
using manufacturer's recommended standard mounting system.
1. Mounting: Mount with vinyl foam tape where possible.
a. Where exposed fasteners are required, use stainless steel or painted to match sign.
B. Remove adhesive from exposed sign surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Clean signs after installation as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 1
SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Accessories for toilet rooms and utility/janitor rooms.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the work with the placement of all required internal wall reinforcement, concealed
ceiling supports, and reinforcement of all toilet accessories and toilet partitions to receive anchor
attachments.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment
methods for the following items: (See Drawings for all other items not listed below)
1. Grab Bars
2. Mirrors
3. Soap Dispensers
4. Paper Towel Dispenser
5. Toilet Paper Dispenser
6. Warm Air Dryers
7. Mop Holders
C. Samples: Submit one sample of each accessory, illustrating color and finish. These will be
returned after installation.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring
special attention.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products listed are made by Elkay, Georgia Pacific, Bobrick or Dyson.
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 2
2. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.
3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with
anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
1. Grind welded joints smooth.
2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.
B. Keys: Provide four keys for each accessory to the City of Glendale; master key all lockable
accessories.
C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316.
E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/2275
coating.
F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective
and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.
G. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.
H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.
I. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate.
2.3 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Warm air hand dryers, touchless dispensers, and other electric toilet accessories shall be UL listed.
B. Coordinate requirements for power wiring with electrical subcontractor.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel: NO.4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.
B. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123/A123M; galvanize ferrous
metal and fastening devices.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00 - 3
2.5 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. See Toilet Accessory Keynotes on drawings for description.
B. Under sink Piping Covers: Soft resilient molded vinyl.
1. Wall: 1/8 inch with internal ribs.
2. Durometer: 70-80 - Shore A.
3. Burning Characteristics: Self-extinguishing 0 seconds.
4. Color: White.
5. Product: Lav Guard 2 manufactured by Truebro, Inc, www.truebro.com.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
C. Verify that electrical connections have been properly coordinated.
D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on
drawings.
END OF SECTION
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 36 60 - 1
SECTION 12 36 60
COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Specimen warranty.
C. Submit shop drawings in conformance with the requirements of the Architectural Woodwork
standards,
D. Furnish a Woodwork Institute Certified Compliance Label on the first page of the shop drawings.
E. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of
cabinets and casework specified in other sections.
F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square,
representing actual product, color, and patterns.
G. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.
H. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
I. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair
of countertop surfaces.
J. Sustainable Design Submittals: Provide the following information
1. Local/Regional Materials
2. Recycled Materials
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 36 60 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed.
B. Monitored Compliance
1. Millwork and the installation thereof for this project shall be monitored for compliance to
the contract documents by a Woodwork Institute Director of Architectural Services.
a. Full particulars of the Woodwork Institute Monitored Compliance Program may be
found at the Institute web site at www.woodworkinstitute.com. or by calling the
administrative office at 9163729943.
2. Schedule inspections by a Woodwork Institute Director of Architectural Services at the
beginning of fabrication, at the time of delivery, at the beginning of installation, at
completion, and such additional times as the Director of Architectural Services considers
appropriate.
a. A written report shall be issued to all parties at the conclusion of each inspection.
3. Millwork and/or installation found to be non compliant (and not corrected) will be rejected.
4. Issuance of a Monitored Compliance Certificate is a prerequisite of acceptance.
5. Fees charged by the Woodwork Institute for their Monitored Compliance program are the
responsibility of the millwork manufacturer and/or installer and shall be included in their
bid
C. Quality Certification: Provide AWl Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality
certification of completed work.
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS
Grade or Grades specified.
2. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels.
3. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program.
4. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and
products meet the specified requirements.
5. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification.
6. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.
D. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in
accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 36 60 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Quality Standard: See Section 06 41 00.
B. Solid Surfacing Countertops:
1. Homogeneous quartz surfaces material.
2. Thickness: 2 cm, minimum for vertical installation and 3 cm for horizontal installation.
3. Seam Width: less than 1/8” unless otherwise speifcied
4. Sinks and Bowls: undermount or as indicated on drawings
5. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
6. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high. H.
Performance characteristics: Zodiaq® physical properties data sheet:
Property Typical Result Test Procedure
Flexural Strength >5,300 psi ASTM D 790
Flexural Modulus 5.3–5.7E6 psi ASTM D 790
Flexural Elongation >0.1% ASTM D 790
Compression Strength (Dry) ~27,000 psi ASTM C 170
Compression Strength (Wet) ~24,000 psi ASTM C 170
Hardness 7 Mohs’ Hardness Scale
Thermal Expansion 1.45 x 10-5 in./in./°C ASTM D 696
Gloss (60° Gardner) 45–50 ANSI Z 124
Colorfastness Passes ANSI Z 124.6.5.1
Wear and Cleanability Passes ANSI Z 124.6.5.3
Stain Resistance Passes ANSI Z 124.6
(stain 5.2, chemical 5.5,
cigarette 5.4 resistances)
Fungal and Bacterial Resistance No growth ASTM G 21 & G 22
High Temperature None to slight effect NEMA LD 3.3.6*
Resistance (356°F)
Boiling Water Resistance None to slight effect NEMA LD 3.3.5*
Freeze-Thaw Cycling Unaffected ASTM C 1026
Point Impact Passes ANSI Z 124.6.4.2
Ball Impact 164 inches NEMA LD 3.3.8*
Slip Resistance Above 0.80 for textured models ASTM C 1028
Static Coefficient of Friction 0.89/0.61 (wet/dry) ASTM C 1028
(as received)
Static Coefficient of Friction 0.87/0.65 (wet/dry) ASTM C 1028
(with renovator)
Abrasion Resistance 139 ASTM C 501
Specific Gravity 2.44 ASTM D 792
Density ~2400 kg/m3
Water Absorption 0.12% ASTM C 373
Long- and Short-Term <0.04% ASTM D 570
Moisture Expansion <0.01% on average ASTM C 370
Toxicity Passes, LC50=68–128 Pittsburgh Protocol
Flammability For all colors tested ASTM E 84,
UL 723
(Class I and Class A) and NFPA 255
Flame Spread Index FSI <10 for 3 cm and <15 for 2 cm
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 36 60 - 4
Smoke Developed Index SDI <50 for 3 cm and <100 for 2 cm
Nominal Thickness 2 cm and 3 cm
Nominal Weight 10 lb./ft.2 (2 cm)
15 lb./ft.2 (3 cm)
* NEMA results based on the NEMA LD 3-2000
C. Manufacturers:
1. Dupont: Zodiaq Quartz Surfaces as basis of design
http://www.dupont.com/products-and-services/construction-materials/surface-design-
materials/brands/zodiaq-quartz-surfaces.html
2. Or Equal
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply;
minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines.
B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
materials being joined.
C. Cove Molding for Top of Splashes: Rubber with semi-gloss finish and T-spline to fit between
splash and wall; 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch.
1. Color: As indicated on drawings.
D. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white.
E. Sink/bowl mounting hardware: Manufacturer’s approved bowl clips, brass inserts and fasteners
for attachment of undermount sinks/bowls.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against
cabinet or wall.
3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or
unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.
B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof
glue.
2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive
sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 36 60 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets
are installed in proper locations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim
where required.
B. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product
installation details.
1. Tops:
a. Flat and true to within 1/8" (3 mm) of a flat surface over a 10' length.
b. Allow a minimum of 1/16" to a maximum of 1/8" (3 mm) clearance between surface
and each wall.
C. Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joint widths no greater than
1/8" (3 mm) in finished work.
1. Keep components and hands clean when making joints.
D. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
1. Where indicated use rubber cove molding.
2. Where applied cove molding is not indicated use specified sealant.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.
B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.
C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
COUNTERTOPS 12 36 60 - 6
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
210500 - 1
SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
3. Sleeves.
4. Escutcheons.
5. Grout.
6. Painting and finishing.
7. Access to mechanical work.
8. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Mechanical sleeve seals.
B. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, “Structural
Welding Code - Steel.”
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, “Code for Pressure Piping.”
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for fire protection installations.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
210500 - 2
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured in place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire protection items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 08 Section “Access Doors and Frames.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full Face Type: For flat face, Class 125, cast iron and cast bronze flanges.
b. Narrow Face Type: For raised face, Class 250, cast iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8-inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead free alloys. Include water flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
210500 - 3
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
2.4 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated “wall pipe” equivalent to ductile iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80.
2.5 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One Piece, Deep Pattern Type: Deep drawn, box shaped brass with polished chrome plated
finish.
C. One Piece, Cast Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome plated.
D. Split Casting, Cast Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome plated.
E. One Piece, Stamped Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome plated finish.
F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome
plated finish.
G. One Piece, Floor Plate Type: Cast iron floor plate.
H. Split Casting, Floor Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.6 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28 day compressive strength.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
210500 - 4
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.7 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS
A. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Sections “Access Doors and Frames.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIRE PROTECTION DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Cutting and Patching” and Division 02 Section “Selective
Structure Demolition” for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire protection systems, equipment, and components
indicated to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and
quality.
D. Patch existing construction where disturbed by work of this Division.
1. Work shall be done by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work
involved. Patching and remodeling work shall conform to the standards of the
specifications of the Project, where applicable; where not specified, work shall conform
to the highest standards of the trade.
2. Existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the Work shall be repaired to
an extent and as required to match adjacent existing undamaged construction.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Because of the small scale of the
drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which may be
required. Furnish all fittings, valves and accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
210500 - 5
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at required slopes to drain system.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
K. Install escutcheons for penetrations of finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
L. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. PVC or Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. PVC sleeves are
prohibited in air plenums.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section
“Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and installation.
M. Aboveground, Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast iron “wall pipes” for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
210500 - 6
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
N. Underground, Exterior Wall or Slab on Grade Pipe Penetrations: Install cast iron “wall pipes”
for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow
for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
O. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07
Section “Penetration Firestopping” for materials.
P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in.
Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing in
requirements.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 “Quality Assurance” Article.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.4 PAINTING
A. Painting of fire protection systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09
Sections “Interior Painting” and “Exterior Painting.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
210500 - 7
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor fire protection materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.6 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for fire protection equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
3.7 ACCESS TO MECHANICAL WORK
A. Provide access panels for any device that requires access for servicing and/or maintenance.
Coordinate locations with General Contractor.
B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of access doors, floor doors, and
removable access plates.
C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level
in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.
D. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
E. Remove or replace panels or frames which are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 210500
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 1
SECTION 211313 – WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
2. Sprinklers.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from
sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys
frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175 psig minimum working pressure.
B. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a. Automobile Parking Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
b. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
c. Churches: Light Hazard.
d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
e. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
f. Laundries: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
g. Libraries except Stack Areas: Light Hazard.
h. Library Stack Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.
i. Machine Shops: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.
j. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
k. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.
l. Printing Plants: Extra Hazard, Group 1.
m. Repair Garages: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2.
n. Residential Living Areas: Light Hazard.
o. Restaurant Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
p. Solvent Cleaning Areas: Extra Hazard, Group 2.
3. Minimum Density for Automatic Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Residential (Dwelling) Occupancy: 0.05 gpm over 400 sq. ft. area.
b. Light Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500 sq. ft. area.
c. Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500 sq. ft. area.
d. Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500 sq. ft. area.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 2
e. Extra Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.30 gpm over 2500 sq. ft. area.
f. Extra Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.40 gpm over 2500 sq. ft. area.
g. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Minimum Density for Deluge Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over entire area.
b. Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over entire area.
c. Extra Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.30 gpm over entire area.
d. Extra Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.40 gpm over entire area.
e. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.
6. Total Combined Hose Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For wet pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
C. Delegated Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing
shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, “Installation of Sprinkler Systems.”
2. NFPA 13R, “Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and
Including Four Stories in Height.”
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Owner’s written
permission.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 3
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with
space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of
sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with
sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in “Piping Schedule” Article for applications of pipe, tube, and
fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard Weight, Galvanized and Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B.
Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
B. Thinwall Galvanized and Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M,
threadable, with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10.
Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
C. Schedule 10, Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5
and smaller; and NFPA 13 specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end.
D. Galvanized and Black Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M,
standard weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
E. Galvanized and Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
F. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern.
G. Malleable or Ductile Iron Unions: UL 860.
H. Cast Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
I. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
J. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
K. Grooved Joint, Steel Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
3. Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,
malleable iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile iron casting; with dimensions matching
steel pipe.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 4
4. Grooved End Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,
unless otherwise indicated, for steel pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,
EPDM rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
L. Steel Pressure Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM approved, 175 psig pressure rating with steel housing,
rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers’ pressure seal tools.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Victaulic Company.
M. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8-inch thick or
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
1. Class 125, Cast Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat Face Flanges: Full face gaskets.
2. Class 250, Cast Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised Face Flanges: Ring type
gaskets.
B. Metal, Pipe Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.4 LISTED FIRE PROTECTION VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.
2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard Pressure Piping: 175 psig.
3. Minimum Pressure Rating for High Pressure Piping: 250 psig.
B. Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.
3. Valves NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze or brass body with threaded ends.
4. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2: Bronze or brass body with threaded ends or ductile iron
body with grooved ends.
5. Valves NPS 3: Ductile iron body with grooved ends.
2.5 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL’s “Fire Protection Equipment Directory” listing or “Approval Guide,”
published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
B. Angle Valves:
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 5
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.
b. United Brass Works, Inc.
C. Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
c. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. NIBCO INC.
f. Potter Roemer.
g. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
h. Victaulic Company.
i. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
D. Globe Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.
b. United Brass Works, Inc.
E. Plug Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Southern Manufacturing Group.
2.6 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Branch Outlet Fittings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
2. Standard: UL 213.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.
4. Body Material: Ductile iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
5. Type: Mechanical T and cross fittings.
6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile iron housing with branch outlets.
7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to
match connected branch piping.
8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain end pipe, or threaded.
B. Adjustable Drop Nipples:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. CECA, LLC.
b. Corcoran Piping System Co.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 6
c. Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc.
2. Standard: UL 1474.
3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.
4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM rubber O-ring seals.
5. Size: Same as connected piping.
6. Length: Adjustable.
7. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
2.7 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
2. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
3. Victaulic Company.
4. Viking Corporation.
B. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL’s “Fire Protection Equipment Directory” listing or “Approval Guide,”
published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig maximum.
3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.
4. Pressure Rating for High Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250 psig minimum.
C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat Responsive Element:
1. Early Suppression, Fast Response Applications: UL 1767.
2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
3. Residential Applications: UL 1626.
4. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for
“Ordinary” temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by
application.
D. Open Sprinklers with Heat Responsive Element Removed: UL 199.
1. Characteristics:
a. Nominal 1/2-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.
b. Nominal 17/32-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.
E. Sprinkler Finishes:
1. Chrome plated.
2. Painted.
F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting
applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome plated steel, one piece, flat.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome plated steel, one piece, flat.
G. Sprinkler Guards:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 7
b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
c. Victaulic Company.
d. Viking Corporation.
2. Standard: UL 199.
3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
B. One Piece, Cast Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome plated finish with set screws.
C. One Piece, Deep Pattern Escutcheons: Deep drawn, box shaped brass with chrome plated
finish.
D. One Piece, Stamped Steel Escutcheons: Chrome plated finish with set screw or spring clips.
E. Split Casting, Cast Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome plated or rough brass finish with
concealed hinge and set screw.
F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel Escutcheons: Chrome plated finish with concealed rivet hinge, set
screw or spring clips.
G. One Piece Floor Plates: Cast iron flange with holes for fasteners.
H. Split Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
2.9 SLEEVES
A. Cast Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductile iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
C. Galvanized Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, standard weight, zinc coated,
plain ends.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.10 SLEEVE SEALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2. Calpico, Inc.
3. Metraflex, Inc.
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 8
B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or stainless steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating or stainless
steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.11 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic cement
grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.
C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings
that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system’s pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved end piping on valves, apparatus, and
equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 9
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water
service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to “Quality Assurance” Article.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for
galvanized steel pipe.
I. Steel Piping, Cut Grooved Joints: Cut square edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe
and grooved end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel pipe joints.
J. Steel Piping, Roll Grooved Joints: Roll rounded edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe
and grooved end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel pipe grooved joints.
3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.
B. Install dry type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or
sidewall, wet type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.
C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling
grid.
3.5 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.6 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in
floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
D. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation
using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements
for joint sealants in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 10
E. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for
joint sealants in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”
F. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using
sleeve seals.
G. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
H. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
I. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Galvanized steel pipe.
2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas
or Other Wet Areas: Galvanized steel pipe.
a. Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level.
b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast iron sleeve
fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements for
flashing in Division 07 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.”
3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum Board Partitions:
a. Galvanized steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Galvanized steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.
c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste pipes for
individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.
4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Galvanized steel pipe.
5. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:
a. Galvanized steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Cast iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.
c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used.
6. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:
a. Galvanized steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.
b. Galvanized steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.
J. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
for firestop materials and installations in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”
3.7 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water service piping entries into
building.
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in
center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe
and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 11
3.8 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13.
B. Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main drain, auxiliary drain, test
valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as required by NFPA 13. Hydraulic design data
nameplates shall be permanently affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, “Systems Acceptance”
Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Coordinate with fire pump tests. Operate as required.
7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control vales, instead of specified
fittings.
B. Standard pressure, wet pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1. Thinwall or Schedule 10, black steel pipe with roll grooved ends; uncoated, grooved end
fittings for steel piping; grooved end pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
2. Thinwall or Schedule 10, black steel pipe with plain ends; uncoated, plain end pipe
fittings.
3. Thinwall or Schedule 10, black steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded
joints.
C. Standard pressure, wet pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the
following:
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
211313 - 12
1. Standard weight, black steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray iron threaded
fittings; and threaded joints.
2. Standard weight, galvanized steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray iron threaded
fittings; and threaded joints.
3. Standard weight, black steel pipe with cut or roll grooved ends; uncoated, grooved end
fittings for steel piping; grooved end pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
4. Standard weight, galvanized steel pipe with cut grooved ends; galvanized, grooved end
fittings for steel piping; grooved end pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
5. Standard weight, black steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded
joints.
6. Thinwall or Schedule 10, black steel pipe with roll grooved ends; uncoated, grooved end
fittings for steel piping; grooved end pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
7. Thinwall or Schedule 10, black steel pipe with plain ends; welding fittings; and welded
joints.
3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Typical sprinkler type to existing sprinkler heads.
3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.
1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory painted white cover plate.
2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.
4. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to
view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed
to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
END OF SECTION 211313
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 1
SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. Plumbing demolition.
9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
10. Painting and finishing.
11. Access to mechanical work.
12. Excavating for mechanical work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Dielectric fittings.
2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
B. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, “Structural
Welding Code - Steel.”
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, “Code for Pressure Piping.”
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with
requirements.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Mechanical drawings are symbolic and diagrammatic and are intended to show only the general
scheme, equipment involved and the approximate locations of materials and equipment.
Coordinate installation of systems with other trades to avoid conflicts. Notify Engineer of
unresolvable conflicts prior to fabrication and installation of systems.
B. Obtain dimensions from the Architectural drawings wherever possible instead of scaling the
Mechanical drawings. Consult the Architectural drawings for details of construction, location
of suspended ceilings and other pertinent information. Architect’s drawings, however, shall not
take precedence over field measurements. Carefully investigate the structural and finish
conditions affecting the work and arrange the work accordingly.
C. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories, which may be required. Furnish all fittings, traps, valves and accessories as may be
required to meet such conditions.
D. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for plumbing installations.
E. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08
Section “Access Doors and Frames.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 3
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
2. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.
3. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer’s
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-
cement-joint end.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer’s SDR 11 equivalent
dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include
brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 4
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-
face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following manufacturers.
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated “wall pipe” equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 5
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80.
2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-
plated finish.
2.8 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.9 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS
A. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section “Access Doors and Frames.”
2.10 EXCAVATING FOR MECHANICAL WORK
A. Backfill Materials:
1. Subbase Material: Graded mixture of gravel, sand, crushed stone or crushed slag.
2. Finely-graded Subbase Material: Well graded sand, gravel, crushed stone or crushed
slag, with 100% passing 3/8 inch sieve.
3. Backfill Material: Soil material suitable for compacting to required densities, and
complying with AASHO Designation M145, Group A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5 or A-3.
4. Drainage Fill Material: Washed and uniformly graded gravel, crushed stone or crushed
slag, with 100% passing 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5% passing No. 4 sieve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Cutting and Patching” and Division 02 Section “Selective
Structure Demolition” for general demolition requirements and procedures.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 6
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to
be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and
quality.
D. Patch existing construction where disturbed by work of this Division.
1. Work shall be done by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work
involved. Patching and remodeling work shall conform to the standards of the
specifications of the Project, where applicable; where not specified, work shall conform
to the highest standards of the trade.
2. Existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the Work shall be repaired to
an extent and as required to match adjacent existing undamaged construction.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. Because of the small scale of the
drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories, which may be
required. Furnish all fittings, traps, valves and accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions.
C. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
D. Install escutcheons for penetrations of finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
E. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 7
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. PVC or Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. PVC sleeves are
prohibited in plenums.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section
“Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and installation.
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall or Slab-On-Grade Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron “wall pipes”
for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow
for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
H. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07
Section “Penetration Firestopping” for materials.
I. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
J. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 8
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA’s “Copper Tube Handbook,” using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Brazing Handbook,” “Pipe and Tube”
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 “Quality Assurance” Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 9
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections
“Interior Painting” and “Exterior Painting.”
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.7 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
3.8 ACCESS TO MECHANICAL WORK
A. Provide access panels for any device that requires access for servicing and/or maintenance.
Coordinate locations with General Contractor.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 10
B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of access doors, floor doors, and
removable access plates.
C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level
in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.
D. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
E. Remove or replace panels or frames which are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
3.9 EXCAVATING FOR MECHANICAL WORK
A. General: Do not excavate for mechanical work until work is ready to proceed without delay, so
that total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimum.
B. Excavate with vertical sided excavations to greatest extent possible, except where otherwise
indicated. Where necessary, provide sheeting and cross-bracing to sustain sides of excavations.
Remove sheeting and cross-bracing during backfilling wherever such removal would not
endanger work or other property. Where not removed, cut sheeting off at sufficient distance
below finished grade to not interfere with other work.
C. Width: Excavate for piping with 6 inch to 9 inch clearance on both sides of pipe, except where
otherwise shown or required for proper installation of pipe joints, fittings, valves and other
work. Excavate for other mechanical work to provide minimum practical but adequate working
clearances.
D. Depth for Direct Support: For work to be supported directly on undisturbed soil, do not
excavate beyond indicated depths, and hand-excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations. Except
as otherwise indicated, support the following work on undisturbed soil at bottom of excavations.
E. Depth for Subbase Support: For large piping (6 inch pipe size and larger), tanks, and where
indicated for other mechanical work, excavate for installation of subbase material in depth
indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, 6 inch below bottom of work to be supported.
F. Depth for Unsatisfactory Soil Conditions: Where directed because of unsatisfactory soil
condition at bottom of indicated excavation, excavate additional depth as directed to reach
satisfactory soil- bearing condition. Backfill with subbase material, compacted as directed, to
indicated excavation depth. Refer to Division 1 for change order procedure on additional work,
including additional excavating and backfilling.
G. Depth for Exterior Piping: Except as otherwise indicated, excavate for exterior water-bearing
piping (water, steam condensate, drainage) so that top of piping will not be less than
7 foot-6 inch vertical distance below finished grade.
H. Excavate near large trees (within drip line) by hand, and protect root system from damage or
dryout to greatest extent possible. Maintain moist condition for root system and cover exposed
roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1 inch diameter and larger with asphaltic tree paint.
I. Store excavated material (temporarily) near excavation, in manner which will not interfere with
or damage excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within drip line).
1. Retain excavated material which complies with requirements for backfill material.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 11
2. Dispose of excavated material which is either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling
or does not comply with requirements for backfill material.
3. Remove unused material from project site, and dispose of in lawful manner.
3.10 DEWATERING
A. Maintain dry excavations for mechanical work, by removing water. Protect excavations from
inflow of surface water. Pump minor inflow of ground water from excavations; protect
excavations from major inflow of ground water, by installing temporary sheeting and water
proofing. Provide adequate barriers which will protect other excavations and below-grade
property from being damaged by water, sediment or erosion from or through mechanical work
excavations.
3.11 BASE PREPARATION
A. Subbase Installation: Where indicated, install subbase material to receive mechanical work, and
compact by tamping to form firm base for work. For piping, horizontal cylindrical tanks, and
similar work, shape subbase to fit shape of bottom 90 of cylinder, for uniform continuous
support.
1. Provide finely-graded subbase material for wrapped, coated, and plastic pipe and tanks.
B. Shape subbases and bottoms of excavations with recesses to receive pipe bells, flanged
connections, valves and similar enlargements in piping systems.
C. Concrete Encasement: Where piping under roadways is less than 2 foot-6 inch below surface of
roadway, provide 4 inch base slab of concrete to support piping. After piping is installed and
tested, provide 4 inch thick encasement (sides and top) of concrete before backfilling. Provide
Class 2500 concrete for encasement and slab.
D. Previous Excavations: Where piping crosses over area more than 5 foot-0 inch wide which has
been previously excavated to greater depth than required for piping installation, provide suitable
subsidence- proof support for piping. Comply with details shown or, where not otherwise
shown, provide one of the following support systems:
1. Excavate to undisturbed soil, in width equal to pipe diameter plus 2 foot-0 inch. Install
8 inch courses of subbase material, each compacted to 95% of maximum density, as
required to fill excavation and support piping.
2. Excavate to undisturbed soil, in width equal to pipe diameter plus 1 foot-0 inch. Install
lean concrete fill to required elevation for support of piping.
3.12 BACKFILLING
A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted, wherever testing
is indicated.
B. Install drainage fill where indicated, and tamp to uniform firm density.
C. Backfill with finely-graded subbase material to 6 inch above wrapped, coated, and plastic
piping and tanks, and to centerline of other tanks.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
220500 - 12
D. Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may
be necessary to facilitate compaction to required densities. Do not backfill with frozen soil
materials.
E. Backfill simultaneously on opposite sides of mechanical work, and compact simultaneously; do
not dislocate work from installed positions.
F. Backfill excavations in 8 inch high courses of backfill material, uniformly compacted to the
following densities (% of maximum density, ASTM D 1557), using power-driven
hand-operated compaction equipment.
1. Lawn and Landscaped Areas: 85% for cohesive soils, 90% for cohesionless soils.
2. Paved Areas, Other than Roadways: 90% for cohesive soils; 95% for cohesionless soils.
3. Roadways and Under Building Floor: 90% for cohesive soils; 95% for cohesionless
soils.
G. Backfill to elevations matching adjacent grades, at time of backfilling excavations for
mechanical work.
H. Street and yard surfaces shall be restored to their original condition after services are installed.
I. Compaction Tests: Where compaction tests indicate lower densities of backfill than specified,
continue compaction (and re-excavation and backfilling where necessary) and provide
additional testing as directed by Architect/Engineer. Allowable density tolerance is not more
than one-test-out-of-5 falling more than 2 percentage points below specified density.
3.13 PERFORMANCE AND MAINTENANCE, EXCAVATION WORK
A. Subsidence: Where subsidence is measurable or observable at mechanical work excavations
during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn or other finish), add
backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment.
B. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and
eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
END OF SECTION 220500
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 - 1
SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermometers.
2. Gages.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CASE THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Ernst Gage Co.
2. Trerice, H. O. Co.
3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
B. Case: 9 inches long.
C. Tube: Red or blue reading, with magnifying lens.
D. Tube Background: Satin faced, nonreflective with scale markings.
E. Window: Glass or polycarbonate.
F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
G. Stem: Copper plated steel or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation.
H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range.
2.2 THERMOWELLS
A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.
B. Description: Pressure tight, socket type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type,
diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 - 2
2.3 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
2. Ernst Gage Co.
3. Trerice, H. O. Co.
4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
5. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.
B. Direct Mounting, Dial Type Pressure Gages: Indicating dial type complying with
ASME B40.100.
1. Case: Dry type, 4-1/2 inch diameter.
2. Pressure Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom outlet type unless back outlet type is
indicated.
4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
5. Dial: Satin faced, nonreflective with scale markings.
6. Pointer: Metal.
7. Window: Glass or polycarbonate.
8. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale.
9. Vacuum Pressure Range: 30 in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure.
10. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
C. Pressure Gage Fittings:
1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless steel needle type.
2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion resistant, porous metal
disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS
A. Install thermometers in the outlet of each domestic hot water heater or hot water storage tank.
B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.
3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS
A. Install dry case type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure reducing valve.
3.3 INSTALLATIONS
A. Install direct mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical
position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.
C. Install direct mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most
readable position.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 - 3
D. Install needle valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage.
E. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment.
END OF SECTION 220519
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 1
SECTION 220523 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following general duty valves:
1. Bronze angle valves.
2. Copper alloy ball valves.
3. Bronze check valves.
4. Spring loaded, lift disc check valves.
5. Bronze gate valves.
6. Bronze globe valves.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section “Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for valve tags
and charts.
2. Division 22 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;
valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;
dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include
rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and
accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and
design criteria.
B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable water service.
C. MSS Standard Practices: Comply with the following standards for valves:
1. MSS SP-45: Bypass and Drain Connection Standard.
2. MSS SP-70: Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
3. MSS SP-71: Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
4. MSS SP-72: Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt Welding Ends for General Service.
5. MSS SP-78: Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
6. MSS SP-80: Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves.
7. MSS SP-84: Steel Valves - Socket Welding and Threaded Ends.
8. MSS SP-85: Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
9. MSS SP-92: MSS Valve User Guide.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to Part 3 “Valve Applications” Article for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter turn types.
2. Lever Handle: For quarter turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.
3. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every
10 plug valves, for each size square plug head.
G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
I. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.
1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
a. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate,
and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.3 COPPER ALLOY BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Two Piece, Copper Alloy Ball Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 3
g. Honeywell Braukmann.
h. Milwaukee Valve Company.
i. NIBCO INC.
j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Three Piece, Copper Alloy Ball Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Hammond Valve.
d. NIBCO INC.
B. Copper Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
C. Two Piece, Copper Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with full port, chrome plated bronze ball;
TFE seats; and 600 psig minimum CWP rating and blowout proof stem.
D. Three Piece, Copper Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with full port, chrome plated bronze ball;
TFE seats; and 600 psig minimum CWP rating and blowout proof stem.
2.4 BRONZE CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 2, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Walworth Co.
2. Type 2, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Kitz Corporation of America.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
3. Type 4, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Cincinnati Valve Co.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Grinnell Corporation.
f. Hammond Valve.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. NIBCO INC.
i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Bronze Check Valves, General: MSS SP-80.
C. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze, Horizontal Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc
and bronze seat.
D. Type 2, Class 125, Bronze, Vertical Lift Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and
bronze seat.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 4
E. Type 4, Class 125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and
bronze seat.
2.5 SPRING LOADED, LIFT DISC CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type I, Wafer Lift Disc Check Valves:
a. Mueller Steam Specialty.
2. Type II, Compact Wafer, Lift Disc Check Valves:
a. Durabla Fluid Technology, Inc.
b. Flomatic Valves.
c. GA Industries, Inc.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Metraflex Co.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company.
h. Mueller Steam Specialty.
i. Multiplex Manufacturing Co.
j. NIBCO INC.
k. SSI Equipment, Inc.
l. Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.
m. Valve and Primer Corp.
3. Type IV, Threaded Lift Disc Check Valves:
a. Grinnell Corporation.
b. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Milwaukee Valve Company.
e. Mueller Steam Specialty.
f. NIBCO INC.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Lift Disc Check Valves, General: FCI 74-1, with spring loaded bronze or alloy disc and bronze
or alloy seat.
C. Type I, Class 125, Wafer Lift Disc Check Valves: Wafer style with cast iron shell with
diameter matching companion flanges.
D. Type II, Class 125, Compact Wafer, Lift Disc Check Valves: Compact wafer style with cast
iron shell with diameter made to fit within bolt circle.
E. Type IV, Class 125, Threaded Lift Disc Check Valves: Threaded style with bronze shell and
threaded ends.
2.6 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 1, Bronze, Nonrising Stem Gate Valves:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 5
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Powell, Wm. Co.
i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B. Bronze Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous alloy handwheel.
C. Type 1, Class 150, Bronze Gate Valves: Bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid
wedge and union ring bonnet.
2.7 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Type 1, Bronze Globe Valves with Metal Disc:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Stockham.
2. Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
d. Grinnell Corporation.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
h. Stockham.
B. Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous alloy handwheel.
C. Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with nonmetallic disc and union ring
bonnet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 6
C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,
use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball or gate valves.
2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, or globe valves.
3. Pump Discharge: Spring loaded, lift disc check valves.
B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher
CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Angle Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125 or 150, bronze.
2. Angle Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type II, Class 125 or 250, cast iron.
3. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Smaller: Two or three piece, 600 psig CWP rating, copper
alloy.
4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 125, horizontal or vertical, bronze.
5. Swing Check Valves: Type 4, Class 125, bronze.
6. Grooved End, Ductile Iron, Swing Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 175 psig CWP
rating.
7. Spring Loaded, Lift Disc Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type IV, Class 125
minimum.
8. Spring Loaded, Lift Disc Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I or II, Class 125,
cast iron.
9. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 1, Class 150, bronze.
10. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, NRS, bronze mounted cast iron.
11. Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
12. Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Type I, Class 125, bronze mounted cast iron.
3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe, ball, and plug
valves for throttling duty.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 7
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
F. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Dual Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling and fitting manufacturer’s written instructions.
C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water flushable, lead free flux; ASTM B 32, lead free alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION 220523
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 1
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and
equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Pipe stands.
7. Pipe positioning systems.
8. Equipment supports.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and
installation of supports and anchors.
B. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products that are UL listed and FM approved.
C. MSS Standard Compliance:
1. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply
with ANSI/MSS SP-58.
2. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
“Hanger and Support Applications” Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
3. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
4. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
5. Grinnell Corp.
6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
C. Copper Clad Hangers: For use with copper piping.
D. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
E. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
F. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop or field fabricated pipe support assembly made from
structural steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop or field fabricated pipe support assembly made of steel channels
and other components.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
4. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.4 THERMAL HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100 psig minimum, compressive strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal
shield.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 3
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3. Pipe Shields, Inc.
C. Insulation Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
D. Insulation Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Threaded steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
B. Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert wedge type zinc coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
2.6 PIPE STAND FABRICATION
A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion
resistant components to support roof mounted piping.
2.7 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in
pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.
2.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop or field fabricated equipment support made from structural steel
shapes.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory mixed and packaged, dry, hydraulic cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28 day compressive strength.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings or copper clad hangers on attachments for electrolytic protection
where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes,
NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon or Alloy Steel, Double Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off
center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split or Solid Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
9. Adjustable, Swivel Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
11. Extension Hinged or 2 Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 5
16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion
support and cast iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from
2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if
small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition
to expansion and contraction.
G. Vertical Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2. Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4
to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 6
10. Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
13. Side Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts or Wood Blocking: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches.
3. Spring Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
7. Variable Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical type supports and one trapeze member.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 7
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder actuated fasteners or mechanical expansion anchors instead of building attachments
where required in concrete construction.
O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Thermal Hanger Shield or Wood Block Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for
insulated piping.
D. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder actuated tool manufacturer’s operating manual.
2. Install mechanical expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
E. Pipe Stand Installation:
1. Pipe Stand Types: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not
penetrate roof membrane.
F. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste
piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section “Plumbing Fixtures”
for plumbing fixtures.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded structural steel shapes.
I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 8
J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
N. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
O. Maximum hanger spacing and minimum rod size pipe shall be as scheduled below. The
maximum allowable load column includes a safety factor of 5 and is to be used to calculate rod
sizes for trapeze hangers and equipment hanging.
1. Provide hangers for cast iron soil pipe at 5 foot intervals, except 10 foot intervals where
10 foot lengths are used.
2. Provide hangers at 32 inch intervals for plastic pipe.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 9
3. Hanger Schedule:
Pipe Size Steel Copper Min. Rod Diameter
& Max. allow. load
1/2” & 3/4” 7’ 5’ 3/8” 610 lbs.
1” & 1-1/4” 6’ 5’ 3/8” 610 lbs.
1-1/2” 9’ 6’ 3/8” 610 lbs.
2” 9’ 8’ 3/8” 610 lbs.
2-1/2” 10’ 9’ 1/2” 1130 lbs.
3” & larger 10’ 10’ 1/2” 1130 lbs.
3/4” 2710 lbs.
7/8” 3770 lbs.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 10
HANGER AND SUPPORT TYPE CHART
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 11
END OF SECTION 220529
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220548 - 1
SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing piping and equipment vibration controls as herein specified:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
B. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural
Welding Code - Steel.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION DESIGNATION
A. Refer to the following vibration isolation designation for description. See Equipment Isolation
Schedule at end of this section for type and deflection.
B. TYPE A NEOPRENE-IN-SHEAR
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mason Industries.
b. Peabody Noise Control Inc.
c. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
d. Vibration Mounting & Controls, Inc.
2. Neoprene cylinders with provision for bolting to equipment and structure if required.
C. TYPE B SPRING MOUNTING WITH VERTICAL LIMIT STOPS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mason Industries.
b. Peabody Noise Control Inc.
c. Vibration Mounting & Controls, Inc.
2. Free standing with sound deadening pads and leveling bolts with limit stops. Spring
diameter-to-compressed operating spring height ratio 1:1. Spring loaded minimum
additional available travel 50% of rated deflection.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220548 - 2
D. TYPE C NEOPRENE AND SPRING
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mason Industries.
b. Vibration Mounting & Controls, Inc.
2. Combination spring and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring diameter to
compressed operating spring height ratio of 0.8 or greater. Spring loaded minimum
additional available travel 50% of rated deflection. Spring diameter and hanger box hole
large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the
box.
E. TYPE D SPRING
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mason Industries.
b. Vibration Mounting & Controls, Inc.
2. Combination spring and double deflection neoprene hanger in series. Precompressed by
the manufacturer to the rated deflection to keep piping or equipment at a fixed elevation
during installation. Spring diameter to compressed operating spring height ratio of 0.8 or
greater. Spring loaded minimum additional travel 50% of rated deflection. Spring
diameter and hanger box hole large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through a
30 degree arc before contacting the box.
F. TYPE F BRAIDED HOSE
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Flex/Flo.
b. Flexact.
c. Flexonics.
d. Mason Industries.
e. Metraflex.
f. Minnesota Flexible Corp.
g. Twin City Hose.
2. Flexible stainless steel Type 321 hose and braided cover with carbon steel ends.
2-1/2 inch pipe size and smaller - male nipples. 3 inch pipe size and larger - 150 pound
ASA flanges. Pipe sizes up to and including: 1-1/2 inch pipe - 12 inches long, 3 inch
pipe - 18 inches long, 6 inch pipe - 24 inches long, 8 inch pipe and over - 36 inches long.
Use lengths as required. Install horizontally, where possible, on the equipment side of
shut off valves.
3. Flexible bronze braided hose with copper tube ends for Freon. Install horizontally, where
possible, on the equipment side of shut off valves.
G. TYPE G NEOPRENE CONNECTOR
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mason Industries.
b. Metraflex.
c. Minnesota Flexible Corp.
d. Red Valve.
e. Twin City Hose.
f. Vibration Mountings & Controls.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220548 - 3
2. Flexible neoprene connectors manufactured from multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric
and neoprene. No steel wire or rings for pressure reinforcement. Connector 2” and
smaller threaded ends. 2-1/2 inches and larger - floating steel 150 pound ASA flanges
minimum pressure rating 150 PSI at 220F connector configuration straight line and 90
elbow. Connectors with two sphere design, elbow connectors with one sphere forming
the corner of the joint itself.
H. TYPE H VERTICAL PIPING ANCHOR AND GUIDE ISOLATORS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mason Industries.
2. Acoustical pipe anchor and guide isolators consisting of telescopic arrangement of two
sizes steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2 inch thickness of heavy duty neoprene and
duct or neoprene isolation material. Vertical restraints by similar method to prevent
vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material not to exceed
500 PSI with a balanced design for equal resistance in any direction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing in of reinforcement and cast in place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EQUIPMENT ISOLATION
A. Provide hose or connector isolators on suction and discharge of all rotating and reciprocating
equipment.
B. Mount close coupled pumps on rails extended beyond the pump housing.
C. Provide horizontally split pump bases complete with base elbow supports at the discharge and
suction.
D. Galvanize isolator body and cadmium plate isolator springs in outdoor applications.
E. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
F. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
3.3 PIPING ISOLATION
A. Isolate all piping connected to isolated mechanical equipment within the confines of the
mechanical equipment room but for not less than 50 feet. Isolator types will be as follows:
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220548 - 4
B. Spring deflections - first 3 supports - equal to connected isolated equipment but not less than
0.75 inch. Balance of supports 0.75 inch deflection.
C. Floor mounted Type B.
D. Ceiling suspended Type D (first 3 supports) and Type C thereafter.
E. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
F. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
3.4 RISER ISOLATION
A. Suspend or support risers by Type D hangers or Type B mountings and anchor or guide risers
with Type H isolators. Minimum spring deflections of 0.75 inch except in those expansion
locations where additional deflection is required to limit deflection or load transfer to plus or
minus 25% of initial stress.
B. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
PART 4 - EQUIPMENT ISOLATION SCHEDULE
4.1 EQUIPMENT ISOLATION
Equipment Location Isolation
Type
Total
Deflection
Suspended Water Pumps Mechanical Rooms D 1.0 inch
END OF SECTION 220548
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 - 1
SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Pipe labels.
3. Plastic tape.
4. Stencils.
5. Valve tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
D. Valve numbering scheme.
E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
F. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion of stenciling
and include used stencils in maintenance materials.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: White.
3. Background Color: Black.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering
two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless steel self tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment’s unique equipment number.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2 by 11 inch (A4)
bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated plans, details, and schedules. Equipment schedule shall be included in
operation and maintenance data.
2.2 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction, complying with ANSI A13.1.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact type, permanent adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
2.3 PLASTIC TAPE
A. General: Manufacturer’s standard color coded pressure sensitive (self adhesive) vinyl tape, not
less than 3 mils thick.
B. Width: Provide 1-1/2 inch wide tape markers for pipes 6 inches or larger and provide 3/4 inch
wide tape markers for pipes less than 6 inches.
C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 - 3
2.4 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter
height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational
instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint
may be in pressurized spray can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless
otherwise indicated.
2.5 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved, 1-1/2 inch diameter, with 1/4 inch letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2 inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped
holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2 by 11 inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2. For each page of the valve schedule, provide a glazed display frame, with screws for
removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of rigid plastic or extruded
aluminum, with clear plastic glazing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of plumbing equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section “Interior Painting.”
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe
labels, at Installer’s option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color coded bands or
rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.
2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 - 4
C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
3.4 VALVE TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn watering hose
connections; and similar roughing in connections of end use fixtures and units. List tagged
valves in a valve schedule.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 1
SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Calcium silicate.
b. Cellular glass.
c. Flexible elastomeric.
d. Mineral fiber.
e. Polystyrene.
2. Field applied fabric reinforcing mesh.
3. Field applied jackets.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section “HVAC Insulation.”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire test response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed
index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame spread index of 75 or less, and smoke developed
index of 150 or less.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 22 Section “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 2
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and
equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop
Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field
applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. Calcium Silicate:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold.
2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat, curved, and grooved block sections of noncombustible,
inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply
with ASTM C 533, Type I.
3. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory applied jacket requirements are specified in “Factory Applied
Jackets” Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory Applied ASJ Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 2.
6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed cell, sponge or expanded rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 3
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
I. Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory applied jacket
requirements are specified in “Factory Applied Jackets” Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All Service Duct Wrap.
J. Mineral Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
K. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation.
Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall
not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according
to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam.
b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene.
2.2 FIELD APPLIED FABRIC REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Glass Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count
of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch for covering pipe and pipe fittings.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
B. Woven Glass Fiber Fabric for Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. with a thread
count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch for covering equipment.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Chil-Glas No. 5.
C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by
10 strands/sq. inch, in a Leno weave, for equipment and pipe.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.
b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
2.3 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 4
B. PVC Jacket: High impact resistant, UV resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
Thickness is indicated in field applied jacket schedules.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45 and 90 degree, short and long radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and
supply covers for lavatories.
5. Factory fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
C. Metal Jacket:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005,
3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.
3. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 5
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer’s recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3 inch wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor barrier mastic over staples.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 6
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush
with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through wall penetrations.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping” and fire
resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 7
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word “UNION”.
Match size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.
3.6 FIELD APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2 inch overlap at seams and joints.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 8
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062 inch thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint
jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer’s recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.
3.8 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. COLD PIPE Insulation Thickness (inch) (Based on K value of 4.0 to 4.6)
PIPE SIZE (inch)
SERVICE Runouts* 1 or less 1-1/4 to 2 2-1/2 to 4 5 to 6 8 & larger
Domestic Cold Water
**** 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1 1
* Runouts 2 inch pipe size and smaller and 12 ft. long or less.
** Includes drain body, rise to drain, horizontal pipes, and vertical pipes only within 18 inches of drain body.
*** Includes drain body, rise to drain, all horizontal and vertical pipes.
**** May be fiberglass or equal “R” value of flexible elastomeric.
***** Shall be fiberglass.
B. HOT PIPE Insulation Thickness - Fiberglass (inch) (Based on thermal resistance of 4.0 to 4.6)
PIPE SIZE (inch)
FLUID TEMP. RANGE 1 or less 1-1/4 to 2 2-1/2 to 4 5 to 6 8 & larger
Domestic Hot Water
105°F to 180°F
(*) (**)
1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5
* Flexible elastomeric acceptable.
** Insulate non circulating domestic hot water runouts 2 inch and smaller with 1/2 inch thickness.
3.9 INDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory applied jacket, install the
field applied jacket over the factory applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor’s option.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING INSULATION
220700 - 9
3.10 OUTDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory applied jacket, install the
field applied jacket over the factory applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor’s option.
END OF SECTION 220700
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 1
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section “Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping” for thermometers, pressure
gages, and fittings.
2. Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties” for water distribution piping
specialties.
3. Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Field quality control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of State Plumbing Code
pertaining to plumbing materials, construction and installation of products.
C. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9,” for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 “Pipe and Fitting Applications” Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting
the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be
joined.
2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PLASTIC PIPE
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, ASTM D2241, ASTM D2672.
1. PVC Pipe Fittings: ASTM D2464, ASTM D2466, ASTM D2467.
2. PVC pipe shall conform to NSF 61.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 2
3. Minimum working pressure rating of 160 psi.
2.3 DUCTILE IRON WATER PIPE
A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, AWWA C115.
1. All ductile iron water service piping and fittings shall be cement mortar lined in
accordance with AWWA C104.
2. Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings: AWWA C110, AWWA C153.
3. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to NSF 61.
4. Minimum working pressure rating of 160 psi.
2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L (ASTM B 88M, Types A and B), water tube,
annealed temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-
copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M (ASTM B 88M, Types B and C), water tube,
drawn temper.
1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-
copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
4. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) copper tube or
ASTM B 584 bronze castings.
a. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to
AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and
bolts and nuts.
2.5 VALVES
A. Bronze and cast iron, general duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section “General Duty
Valves for Plumbing Piping.”
B. Balancing and drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping
Specialties.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 22 Section “Common Work
Results for Plumbing.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 3
3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved end piping.
D. Fitting Option: Extruded tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper
tubing.
E. Aboveground Domestic Water Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter inside the
Building: Use the following piping materials for each size range:
1. Hard copper tube, Type L; and soldered joints.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast
iron butterfly or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast
iron butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. Hot Water Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose end drain valves.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use
butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
D. Install balancing valve in each hot water circulation return branch and discharge side of each
pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball
valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Balancing valves are specified in Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties.”
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section “Common Work
Results for Plumbing.”
B. Install under building slab copper tubing according to CDA’s “Copper Tube Handbook.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 4
C. Install cast iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22
Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”
D. Install shutoff valve, hose end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside
the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gages are specified in
Division 22 Section “Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping,” and drain valves and strainers are
specified in Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties.”
E. Install water pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Water pressure regulators are
specified in Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties.”
F. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain.
G. Rough in domestic water piping for water meter installation according to utility company’s
requirements.
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section “Common
Work Results for Plumbing.”
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water flushable, lead free flux; ASTM B 32, lead free alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved end pipe or grooved end tube coupling housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer’s written
instructions.
D. Extruded Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating
stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Provide pipe hanger and support devices complying with Division 22 Section “Hangers and
Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”
B. Provide vibration controls complying with Division 22 Section “Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 5
D. Connect domestic water piping to water service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
1. Booster Pumps: Cold water suction and discharge piping.
2. Water Heaters: Cold water supply and hot water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold and hot water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section “Plumbing Fixtures.”
4. Equipment: Cold and hot water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a. Roughing in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 6
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot water circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a. Manually adjust ball type balancing valves in hot water circulation return piping to
provide flow of hot water in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or,
if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
END OF SECTION 221116
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 1
SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Balancing valves.
3. Strainers.
4. Drain valves.
5. Water hammer arresters.
6. Air vents.
7. Trap seal primer valves.
8. Trap seal primer systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section “Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping” for thermometers, pressure
gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.
2. Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping” for water meters.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, “Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials,” for plastic
domestic water piping components.
2. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Pipe Applied, Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Ames Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. Rain Bird Corporation.
d. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1001.
3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
6. Finish: Chrome plated.
B. Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. Legend Valve.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
e. Woodford Manufacturing Company.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1011.
3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.
4. Outlet Connection: Garden hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.
C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1020.
3. Operation: Continuous pressure applications.
4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
5. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.
2.2 BALANCING VALVES
A. Memory Stop Balancing Valves:
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 3
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO INC.
2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two piece, copper alloy ball valves.
3. Pressure Rating: 400 psig minimum CWP.
4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.
5. Body: Copper alloy.
6. Port: Full port.
7. Ball: Chrome plated brass.
8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.
10. Handle: Vinyl covered steel with memory setting device.
2.3 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or FDA approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball Valve Type, Hose End Drain Valves:
1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard port, two piece ball valves.
2. Pressure Rating: 400 psig minimum CWP.
3. Size: NPS 3/4.
4. Body: Copper alloy.
5. Ball: Chrome plated brass.
6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7. Handle: Vinyl covered steel.
8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7
and cap with brass chain.
2.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water Hammer Arresters:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. AMTROL, Inc.
b. Josam Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 4
e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
3. Type: Copper tube with piston.
4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
2.6 AIR VENTS
A. Bolted Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F.
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 1/2 minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
B. Welded Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Stainless steel.
2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum pressure rating.
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 3/8 minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
2.7 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply Type, Trap Seal Primer Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Standard: ASSE 1018.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.
6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.
7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
B. Drainage Type, Trap Seal Primer Valves:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection.
3. Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum.
4. Material: Chrome plated, cast brass.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 5
2.8 TRAP SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS
A. Trap Seal Primer Systems:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. PPP Inc.
2. Standard: ASSE 1044.
3. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper, water tubing.
4. Cabinet: Recessed mounting steel box with stainless steel cover.
5. Electric Controls: 24 hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120 V ac power.
6. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
C. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure reducing valve and
pump.
D. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
E. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor
drain.
F. Install supply type, trap seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for
proper flow.
G. Install drainage type, trap seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down
toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.
H. Install trap seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
1 percent, and connect to floor drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems.”
C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 6
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic laminate equipment nameplate or
sign on or near each of the following:
1. Pressure vacuum breakers.
2. Intermediate atmospheric vent backflow preventers.
3. Calibrated balancing valves.
4. Supply type, trap seal primer valves.
5. Trap seal primer systems.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section “Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced pressure principle backflow preventer,
double check backflow prevention assembly, and double check detector assembly
backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device’s reference
standard.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified
above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
B. Set field adjustable temperature set points of temperature actuated water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 1
SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Special pipe fittings.
3. Encasement for underground metal piping.
B. Provide new sanitary waste service pipe 5’-0” outside the building for extension under another
division.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section “Sanitary Sewerage Pumps.”
2. Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portion of California State Plumbing
Code pertaining to plumbing materials, construction and installation of products.
B. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable American National Standards pertaining to
products and installation of soil and waste piping systems.
C. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable Plumbing and Drainage Institute Standards
pertaining to products and installation of soil and waste piping systems.
D. Comply with NSF 14, “Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials,” for plastic
piping components. Include marking with “NSF-dwv” for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping;
“NSF-drain” for plastic drain piping; “NSF-tubular” for plastic continuous waste piping; and
“NSF-sewer” for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 “Piping Applications” Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 2
2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.
2.3 HUBLESS CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant
fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated
shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-
steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
3. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-iron
housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
C. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve type, reducing or transition type
mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion resistant metal
tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
2.4 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS (Pending Approval of AHJ)
A. Solid Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40.
B. Cellular Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40.
C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.
2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS (Pending Approval of AHJ)
A. Solid Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste,
and vent patterns.
B. Cellular Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
C. Cellular Core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Series PS 100.
1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Series PS 100 sewer and drain pipe.
2.6 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve type,
reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and
corrosion resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 3
1. Sleeve Materials:
a. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.
c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe
materials being joined.
B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full
length, corrosion resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening
mechanism on each end.
C. Rigid, Unshielded, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve type reducing or
transition type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion
resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve type same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.
1. Center Sleeve Material: Stainless steel, Ductile iron, Malleable iron.
2. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
3. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion resistant coating or material.
E. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends
complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball joint section and ductile
iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts.
F. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s)
with gaskets and restrained type, ductile iron, bell and spigot end sections complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated.
Include AWWA C111, ductile iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
G. Wall Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing
sections for up to 20 degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained joint ends complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for excavating, trenching,
and backfilling. Excavation and backfill is work of this division.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings standard, shielded, couplings; and hubless
coupling joints.
3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.
4. Solid wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.
5. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints. PVC piping not
to be installed within return air plenums.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 4
6. Dissimilar Pipe Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining
dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
B. Aboveground, vent piping shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless steel couplings; and
hubless coupling joints.
3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.
4. Solid wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.
5. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints. PVC piping not
to be installed within return air plenums.
6. Dissimilar Pipe Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining
dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless steel couplings; and
hubless coupling joints.
3. Solid wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.
4. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent cemented joints.
5. Cellular core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent
cemented joints.
6. Dissimilar Pipe Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining
dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section “Common Work
Results for Plumbing.”
B. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
C. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force main piping.
D. Install cast iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22
Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”
E. Install cast iron soil piping according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,”
Chapter IV, “Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.”
1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 5
F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8 bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer’s written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
I. Sleeves are not required for cast iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs on grade if slab
is without membrane waterproofing.
J. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661.
K. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
L. Install underground ABS and PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.
M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section “Common
Work Results for Plumbing.”
B. Join hub and spigot, cast iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for compression joints.
C. Join hub and spigot, cast iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for lead and oakum calked joints.
D. Join hubless cast iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook” for hubless coupling joints.
E. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water flushable, lead free flux; ASTM B 32, lead free alloy
solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 6
F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling and fitting manufacturer’s written instructions.
G. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Provide pipe hangers and supports complying with Division 22 Section “Hangers and Supports
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2
and larger.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 7
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 foot head of water. From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent
stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of
water based latex paint.
END OF SECTION 221316
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 1
SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Floor drains.
4. Trench drains.
5. Roof flashing assemblies.
6. Through penetration firestop assemblies.
7. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
8. Flashing materials.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost resistant vent terminals.
C. Field quality control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, “Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials,” for plastic sanitary
piping specialty components.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 2
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron, ASME A112.3.1 for stainless steel for
cleanout test tee.
3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
4. Body Material: Hubless, cast iron soil pipe test tee, Stainless steel tee with side cleanout
as required to match connected piping.
5. Closure: Countersunk plug.
6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
7. Closure: Stainless steel plug with seal.
B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Kusel Equipment Co.
c. Oatey.
d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.
3. Size: Same as connected branch.
4. Body or Ferrule: Stainless steel.
5. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.
7. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron threads.
8. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel bronze, copper alloy, Stainless steel.
9. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
10. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
11. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
12. Standard: ASME A112.3.1.
13. Size: Same as connected branch.
14. Housing: Stainless steel.
15. Closure: Stainless steel with seal.
16. Riser: Stainless steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.
2.2 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast Iron Floor Drains:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Commercial Enameling Co.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 3
b. Josam Company; Josam Div.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Prier Products, Inc.
e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.
3. Pattern: Floor drain.
4. Body Material: Gray iron.
5. Seepage Flange: Required.
6. Anchor Flange: Required.
7. Clamping Device: Required.
8. Outlet: Bottom.
9. Backwater Valve: Integral, ASME A112.14.1, swing check type.
10. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
11. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.
12. Top Shape: Round.
13. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
14. Funnel: Not required.
15. Trap Material: Bronze.
16. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
17. Trap Features: Trap seal primer valve drain connection.
2.3 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Bluecher
b. Josam Company; Josam Div.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.
3. Material: Ductile or gray iron.
4. Flange: Anchor.
5. Clamping Device: Required.
6. Outlet: Bottom, end or side as indicated on drawings.
7. Grate Material: Ductile iron.
8. Grate Finish: Painted.
9. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
10. Trap Material: Cast iron.
11. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 4
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.
b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.
B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938 inch thick, lead flashing
collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized steel boot reinforcement
and counterflashing fitting.
1. Open Top Vent Cap: Without cap.
2.5 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Through Penetration Firestop Assemblies:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. ProSet Systems Inc.
2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray iron, hubless pattern, wye branch with neoprene
O-ring at base and gray iron plug-in thermal release harness. Include PVC protective cap
for plug.
6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Open Drains:
1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub and spigot, cast
iron, soil pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub and spigot riser section; and where required,
increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting.
B. Deep Seal Traps:
1. Description: Cast iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping
and cleanout trap seal primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.
C. Floor Drain, Trap Seal Primer Fittings:
1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal
primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.
D. Vent Caps:
1. Description: Cast iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal proof design. Include
vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 5
2.7 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft.
C. Zinc Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and
0.04 inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot dip galvanized, mill
phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40 mil minimum
thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent type, bituminous mastic.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feetfor piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 6
E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
3. Install floor drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
F. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
H. Install through penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor
penetrations.
I. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.
J. Install deep seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, where required.
K. Install floor drain, trap seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap seal primer
connection.
1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap seal primer connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
L. Install air gap fittings on draining type backflow preventers and on indirect waste piping
discharge into sanitary drainage system.
M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
N. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
O. Install frost proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1 inch clearance
between vent pipe and roof substrate.
P. Install wood blocking reinforcement for wall mounting type specialties.
Q. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
R. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 7
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches and
skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.”
F. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221319
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223400 - 1
SECTION 223400 – FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fuel-fired water heaters:
1. Commercial, atmospheric, storage, gas water heaters.
2. Compression tanks.
3. Water heater accessories.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LP Gas: Liquefied petroleum fuel gas.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial water heater, signed by product
manufacturer.
D. Source quality control test reports.
E. Field quality control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water
heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section “Product
Requirements.”
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223400 - 2
D. ASME Compliance:
1. Where ASME code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater
storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,
Division 01.
2. Where ASME code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned tube
water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.
E. Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9” for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of fuel-fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
1) Controls and Other Components: Three years.
b. Commercial, Gas Water Heaters:
1) Storage Tank: Five years.
2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 COMMERCIAL, GAS WATER HEATERS
A. Commercial, Atmospheric, Storage, Gas Water Heaters: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.
1. Manufacturers:
a. A.O. Smith.
b. Bradford White Corporation.
c. Lochinvar Corporation.
d. Patterson-Kelly
e. PVI Industries, LLC.
f. Rheem Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.
g. Ruud Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.
h. State Industries, Inc.
2. Storage Tank Construction: ASME code steel with 150 psig working pressure rating.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223400 - 3
a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings
to tank before testing.
1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel
and stainless steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and
copper alloy flanges.
b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
c. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.
3. Factory Installed, Storage Tank Appurtenances:
a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold water inlet is near bottom of tank.
c. Drain Valve: Corrosion resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.
d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank
except connections and controls.
e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f. Burner: For use with atmospheric water heaters and for natural gas fuel.
g. Automatic Ignition: ANSI Z21.20, electric, automatic, gas ignition system.
h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
i. Safety Controls: Automatic, high temperature limit and low water cutoff devices
or systems.
j. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as
heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working pressure
rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
4. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction.
5. Draft Hood: Draft diverter; complying with ANSI Z21.12.
2.3 COMPRESSION TANKS
A. Description: Steel, pressure rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory installed,
butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system operating pressure at tank.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AMTROL Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Honeywell Sparco.
d. Smith, A. O.; Aqua-Air Div.
e. State Industries, Inc.
f. Taco, Inc.
g. Watts Regulator Co.
h. Wessels Co.
2. Construction:
a. Tappings: Factory fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.
Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
c. Air Charging Valve: Factory installed.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223400 - 4
2.4 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CGA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in
piping.
B. Gas Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.
C. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as
great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working pressure rating.
Select each relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
D. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than working pressure rating of water
heater.
1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with
ASME PTC 25.3.
E. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer’s factory fabricated steel bracket
for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.
F. Drain Pans: Corrosion resistant metal with raised edge. Provide dimensions not less than base
of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4.
G. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer’s factory fabricated inlet and outlet piping
arrangement for multiple unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that is
capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water
heater.
H. Piping Type Heat Traps: Field fabricated piping arrangement according to
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.
I. Neutralization Kit: Provide manufacturer’s condensate neutralizer kit on all condensate drains
before discharge to an approved drain.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME code construction, according
to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Prepare test reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
B. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223400 - 5
C. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.
D. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure
regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.
E. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for operation of
safety control.
F. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use
relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial water heater,
relief valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward
pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
G. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters
without storage. Extend commercial water heater relief valve outlet, with drain piping same as
domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto
closest floor drain.
H. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or
over floor drains. Install hose end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters
that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties”
for hose end drain valves.
I. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section “Meters and
Gages for Plumbing Piping” for thermometers.
J. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate,
modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include
shutoff valve and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each
water heater outlet. Refer to Division 22 Section “General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping”
for general duty valves and to Division 22 Section “Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping” for
thermometers.
K. Install piping type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting type heat traps.
L. Fill water heaters with water.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of water heaters.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems.”
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223400 - 6
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
B. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified
above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain commercial water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section
“Demonstration and Training.”
END OF SECTION 223400
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING FIXTURES
224000 - 1
SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes conventional plumbing fixtures and related components.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section “Domestic Water Piping Specialties” floor drains, and specialty
fixtures not included in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Fitting: Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower
heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials
and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,”
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures, trim and accessories:
1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.
2. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction.
3. Stainless-Steel Sinks: ASME A112.19.3.
4. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
5. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.6.
6. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
7. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
8. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
9. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
10. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING FIXTURES
224000 - 2
11. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
12. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
13. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
14. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASSE 1016.
15. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
16. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
17. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
18. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
19. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate rough-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be
installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. Install fixtures at heights
indicated by the Architect and in accordance with Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fixtures, trim and accessories were selected as named in the fixture types on the basis of style,
quality, and finish free from flaws and scratches. Subject to compliance with the requirements,
provide products of one of the following:
1. Vitreous China and Enameled Cast Iron Fixtures: American Standard, Eljer, Kohler.
2. Trim: American Standard, Chicago Faucet, Delta-Commercial, Elkay, Josam, Kohler,
Speakman, Stern, Symmons, T & S Brass, Zurn.
3. Water Closet Seats: American Standard, Bemis, Beneke, Church, Kohler, Olsonite.
4. Chair Carriers and Fixture Supports: Josam, Jay R. Smith, Tyler Pipe/Wade, Watts,
Zurn.
5. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay, Just.
6. Shower Heads/Fittings: American Standard, Chicago Faucet, Delta-Commercial, Eljer,
Kohler, Leonard, Powers, Speakman, Symmons.
7. Flush Valves: Aquavantage, Sloan, Zurn.
8. Service Receptors/Laundry Tubs: Fiat, Jonespec, Mustee, Stern Williams, Swan, Zurn.
9. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Guardian, Leonard, Powers, Symmons.
10. Stops, Supplies and Traps: Brasscraft, Chicago Faucet, Eljer, Kohler, Zurn.
11. ADA Insulation Kit: Handi Lavguard, Plumberex, Truebro.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Stainless Steel Fixtures: Sink bowls shall be at least the depth specified, and finish shall be at
least quality of the sink named.
B. Stop valves shall be loose key stuffing box type polished chrome plated. Supply risers shall be
polished chrome plated flexible copper.
C. Exposed traps, unless otherwise noted, shall be 17 gauge chrome plated brass tubing adjustable
traps with cleanout. No slip joint shall occur below the level of the weir of the trap. Unions on
the sewer side of the trap shall be ground, metal to metal contact, and made watertight without
the use of washers or other packing material.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING FIXTURES
224000 - 3
D. ADA Insulation Kit: Provide fully molded, flexible vinyl insulation system. System shall meet
all ADA requirements. Include P-trap insulation, hot and cold water angle valve insulation and
fasteners. Shall be white in color.
E. All fixtures fitted to walls shall have the mating surface ground square and true.
F. All lavatories, urinals and water closets to be white vitreous china.
2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORT
A. Fixture Supports: Wall hung fixtures shall be supported by means of chair carriers, except as
otherwise specified.
B. Lavatories and Sinks: All wall hung lavatories and sinks shall be supported by means of a chair
carrier with rectangular steel uprights and integral steel feet, supporting arms and sleeves
mounted on adjustable steel headers (with escutcheons for slab type lavatory). System shall be
complete with alignment tresses and mounting fasteners.
C. Water Closets: Wall hung water closets shall be supported by means of an approved
combination soil pipe fitting and closet carrier with stub feet for bolting to floor of a type as
required by the fixture and wall construction.
D. Urinals: Shall be supported by means of a chair carrier with stub feet at floor and overhead
construction, continuous pipe supports, plates, bolts, etc., of a type as required by the fixture
and the building construction.
E. Wall hung fixtures, except water closets, may be supported from back wall plates where wall
thickness cannot accommodate chair carriers.
2.4 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Refer to plumbing fixture schedule on drawings for make, model and accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Determine rough-in requirements for water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping
systems and supports, and verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture
installation. Follow manufacturer’s rough-in data for all fixtures.
B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers’
written instructions.
B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING FIXTURES
224000 - 4
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures, wall
mounted water closets, and urinals.
4. Wall hung fixtures, except water closets, may be supported from back wall plates where
wall thickness cannot accommodate chair carriers. Where wall hung fixtures are
mounted on stud walls, provide 18 gauge sheet steel plates screwed or spot welded to the
surface of the studs in accordance with the following schedule:
Fixture Length to
Height of plate Attach To
Lavatories 8” 4 studs
Water Coolers 18” 3 studs
Urinals 24” 3 studs
C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building
substrate.
E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall
bracket and onto waste fitting seals.
G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturer’s written instructions and roughing-
in drawings.
I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
J. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary
drainage system.
K. Install waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.
L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide
side of compartment.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect fixtures to plumbing piping with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil,
waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PLUMBING FIXTURES
224000 - 5
C. Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Divisions:
Connect fixtures and equipment to plumbing piping with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and
waste piping specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment.
D. Provide transformer and all low voltage wiring and connections from electrically operated
sensor fixtures to transformer. Install in accordance with Division 26 requirements.
E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems.”
F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables.”
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.
B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
Replace washers and seals of leaking faucets and stops.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly. Verify proper flow and stream.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers’ recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
3.7 MISCELLANEOUS
A. For all other equipment (not specifically herein mentioned), furnished under other contracts or
by the Owner, requiring water, waste, and vent piping (see drawings), provide same, making all
final connections as required. Water piping to all equipment shall be valved.
B. Provide vacuum breakers where required by Code and/or as indicated on the drawings.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
224700 - 1
SECTION 224700 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following fixtures and related components:
1. Water coolers.
2. Drinking fountains.
3. Fixture supports.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,”
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
C. ARI Standard: Comply with ARI 1010, “Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-
Water Coolers,” for water coolers and with ARI’s “Directory of Certified Drinking Water
Coolers” for type and style classifications.
D. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 34, “Designation and Safety Classification of
Refrigerants,” for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant, unless
otherwise indicated.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate rough-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be
installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. Install fixtures at heights
indicated by the Architect and in accordance with Code.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
224700 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fixtures, trim and accessories were selected as named in the fixture types on the basis of style,
quality, and finish free from flaws and scratches. Subject to compliance with the requirements,
provide products of one of the following:
1. Chair Carriers and Fixture Supports: Josam, Jay R. Smith, Tyler Pipe/Wade, Watts,
Zurn.
2. Water Coolers/Drinking Fountains: Elkay, Filtrine, Halsey Taylor, Haws, Oasis,
Stern-Williams, Sunroc.
2.2 WATER COOLERS / BOTTLE FILLER
A. Refer to plumbing fixture schedule on drawings for make, model and accessories.
2.3 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet
and tie rods and bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported.
1. Type I: Hanger-type carrier with two vertical uprights.
2. Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with three vertical uprights.
3. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of
steel pipe uprights.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Determine rough-in requirements for water and waste piping systems and verify actual locations
of piping connections before fixture installation. Follow manufacturer’s rough-in data for all
fixtures.
B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-mounting fixtures, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Install mounting frames affixed to building construction and attach recessed water coolers to
mounting frames, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install fixtures level and plumb according to the manufacturer’s written instructions. For
fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Install water-supply piping on supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution
piping.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
224700 - 3
E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage
system.
F. Install chrome plated pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use
deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are
specified in Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”
G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,
silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect fixtures to plumbing piping with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil,
waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems.”
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables.”
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Water Cooler Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper
flow and stream height. Adjust water cooler temperature settings.
1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,
and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
END OF SECTION 224700
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500 - 1
SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. HVAC demolition.
9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
10. Painting and finishing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Dielectric fittings.
2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
B. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, “Structural
Welding Code - Steel.”
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, “Code for Pressure Piping.”
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics
may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting
electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum
energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500 - 2
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Mechanical drawings are symbolic and diagrammatic and are intended to show only the general
scheme, equipment involved and the approximate locations of materials and equipment.
Coordinate installation of systems with other trades to avoid conflicts. Notify Engineer of
unresolvable conflicts prior to fabrication and installation of systems.
B. Obtain dimensions from the Architectural drawings wherever possible instead of scaling the
Mechanical drawings. Consult the Architectural drawings for details of construction, location
of suspended ceilings and other pertinent information. Architect’s drawings, however, shall not
take precedence over field measurements. Carefully investigate the structural and finish
conditions affecting the work and arrange the work accordingly.
C. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and
accessories, which may be required. Furnish all fittings, traps, valves and accessories as may be
required to meet such conditions.
D. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
E. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08
Section “Access Doors and Frames.”
G. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings for all floors to a scale of 1/8” = 1’-0”
or larger, detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and
materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate
locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and
coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but
not necessarily limited to) the following:
1. Indicate the proposed locations of major HVAC, piping, plumbing, and fire protection
systems, equipment, and materials. Include the following:
a. Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly
required for periodic maintenance.
b. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
c. Fire rated wall and floor penetrations.
d. Equipment connections and support details.
e. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
f. Exact locations of new ductwork and piping relative to floor, shafts, underside of
construction, HVAC ducts and piping, electrical raceway, and conduit, etc.
g. Drawings shall be reviewed and signed by authorized representatives of all
construction trades.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500 - 3
2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the
building during construction.
3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and
ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full Face Type: For flat face, Class 125, cast iron and cast bronze flanges.
b. Narrow Face Type: For raised face, Class 250, cast iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead free alloys. Include water flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper phosphorus alloys for general duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500 - 4
2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer’s
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent cement
joint end.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer’s SDR 11 equivalent
dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent cement joint end.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include
brass end, solvent cement joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder
joint, plain, or weld neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory fabricated, union assembly, for 250 psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Flange Kits: Companion flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full
face or ring type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150 or 300 psig minimum
working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300 psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500 - 5
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
2.6 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 0.0239 inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated “wall pipe” equivalent to ductile iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80.
2.7 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep Pattern Type: Deep drawn, box shaped brass with polished chrome plated
finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome plated.
D. One-Piece, Stamped Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome plated finish.
E. Split Plate, Stamped Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome
plated finish.
2.8 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28 day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.9 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS
A. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section “Access Doors and Frames.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500 - 6
3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section “Cutting and Patching” and Division 02 Section “Selective
Structure Demolition” for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be
removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork
material.
5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and
quality.
D. Patch existing construction where disturbed by work of this Division.
1. Work shall be done by skilled mechanics experienced in the particular type of work
involved. Patching and remodeling work shall conform to the standards of the
specifications of the Project, where applicable; where not specified, work shall conform
to the highest standards of the trade.
2. Existing construction that has been damaged as a result of the Work shall be repaired to
an extent and as required to match adjacent existing undamaged construction.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. Because of the small scale of the
drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories that may be required.
Furnish all fittings, traps, valves and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions.
C. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
D. Install escutcheons for penetrations of finished walls, ceilings, and floors.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500 - 7
E. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. PVC or Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. PVC sleeves are
prohibited in air plenums.
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section
“Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim” for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and installation.
F. Aboveground, Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast iron “wall pipes” for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required
for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
G. Underground, Exterior Wall or Slab on Grade Pipe Penetrations: Install cast iron “wall pipes”
for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow
for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required
for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure
plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
H. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07
Section “Penetration Firestopping” for materials.
I. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in.
J. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing in
requirements.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500 - 8
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA’s “Copper Tube Handbook,” using
lead free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Brazing Handbook,” “Pipe and Tube”
Chapter, using copper phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 “Quality Assurance” Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other than schedule number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer’s written instructions.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500 - 9
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections
“Interior Painting” and “Exterior Painting.”
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.7 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
230500 - 10
3.8 ACCESS TO MECHANICAL WORK
A. Provide access panels for any device that requires access for servicing and/or maintenance.
Coordinate locations with General Contractor.
B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for installation of access doors, floor doors, and
removable access plates.
C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level
in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.
D. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
E. Remove or replace panels or frames which are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 230500
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
230513 - 1
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer’s factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, variable frequency controllers, installed units, and accessory
devices to be compatible with the following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
5. Variable frequency controllers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
230513 - 2
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G. Temperature Rise: Class B.
H. Insulation: Class F.
I. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer’s standard starting characteristic.
J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers:
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
2. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
3. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
4. Provide shaft grounding system.
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
230513 - 3
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 230513
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 1
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and
equipment:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Pipe stands.
7. Equipment supports.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and
installation of supports and anchors.
B. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are Underwriters Laboratories listed and
Factory Mutual approved.
C. MSS Standard Compliance:
1. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply
with ANSI/MSS SP-58.
2. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
“Hanger and Support Applications” Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
3. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
4. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.
5. Grinnell Corp.
6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
C. Copper Clad Hangers: For use with copper piping.
D. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped
E. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
F. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop or field fabricated pipe support assembly made from
structural steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop or field fabricated pipe support assembly made of steel channels
and other components.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
3. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
4. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C. Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.4 THERMAL HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Description: 100-psig minimum, compressive strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal
shield.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 3
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
3. Pipe Shields, Inc.
C. Insulation Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate with vapor barrier.
D. Insulation Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I
calcium silicate.
E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Threaded steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
B. Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
2.6 PIPE STAND FABRICATION
A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion
resistant components to support roof mounted piping.
2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop or field fabricated equipment support made from structural steel
shapes.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory mixed and packaged, dry, hydraulic cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings or copper clad hangers on attachments for electrolytic protection
where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Yoke Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes,
NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3. Carbon or Alloy Steel, Double Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow
off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split or Solid Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
9. Adjustable, Swivel Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 5
16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion
support and cast iron floor flange.
17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from
2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if
small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition
to expansion and contraction.
G. Vertical Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2. Carbon or Alloy Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4
to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
H. Hanger Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4. Center Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8. Side Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 6
10. Linked Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel
I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
12. Welded Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
13. Side Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts or Wood Blocking: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Spring Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
7. Variable Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical type supports and one trapeze member.
L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 7
M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
N. Use powder actuated fasteners or mechanical expansion anchors instead of building attachments
where required in concrete construction.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C. Thermal Hanger Shield or Wood Blocking Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for
insulated piping.
D. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder actuated tool manufacturer’s operating manual.
2. Install mechanical expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
E. Pipe Stand Installation:
1. Pipe Stand Types: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not
penetrate roof membrane.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded structural steel shapes.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2, and at
changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts
to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 8
K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight
distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
N. Maximum hanger spacing and minimum rod size pipe shall be as scheduled below. The
maximum allowable load column includes a safety factor of 5 and is to be used to calculate rod
sizes for trapeze hangers and equipment hanging.
1. Provide hangers for cast iron soil pipe at 5 foot intervals, except 10 foot intervals where
10 foot lengths are used.
2. Provide hangers at 32 inch intervals for plastic pipe.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 9
3. Hanger Schedule:
Pipe Size Steel Copper Min. Rod Diameter
& Max. allow. load
1/2” & 3/4” 7’ 5’ 3/8” 610 lbs.
1” & 1-1/4” 6’ 5’ 3/8” 610 lbs.
1-1/2” 9’ 8’ 3/8” 610 lbs.
2” 9’ 8’ 3/8” 610 lbs.
2-1/2” 10’ 9’ 1/2” 1130 lbs.
3” & larger 10’ 10’ 1/2” 1130 lbs.
3/4” 2710 lbs.
7/8” 3770 lbs.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 10
HANGER AND SUPPORT TYPE CHART
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 11
END OF SECTION 230529
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230548 - 1
SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes HVAC piping and equipment vibration controls as herein specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
B. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural
Welding Code - Steel.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATOR DESIGNATION
A. Refer to the following vibration isolator designation for description. See Equipment Isolation
Schedule at end of this Section for type and deflection.
B. TYPE A SPRING MOUNTING WITH VERTICAL LIMIT STOPS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mason Industries.
b. Peabody Noise Control Inc.
c. Vibration Mountings & Controls.
2. Free standing with sound deadening pads and leveling bolts with limit stops. Spring
diameter-to-compressed operating spring height ratio – 1 to 1. Spring loaded minimum
additional available travel – 50% of rated defection.
C. TYPE B NEOPRENE AND SPRING
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mason Industries.
b. Vibration Mountings & Controls.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230548 - 2
2. Combination spring and double deflection neoprene element in series. Spring diameter to
compressed operating spring height ratio of 0.8 or greater. Spring loaded minimum
additional available travel 50% of rated deflection. Spring diameter and hanger box hole
large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the
box.
D. TYPE C SPRING
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mason Industries.
b. Vibration Mountings & Controls.
2. Combination spring and double deflection neoprene hanger in series. Precompressed by
the manufacturer to the rated deflection to keep piping or equipment at a fixed elevation
during installation. Spring diameter to compressed operating spring height ratio of 0.8 or
greater. Spring loaded minimum additional travel 50% of rated deflection. Spring
diameter and hanger box hole large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through a
30 degree arc before contacting the box.
E. TYPE F VERTICAL PIPING ANCHOR AND GUIDE ISOLATORS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mason Industries.
2. Acoustical pipe anchor and guide isolators consisting of telescopic arrangement of two
sizes steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2” thickness of heavy duty neoprene and
duct or neoprene isolation material. Vertical restraints by similar method to prevent
vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material not to exceed
500 PSI with a balanced design for equal resistance in any direction.
F. TYPE G DUCTWORK SPRING ISOLATOR HANGERS:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Mason Industries.
2. Spring type isolation hangers. Spring diameter minimum .8 of spring operating height.
Minimum additional spring travel before going solid 50% of rated deflection. Spring
diameter and hanger box lower hole large enough to permit hanger rod to swing through
30 arc before contacting box. Spring precompressed at factory by manufacturer.
Furnish eye bolts for attachment to ductwork straps.
G. TYPE H VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURB
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Thycurb, A Division of Thybar Corp.
2. Factory fabricated combination roof mounting curb and vibration eliminator base. The
vibration eliminating portion of the assembly shall be constructed of structural steel and
designed to match perfectly the bottom of the equipment. The roof curb shall be
complete with wood nailing strip and continuous 8” rubber watertight counter flashing.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230548 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations
before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EQUIPMENT ISOLATION
A. Provide hose or connector isolators on suction and discharge of all rotating and reciprocating
equipment.
B. Galvanize isolator body and cadmium plate isolator springs in outdoor applications.
C. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
D. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
3.3 PIPING ISOLATION
A. Isolate all piping connected to isolated mechanical equipment within the confines of the
mechanical equipment room but for not less than 50’. Isolator types will be as follows:
B. Spring deflections - first 3 supports - equal to connected isolated equipment but not less than
.75”. Balance of supports .75” deflection.
C. Floor mounted Type A.
D. Ceiling suspended Type C (first 3 supports) and Type B thereafter.
E. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
F. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
3.4 RISER ISOLATION
A. Suspend or support risers by Type F hangers or Type A mountings and anchor or guide risers
with Type F isolators. Minimum spring deflections of .75” except in those expansion locations
where additional deflection is required to limit deflection or load transfer to plus or minus 25%
of initial stress.
B. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230548 - 4
3.5 DUCTWORK ISOLATION
A. Isolate all ductwork over 4” static pressure connected to isolated equipment within the confines
of the mechanical equipment room but not less than 50’. Isolate from the building structure by
means of Type G hangers or Type A floor mountings.
B. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
PART 4 - EQUIPMENT ISOLATION SCHEDULE
4.1 EQUIPMENT ISOLATION
EQUIPMENT LOCATION ISOLATION
TYPE
TOTAL
DEFLECTION
Utility Set Fan Roof/Mechanical Rooms on Upper
Floors
B – D 2.0 inches
Compressor/Condenser Unit Roof B 2.5 inches
Compressor/Condenser Unit Roof H 2.5 inches
END OF SECTION 230548
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 1
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Plastic tape.
3. Duct labels.
4. Stencils.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
D. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion of stenciling
and include used stencils in maintenance materials.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors and viewing angles of
identification devices.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: White.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 2
3. Background Color: Black.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering
two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment’s unique equipment number.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch
(A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing Room
numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules). Equipment schedule
shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: White.
C. Background Color: Black.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to
three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Provide the following sign for chilled water cooling coils with no glycol in the
system: “Drain chilled water cooling coil when outdoor temperature reaches 35F and blow out
with compressed air. Flush with 50% ethylene glycol/water solution and blow out again.”
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction, complying with ANSI A13.1.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 3
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
2.4 PLASTIC TAPE
A. General: Manufacturer’s standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not
less than 3 mils thick.
B. Width: Provide 1-1/2 inches wide tape markers for pipes 6 inches or larger and provide 3/4 inch
wide tape markers for pipes less than 6 inches.
C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.
2.5 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter
height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and
door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.
2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel, black unless otherwise indicated. Paint
may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
C. Provide equipment labels for the following general categories of equipment and operational
devices:
1. Fuel-burning units including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills and absorption units.
2. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units and similar
equipment.
3. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers and mixing boxes.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 4
3.3 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Stenciled Duct Label: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction.
B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of
50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
END OF SECTION 230553
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 1
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
2. Kitchen hood airflow balancing.
3. Existing systems TAB.
4. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
5. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC’s “National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems” or NEBB’s “Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.”
D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC’s “National Standards
for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems” and NEBB’s
“Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems,”
Section II, “Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification.”
E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently
if required by instrument manufacturer.
1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 2
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner’s
operations.
B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner’s
operations.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other contractors to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
B. Notice: Provide seven days’ advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems’ designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
D. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
E. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC’s “National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning Systems” or NEBB’s “Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
of Environmental Systems” and this Section.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 3
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-
control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer’s outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
3.4 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. Work with the Temperature Control
Contractor to verify minimum outside air damper positions and air quantities as well as to
determine static pressure setpoints for individual systems.
3.5 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in a
binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems in the format
recommended by applicable standards.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
3.6 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak
summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 1
SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials:
a. Calcium silicate.
b. Cellular glass.
c. Flexible elastomeric.
d. Mineral fiber.
e. Polystyrene.
2. Fire rated insulation systems (kitchen hood exhaust ductwork).
3. Field applied fabric reinforcing mesh.
4. Field applied jackets.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 Section “Plumbing Insulation.”
2. Division 23 Section “Metal Ducts” for duct liners.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire test response
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed
index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame spread index of 75 or less, and smoke developed
index of 150 or less.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 2
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F. Calcium Silicate:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold.
2. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat, curved, and grooved block sections of noncombustible,
inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply
with ASTM C 533, Type I.
3. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,
hermetically sealed cells. Factory applied jacket requirements are specified in “Factory Applied
Jackets” Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.
b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 2.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 3
6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed cell, sponge or expanded rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
I. Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory applied jacket
requirements are specified in “Factory Applied Jackets” Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b. Johns Manville; Microlite.
c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
J. Mineral Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide
insulation with factory applied ASJ. For equipment applications, provide insulation with
factory applied ASJ. Factory applied jacket requirements are specified in “Factory Applied
Jackets” Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
K. Mineral Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
L. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation.
Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall
not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.038 W/m x K) after 180 days of aging. Fabricate
shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam.
b. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 4
2.2 FIELD APPLIED FABRIC REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Glass Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count
of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch for covering pipe and pipe fittings.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
B. Woven Glass Fiber Fabric for Duct and Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd.
with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch for covering equipment.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Chil-Glas No. 5.
C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by
10 strands/sq. inch, in a Leno weave, for duct, equipment, and pipe.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.
b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
2.3 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. PVC Jacket: High impact resistant, UV resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
Thickness is indicated in field applied jacket schedules.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45 and 90 degree, short and long radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and
supply covers for lavatories.
5. Factory fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
C. Metal Jacket:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.
b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005,
3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.
3. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including
fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 6
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer’s recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self sealing lap.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush
with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 7
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through wall penetrations.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves
to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated.
For penetrations through fire rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves
and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation.
Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire rated assemblies.
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 8
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word “UNION.”
Match size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless
steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces
with a metal jacket.
3.6 FIELD APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch thick coats of lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 9
3.7 FINISHES
A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09
painting Sections.
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket
material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer’s recommended protective coating.
C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.
3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Application Requirements: Insulate the following metal ductwork:
1. All HVAC systems’ supply ductwork, except ductwork exposed in conditioned spaces.
2. HVAC systems’ return air ductwork, except ductwork located in ceiling return plenums,
and return ductwork exposed in conditioned spaces.
3. HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory.
4. Outdoor air intake ductwork and mixed air ductwork between exterior air entrance and
supply fan or HVAC unit inlet.
5. Relief air ductwork between main return duct and relief outlet.
6. HVAC supply and return ductwork located outside of building (include metal jacket
covering).
7. HVAC supply and return sound attenuators.
8. Combustion air intake ductwork.
9. All 100% exhaust or relief ductwork in unheated spaces or attics.
B. Insulate each ductwork system with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:
1. Rigid fiberglass; 1-1/2 inch thick. Increase thickness to 2 inches in machine, fan and
equipment rooms. Supply and return ductwork located in unheated/uncooled attic spaces
shall be insulated with 3 inch thickness. Increase insulation to 3 inch thickness on
ductwork located outside of building. Protect all ductwork outside of building with
aluminum jacketing.
2. Flexible fiberglass; 1-1/2 inch thick. Application limited to concealed locations.
3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. COLD PIPE Insulation Thickness (inch) (Based on K value of 4.0 to 4.6)
PIPE SIZE (inch)
SERVICE Runouts* 1 or less 1-1/4 to 2 2-1/2 to 4 5 to 6 8 & larger
Refrig. Suction ***
40-55ºF (Interior)
1/2 1 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/2
Refrig. Suction ***
40-55ºF (Exterior)
N/A 2 2 2 2-1/2 2-1/2
Cooling Coil Drain Pan
Waste **
1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HVAC INSULATION
230700 - 10
* Runouts 2 inch pipe size and smaller and 12 ft. long or less.
** May be fiberglass or equal “R” value of flexible unicellular.
*** May be fiberglass or flexible unicellular, except where exposed to weather it shall be flexible unicellular
painted, or metal jacketed fiberglass.
**** Shall be fiberglass.
B. Encase pipe insulation exposed in finished rooms from floor to 6 feet above floor with
aluminum jacketing.
C. Repair of Existing Insulation: Wherever covering on existing covered lines or equipment is
damaged due to this work, or omitted through construction which has been removed as part of
the project, it shall be repaired or replaced and shall match new insulation.
D. Specified in Division 23 Section “Metal Ducts”, underground ductwork shall be insulated with
1 inch thick polystyrene insulation on sides and bottom of duct.
E. Responsibility for Covering Materials: The Contractor shall be responsible for all covering
until the building is accepted. If to prevent mildewing and deterioration of the covering, it is
necessary to provide ventilation, the Contractor shall furnish, install and wire temporary fans for
this purpose.
F. Protective Coating of Elastomeric Insulated Surfaces: Protect all surfaces of elastomeric
insulation with one coat of paint. Color shall be as directed. Paint shall be Insco as
manufactured by the H.B. Fuller Company, or Insulcap as manufactured by the
Glidden Company.
G. Paint all surfaces of vapor barrier jacket insulation where the pipes, ducts, and equipment are
exposed in rooms. Paint shall be Insco or Insulcap, same as specified above, as a primer for
further painting.
H. Insulation of Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing
outdoor protective finish or jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer or as specified.
3.10 INDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory applied jacket, install the
field applied jacket over the factory applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor’s option.
3.11 OUTDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory applied jacket, install the
field applied jacket over the factory applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor’s option.
3.12 UNDERGROUND, FIELD INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET
A. For underground direct buried piping applications, install underground direct buried jacket over
insulation material.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 1
SECTION 231123 – NATURAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section: “Common Work Results for HVAC” for required piping
specialties.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide a gas distribution to gas fired equipment, including making final gas connections to
each gas burning appliance.
B. Trenching and backfill required in conjunction with gas service piping is specified in applicable
Division 22 Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”
C. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of California State Building Code,
NBFO and AGA.
D. Local Utility Compliance: Comply with requirements of local gas utility company.
E. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2. Piping specialties.
3. Piping and tubing joining materials.
4. Valves.
5. Pressure regulators.
6. Mechanical sleeve seals.
7. Grout.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Piping specialties.
2. Corrugated, stainless steel tubing with associated components.
3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of
selected models.
4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, “National Fuel Gas Code.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 2
B. FM Standard: Provide components listed in FM’s “Fire Protection Approval Guide” if specified
to be FM approved.
C. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS’s “Directory of A.G.A. and C.G.A. Certified
Appliances and Accessories” if specified to be IAS listed.
D. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL’s “Gas and Oil Equipment Directory” if
specified to be UL listed.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory applied protective coatings to avoid damaging
coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas
service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Owner’s written
permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind
finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section “Access Doors and
Frames.”
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements:
1. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without written permission.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.
1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with
dimensions matching PE pipe.
2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with
ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel,
Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
3. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE
pipe.
a. PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring.
b. Buna-nitrile seals.
c. Acetal collets.
d. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener.
4. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 and Larger: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe,
steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.
a. Fiber-reinforced plastic body.
b. PE body tube.
c. Buna-nitrile seals.
d. Acetal collets.
e. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
5. Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe
to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.
a. Stainless-steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.
b. Buna-nitrile seals.
c. Stainless-steel bolts, washers, and nuts.
d. Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed underground.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.
2. Wrought Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket
welding.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends.
4. Forged Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including
bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
a. Material Group: 1.1.
b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.
c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,
and spiral wound metal gaskets.
e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel
underground.
5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory applied, three layer coating of
epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat shrink PE sleeves.
C. Annealed Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K, ASTM B 88, Type L
(ASTM B 88M, Type B).
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 4
1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern.
2. Protective Coating for Underground Tubing: Factory applied, extruded PE a minimum of
0.022 inch thick.
2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1. Indoor, Fixed Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.
2. Indoor, Movable Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.
3. Corrugated stainless steel tubing with polymer coating.
4. Operating Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.
5. End Fittings: Zinc coated steel.
6. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
7. Maximum Length: 72 inches
B. Quick Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.
1. Copper alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.
2. Nitrile seals.
3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.
4. For indoor or outdoor applications.
5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.
C. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See “Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule” Articles for where each valve type is
applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig
2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in “Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule” and “Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule”
Articles.
5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
valves 1 inch and smaller.
6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials “WOG” permanently
marked on valve body.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 5
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.
2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in “Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule” and “Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule”
Articles.
4. Service Mark: Initials “WOG” shall be permanently marked on valve body.
D. Two Piece, Full Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3. Ball: Chrome plated bronze.
4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
6. Packing: Threaded body packnut design with adjustable stem packing.
7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in “Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule” and “Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule” Articles.
8. CWP Rating: 600 psig.
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with “WOG” indicated on valve body.
E. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Lee Brass Company.
b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3. Plug: Bronze.
4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in “Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule” and “Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule” Articles.
5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
6. Pressure Class: 125 psig.
7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with “WOG” indicated on valve body.
2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. General Requirements:
1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.
2. Steel jacket and corrosion resistant components.
3. Elevation compensator.
4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators
NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 6
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Meter Company.
b. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.
d. Maxitrol Company.
2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
3. Springs: Zinc plated steel; interchangeable.
4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc plated steel.
5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet stabilized, mineral filled nylon.
8. Single port, self contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed
150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory or field installed, stainless steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.
b. Maxitrol Company.
2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.
3. Springs: Zinc plated steel; interchangeable.
4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc plated steel.
5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet stabilized, mineral filled nylon.
7. Factory Applied Finish: Minimum three layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.
8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.6 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid and alkali resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,
continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective
jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches
deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 7
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.
B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural-gas utilization
devices are turned off in piping section affected.
C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.
3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply
with requirements in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for excavating, trenching, and
backfilling.
1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in a
vented containment conduit.
C. Install underground PE natural gas piping according to ASTM D2774.
D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
E. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
G. Aboveground, Exterior and Underground, Exterior Wall Pipe Penetrations Mechanical Sleeve
Seal Installation: Interior wall penetration sleeves and sleeve seals are specified in Division 23
Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.”
H. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in
Division 23 Section “Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping.”
3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 8
D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G. Locate valves for easy access.
H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Install escutcheons at penetrations of finished interior walls, ceilings, and floors. Escutcheons
are specified in Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.”
L. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Fire barrier penetrations are specified in Division 23 Section
“Common Work Results for HVAC.”
M. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for
roughing-in requirements.
N. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including
service meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate is subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and
same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or
cap.
O. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure
protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
P. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
Q. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas
piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe
with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to
outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be
installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.
2. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from
physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.
a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker
barriers.
3. Prohibited Locations:
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 9
a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash
chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator
shafts.
b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.
R. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
S. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
T. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
U. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
V. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated
valve.
W. Install pressure gage downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in
Division 23 Section “Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping.”
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless steel
tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.
C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate
for servicing and testing.
D. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings in accordance with Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for
HVAC,” and the following:
1. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare
dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not
overtighten.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Provide hangers, supports, and anchor devices complying with Division 23 Section “Hangers
and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 10
B. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within
72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and
appliances or equipment.
C. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance.
3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section “Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment” for piping and valve identification. Install detectable warning tape directly above
gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements
and slabs.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.11 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior underground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:
1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers
with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.
2. Steel pipe with wrought steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat
pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
3. Drawn temper copper tube with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints. Coat pipe and
fittings with protective coating for copper tubing.
B. Exterior aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:
1. Galvanized steel pipe with malleable iron fittings and threaded joints.
2. Galvanized steel pipe with wrought steel fittings and welded joints.
3.12 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable iron fittings and threaded joints.
2. Steel pipe with wrought steel fittings and welded joints.
3. Drawn temper copper tube with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints.
B. Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable iron fittings and threaded joints.
2. Steel pipe with wrought steel fittings and welded joints.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
NATURAL GAS PIPING
231123 - 11
C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and
fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
D. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable iron fittings and threaded or
wrought steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
3.13 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Distribution piping valves shall be one of the following:
1. Two piece, full port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
2. Bronze plug valve.
3. Cast iron, lubricated plug valve.
END OF SECTION 231123
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 1
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for HVAC” for required piping specialties.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:
1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.
2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.
3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop, based on manufacturer’s test data, for the following:
1. Thermostatic expansion valves.
2. Solenoid valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Filter dryers.
5. Strainers.
6. Pressure regulating valves.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Field quality control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in
maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”
B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, “Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems.”
C. Comply with ASME B31.5, “Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components.”
D. IMC Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with “International
Mechanical Code” and State Code.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 2
1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior
and exterior are clean when installed.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.
B. Wrought Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper
socket fittings on copper pipe.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced
protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Socket ends.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4 inch misalignment in minimum 7 inch
long assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; Type, Grade, and wall thickness as
selected in Part 3 piping applications articles.
B. Wrought Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, for welded joints.
C. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, steel, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets,
bevel welded end connection, and raised face.
D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
E. Flanged Unions:
1. Body: Ductile iron for NPS 2 to NPS 3. Apply rust resistant finish at factory.
2. Gasket: Fiber asbestos free.
3. Fasteners: Four plated steel bolts, with silicon bronze nuts. Apply rust resistant finish at
factory.
4. End Connections: Brass tailpiece adapters for solder end connections to copper tubing.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 3
5. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4 inch misalignment in minimum 7 inch
long assembly.
6. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 400 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 330 deg F.
F. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Stainless steel bellows with woven, flexible, stainless steel wire reinforced
protective jacket
2. End Connections:
a. NPS 2 and Larger: With flanged end connections.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4 inch misalignment in minimum 7 inch
long assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or
angle pattern.
2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless steel spring.
3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.
4. Seat: Nylon.
5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
B. Packed Angle Valves:
1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.
3. Operator: Rising stem.
4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.
5. Seal Cap: Forged brass or valox hex cap.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.
7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
C. Check Valves:
1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.
2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.
3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.
4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.
5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated steel stem, and graphite seal.
6. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.
7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.
8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
D. Service Valves:
1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
2. Core: Removable ball type check valve with stainless steel spring.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 4
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Copper spring.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location
with 1/2” (16-GRC) conduit adapter, and 24 or 115-Volt ac coil.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
8. Manual operator.
F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled
by an NRTL.
1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.
2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
4. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.
1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.
2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.
5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.
6. Superheat: Adjustable.
7. Reverse flow option (for heat pump applications only).
8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.
9. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig.
H. Straight Type Strainers:
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion resistant coating.
2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.
3. End Connections: Socket or flare.
4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
I. Angle Type Strainers:
1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.
2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.
3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.
4. End Connections: Socket or flare.
5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
J. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 5
1. Body: Forged brass.
2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by
filter screen.
3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.
4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.
5. End Connections: Socket or flare.
6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
K. Replaceable Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.
1. Body and Cover: Painted steel shell with ductile iron cover, stainless steel screws, and
neoprene gaskets.
2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless steel support.
3. Desiccant Media: Activated charcoal.
4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat pump applications only).
5. End Connections: Socket.
6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential
measurement.
7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.
8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
L. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.
1. Body and Cover: Painted steel shell.
2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless steel support.
3. Desiccant Media: Activated charcoal.
4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat pump applications only).
5. End Connections: Socket.
6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4” connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure
differential measurement.
7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.
8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
M. Mufflers:
1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion resistant coating.
2. End Connections: Socket or flare.
3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A
A. Suction Lines for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, drawn
temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper
fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 6
2. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper
fittings with 95-5 tin antimony soldered joints.
3. NPS 2: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with
Alloy HB soldered joints.
4. NPS 4: Schedule 40, black steel and wrought steel fittings with welded joints.
C. Safety Relief Valve Discharge Piping:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper
fittings with brazed or soldered joints.
2. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper
fittings with 95-5 tin antimony soldered joints.
3. NPS 2: Copper, Type ACR, drawn temper tubing and wrought copper fittings with
Alloy HB soldered joints.
4. NPS 4: Schedule 40, black steel and wrought steel fittings with welded joints.
3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A. Install diaphragm packless or packed angle valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.
B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if
they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.
C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor
suction connection.
D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless or packed angle valves on inlet and
outlet side of filter dryers.
E. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
F. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.
1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do
not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction line
pressure at bulb location.
G. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe
safety relief valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.
H. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or
at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.
I. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an
integral assembly for device being protected:
1. Solenoid valves.
2. Thermostatic expansion valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Compressor.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 7
J. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in
the suction line at the compressor.
K. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump down charge.
L. Install flexible connectors at compressors.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
J. Refer to Division 23 Sections “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” and “Sequence of
Operations for HVAC Controls” for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of
operation.
K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and
specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or
panels if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.
M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.
N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 8
O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve
stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near expansion valve bulb.
P. Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the following
procedures:
1. Shot blast the interior of piping.
2. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing
by means of a wire or electrician’s tape.
3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe.
Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.
4. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube
or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.
5. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.
6. Safety relief valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be
open to allow unrestricted flow.
Q. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
R. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
S. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation.
T. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full thickness
insulation.
U. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls.
V. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section “Identification for
HVAC Piping and Equipment.”
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide), during brazing or welding,
to prevent scale formation.
D. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA’s “Copper Tube
Handbook.”
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Brazing Handbook,” Chapter “Pipe and
Tube.”
1. Use Type BcuP, copper phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper
pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 9
F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hanger, support, and anchor devices complying with Division 23 Section “Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.”
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test
pressure.
3. Test high and low pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the
pressures indicated in Part 1 “Performance Requirements” Article.
a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of
test.
c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount
of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 300 micrometers. Close the
vacuum line. If vacuum holds at least 500 micrometers for one hour without the
assistance of a vacuum pump, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
4. Charge system with a new filter dryer core in charging line.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
B. Adjust high and low pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning controllers to the system design temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer’s written instructions:
1. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 10
2. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
3. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
4. Check open compressor motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow
rates and pressures are established.
END OF SECTION 232300
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 1
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution
systems in pressure classes from minus 2 to plus 10 inch wg. Metal ducts include the following:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2. Single wall, round, and flat oval spiral seam ducts and formed fittings.
3. Duct liner.
B. Refer to Part 4 – Schedule.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section “Air Duct Accessories” for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-
mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
2. Division 23 Section “HVAC Insulation” for ductwork insulation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal ductwork and
ductwork products.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code
- Steel,” for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, “Structural Welding Code - Aluminum,” for
aluminum supporting members, and AWS D9.1, “Sheet Metal Welding Code,” for duct joint
and seam welding.
B. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal
and Flexible” for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
C. NFPA Compliance:
1. NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.”
2. NFPA 90B, “Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.”
D. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of SMACNA
“HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group.
b. Johns Manville International, Inc.
c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
d. Owens Corning.
2. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent
erosion of glass fibers.
a. Thickness: 1 inch.
b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
c. Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smoke
developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.
e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
duct.
1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile, dead-load test
perpendicular to duct wall.
2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.
3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire hazard
classification of duct liner system.
2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term “sealant” is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 3
B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber-reinforced fabric.
C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable,
airtight seal.
D. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when
cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
E. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized
butyl sealant formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
F. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
G. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible” for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
3. Galvanized steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted
with zinc-chromate primer.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ducts.
2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure class.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 4
2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA’s
“HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”
B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using
manufacturer’s guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and joint
reinforcement.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Nexus Inc.
c. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
d. Ward Industries, Inc.
C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible,” Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b. Lockformer.
c. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
2. Duct Size: Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2 inch wg pressure class.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger
and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are
lined.
2.6 APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct
liner is prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts.
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding
12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding
18 inches longitudinally.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 5
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either
channel or “Z” profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the
following locations:
1. Fan discharges.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than
2500 fpm or where indicated.
2.7 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCT AND FITTING FABRICATION
A. Diameter as applied to flat oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round duct with a
circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat oval duct.
B. Round, Spiral Lock Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to
SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.”
C. Flat Oval, Spiral Lock Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts according to SMACNA’s “HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.” Fabricate ducts larger than 72 inches in
diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
a. Lindab Inc.
b. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
c. Midwest Spiro.
d. SEMCO Incorporated.
e. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
f. Tangent Air.
D. Duct Joints:
1. Ducts up to 20 inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling, sealed before
and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.
2. Ducts 21 to 72 inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint consisting of two
internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with gasket.
3. Ducts Larger than 72 inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per SMACNA
“HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” Figure 3-2.
4. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped, EPDM
rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system manufacturer’s
tolerances.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one
of the following:
1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2) Lindab Inc.
3) Midwest Spiro.
4) Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
5) Tangent Air.
5. Flat Oval Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of two flanges and one
synthetic rubber gasket.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one
of the following:
1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2) McGill AirFlow Corporation.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 6
3) Midwest Spiro.
4) SEMCO Incorporated.
5) Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
6) Tangent Air.
E. 90 Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal-seam straight ducts.
F. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and with no excess
material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.
G. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Bend radius of die-
formed, gored, and pleated elbows shall be 1-1/2 times duct diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with
SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,” unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 2 to plus 2 inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 36 inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
b. Ducts 37 to 50 inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
d. Ducts 62 to 84 inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 2 to 10 inch wg:
a. Ducts 3 to 26 inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.
b. Ducts 27 to 50 inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.
c. Ducts 52 to 60 inches in Diameter: 0.052 inch.
d. Ducts 62 to 84 inches in Diameter: 0.064 inch.
4. Flat Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as
longitudinal seam flat oval duct.
5. 90 Degree, 2 Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for material
handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space restrictions do not permit
using radius elbows. Fabricate with single thickness turning vanes.
6. Round Elbows 8 inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die formed elbows for 45 and
90 degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
nonstandard bend angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
7. Round Elbows 9 through 14 inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for
30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require mitered elbows. Fabricate
nonstandard bend angle configurations or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
8. Round Elbows Larger than 14 inches in Diameter and All Flat Oval Elbows: Fabricate
gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered elbows.
9. Die Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 inches in Diameter and All Pressures 0.040 inch
thick with 2 piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non elbow fittings specified above.
11. Flat Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal seam flat oval duct specified
above.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 7
12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 inches in Diameter and Pressures through
10 inch wg: 0.022 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Static Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:
1. Supply Ducts: 1-inch wg.
2. Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): 2-inch wg.
3. Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): 1-inch wg.
4. Supply Ducts (in Mechanical Equipment Rooms): 3-inch wg.
5. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
6. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible,” unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.
C. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
D. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of
3 screws in each coupling.
F. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions
unless specifically indicated.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire and smoke control dampers, lighting layouts, and
similar finished work.
K. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward
to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 8
M. Non Fire Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct
insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on
4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
N. Fire Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke
dampers are specified in Division 23 Section “Air Duct Accessories.” Firestopping materials
and installation methods are specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”
O. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow
SMACNA’s “Duct Cleanliness for New Construction.”
3.3 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible” for duct pressure class indicated.
1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints.
B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER
A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.” The duct size shown on the drawing is the free area of the lined duct. The sheet
metal duct size shall be increased to accommodate the duct liner thickness.
3.5 TEMPORARY CLOSURE
A. At ends of duct which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of
ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which
will prevent entrance of dust and debris until connections are to be completed.
3.6 WATER SEALING OF INTAKE AND EXHAUST/RELIEF PLENUMS
A. Contractor shall provide watertight seals for all ductwork seams at air intake plenums and
exhaust/relief plenums. Provide sealed drains and valved drain piping at bottom of plenums.
Bottom of air plenums shall be reinforced and sloped to the drain. Contractor shall provide duct
sealant procedure data as well as sealant manufacturer’s data to Engineer for review.
3.7 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.
C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
D. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 9
E. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
1. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section “Air
Duct Accessories.”
B. Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual” and prepare test reports:
1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing
and for compliance with test requirements.
2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section
being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system
design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.
Give seven days’ advance notice for testing.
3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round
and flat oval ducts, Leakage Class 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than
and equal to 2 inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for
pressure classes from 2 to 10 inch wg.
4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum
allowable.
PART 4 - SCHEDULE
4.1 SCHEDULE
A. Construct duct systems of following, except as otherwise noted on the drawing:
1. Square or rectangular section galvanized sheet metal:
a. Supply, return, toilet exhaust and general exhaust.
2. Square or rectangular section galvanized sheet metal lined duct:
a. Exhaust ductwork from building exit to 10 feet inside building.
b. Relief ductwork from building exit to 10 feet inside building.
c. Relief plenums (sides and top only).
3. Round or oval fabricated ducts:
a. Supply, return, toilet exhaust and general exhaust.
B. Outdoor duct system:
1. Exterior supply, return and exhaust.
END OF SECTION 233113
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 1
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Balancing dampers.
3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct mounting access doors.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Flexible ducts.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” for electric control, smoke
and fire/smoke dampers and damper actuators.
2. Division 28 Section “Fire Detection and Alarm” for duct-mounting smoke detectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications for each type of duct accessory, including
dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA) high pressure and low pressure duct
construction standards.
B. Industry Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to construction of
duct accessories, except as otherwise indicated.
C. UL Compliance:
1. Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories
(UL) Standard 555 “Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers”.
2. Construct, test, and label smoke dampers in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories
(UL) Standard 555S, “Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control
Systems”.
D. Comply with NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,” and
NFPA 90B, “Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and
having G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed
to view.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M.
D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish
for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8 inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. Airguide Corp.
3. Airstream Products Div., Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.
4. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc.
5. Arrow United Industries.
6. Cesco Inc.
7. Greenheck.
8. Imperial Damper and Louver Co., Inc.
9. Louvers & Dampers.
10. Nailor.
11. National Controlled Air.
12. Ruskin.
13. Safe Aire.
B. Description: Multiple-blade, parallel action gravity balanced, with center-pivoted blades of
maximum 6-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop,
steel ball bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static
pressure.
C. Frame: 0.063 inch thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.
D. Blades: 0.050 inch thick aluminum sheet.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 3
E. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
F. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
H. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
2.3 BALANCING DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. Airguide Corp.
3. Airstream Products Div., Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.
4. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc.
5. Arrow United Industries.
6. Cesco Inc.
7. Greenheck.
8. Imperial Damper and Louver Co., Inc.
9. Louvers & Dampers.
10. Nailor.
11. National Controlled Air.
12. Ruskin.
13. Safe Aire.
B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classes of 3 inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles
full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
C. Standard Balancing Dampers: Multiple or single blade, parallel or opposed blade design,
standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick,
with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to
walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064 inch thick, galvanized sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
4. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze, molded synthetic, or stainless-steel sleeve.
5. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
D. Jackshaft: 1 inch diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within pipe bearing assembly
mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple damper assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple damper assembly.
E. Damper Hardware: Zinc plated, die cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 inch thick zinc
plated steel, and a 3/4 inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating
rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 4
2.4 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible” for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
2.5 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. American Warming and Ventilating.
2. CESCO Products.
3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
5. Greenheck.
6. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
7. Nailor Industries Inc.
8. Ruskin Company.
9. Ventfabrics, Inc.
10. Ward Industries, Inc.
B. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
C. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include cam latches.
D. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
1. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a. Less than 12 inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.
b. Up to 18 inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Up to 24 by 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.
d. Sizes 24 by 48 inches and Larger: One additional hinge.
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2. Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Ventfabrics, Inc.
4. Ward Industries, Inc.
B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class 1.
C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to
two strips of 2-3/4 inch wide, 0.028 inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032 inch thick
aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.
D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 5
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.
2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2. Hart & Cooley, Inc.
3. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
B. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10 inch wg positive and 1.0 inch wg negative.
2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, “Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards,” for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized steel accessories
in galvanized steel and fibrous glass ducts, stainless steel accessories in stainless steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts where indicated.
D. Install balancing dampers in supply, return, and exhaust air branch ducts and ducts to individual
inlets and outlets so that the Testing and Balancing Contractor can complete balancing of the
system. Dampers in ductwork shall be installed as far as possible from inlet and outlet
locations.
E. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90o elbows in supply air systems, and elsewhere as
indicated.
F. Install access doors in ductwork adjacent to each item of equipment installed in ductwork,
including, but not limited to: smoke dampers, fire/smoke dampers, hydronic coils, variable
volume terminals, duct reheat coils, duct thermostats, static pressure sensors, and control
dampers. Access panel shall be of sufficient size for access to equipment and for proper
cleaning.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 6
G. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side,
except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.
H. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section “Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment.”
I. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
J. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with
loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
K. Install flexible ducts in accordance with Section III of SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible.” Maximum length for flexible ductwork is 6’-0” extended
length.
L. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of duct
accessories properly with other work.
M. Field Quality Control: Operate installed duct accessories to demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty
accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section “Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.”
END OF SECTION 233300
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
CEILING FANS
233443 - 1
SECTION 233443 – CEILING FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Types of ceiling fans required for the project include the following:
1. Ceiling Mounted Fan
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for ceiling fans, including specifications, capacity
ratings, fan performance, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and installation
instructions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. AMCA Compliance: Provide ceiling fans which have been tested and rated in accordance with
AMCA Standards, and bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
B. UL Compliance: Provide ceiling fans which are listed by UL and have UL label affixed.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of equipment supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING FANS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard pre-fabricated centrifugal direct-
driven ceiling mounted fan units of type and size indicated.
B. Motors shall comply with the requirements in Electrical Provisions for Mechanical Work.
C. Fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel.
D. Grill shall be constructed of aluminum.
E. Provide fan with backdraft damper.
F. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. Greenheck.
2. Loren Cook.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
CEILING FANS
233443 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF CEILING FANS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install ceiling fans level and plumb and in
accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized industry practices to
insure that ceiling fans serve their intended function.
B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and
retest.
END OF SECTION 233443
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS
233713 - 1
SECTION 233713 – GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling and wall mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B. Refer to diffuser, register and grille schedule on the drawings for base design type, model,
material, finish and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, “Standard
for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
1. Titus Products Div., Phillips Industries Inc.
2. Carnes.
3. E.H. Price.
4. J & J.
5. Krueger Mfg. Co.
6. Metal Aire.
7. Nailor.
8. Anemostat.
9. Tuttle & Bailey.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
“Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS
233713 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict
with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
D. For linear slot-type diffusers, install full-length supply air plenum boot, unless noted otherwise.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed
surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have
damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 233713
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
238126 - 1
SECTION 238126 – SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or
concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static
pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
split-system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
“Product Requirements.”
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2010, Section 5 - “Systems
and Equipment” and Section 7 - “Construction and Startup.”
D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-
2010, Section 6 - “Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning.”
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations specified in Division 07 Section “Roof Accessories.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
238126 - 2
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Daikin.
2. Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corporation.
3. Friedrich Air Conditioning Company.
4. Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.; HVAC Division.
5. Sanyo Fisher (U.S.A.) Corp.
6. Trane Company (The); Unitary Products Group.
7. York International Corp.
2.2 VRV WALL-MOUNTING, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by
Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.
1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2010.
2. Drain Pan and Drain Connection: Comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2010.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements with refractory ceramic
support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manual-reset
thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent
protection.
D. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal fan.
E. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section “Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
238126 - 3
1. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and
permanent lubrication.
F. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
2.3 VRV HEAT PUMP, AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable
panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.
Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Inverter driven variable speed scroll compressor. Hermetically sealed with
crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal-
and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Scroll.
2. Variable speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-
reset low-pressure switch.
3. Refrigerant: R-410A.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.
E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
G. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.
H. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
I. Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010, “Energy Standard for
Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Sections
“Instrumentation and Control for HVAC” and “Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls.”
B. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
C. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan,
with the following features:
1. Compressor time delay.
2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.
3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.
D. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
238126 - 4
E. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
1. Minimum Insulation Thickness: 1 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer’s standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in
Division 07 Section “Roof Accessories.” Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-
plated fasteners.
D. Install seismic restraints.
E. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static
deflection of 1 inch. Refer to Division 23 Section “Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and
Equipment.”
F. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component’s quick-connect fittings. Install
tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems.”
D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report
results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
238126 - 5
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
END OF SECTION 238126
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 - 1
SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.
3. Sleeve seals.
4. Grout.
5. Common electrical installation requirements.
6. Electrical demolition.
7. Touchup painting.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce
headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in
the building.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,
masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
D. Coordinate chases, slots, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building
structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.
E. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished
surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section
“Access Doors and Frames.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 - 2
F. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”
G. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and
systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful
interoperability.
H. Coordinate connecting electrical service to components furnished under other sections, include
connections for equipment specified in other Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated “wall pipe,” equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.
1. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no
side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches
(1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm),
thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
2.2 GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
2.3 TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer’s paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounting items.
C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom
consistent with these requirements.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 - 3
D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components
of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to
facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
F. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways
penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable,
unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed
surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”
J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable
penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
“Penetration Firestopping.”
K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 - 4
L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow
for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and
installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”
3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
A. For each electrical connection indicated or otherwise required, provide complete assembly of
materials, including but not necessarily limited to pressure connectors, terminals (lugs),
electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable insulating
tubing, cable ties, solderless wirenuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete
splices and terminations of types indicated.
B. Install in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written instructions and with recognized
industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA’s
“Standard of Installation” to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
3.5 DEMOLITION
A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or
disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal
capacity, quality, and functionality.
B. Identify and maintain services that pass through remodeled area and serve devices and
equipment outside the remodeled area.
C. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be
demolished, in their entirety.
D. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in
place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch
surface to match existing finish.
E. Remove demolished material from Project site.
F. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for
relocation.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260500 - 5
G. Removal of PCB Ballasts: Provide a suitable collection container at the project site. Check
transformers and the ballasts in all fluorescent fixtures being removed, rewired, or reinstalled
under this Contract. Some transformers and ballasts are clearly labeled to indicate whether they
do or do not contain PCBs. If a transformer or ballast is not labeled, assume that it contains
PCBs. Remove from the fixtures all ballasts known or assumed to contain PCBs and place them
in the designated collection container. Place hazardous material including, but not limited to,
mercury switches and lamps in the designated collection container. Pick up the container and
recycle or dispose of it legally. Comply with the requirements of federal, state, and local
pollution control agency guidelines for removal and disposal of fluorescent lamps.
H. Existing Utilities: Locate existing utilities in excavation areas. If utilities are indicated to
remain, support and protect services during excavation operations.
1. Remove existing underground utilities indicated to be removed.
2. Uncharted or Incorrectly Charted Utilities: Contact utility owner immediately for
instructions.
3. Maintain and protect existing building services which transit the area affected by
selective demolition.
I. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed
surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and
refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work. Replace damaged or faulty
components.
END OF SECTION 260500
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 1
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they
are constructed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.
2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
3. General Cable Corporation.
4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
5. Southwire Company.
6.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 2
B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN,
single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-
THWN, single conductors in raceway.
E. Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway
F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
raceway
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single
conductors in raceway.
H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
I. Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 3
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems.”
F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section “Identification
for Electrical Systems.”
G. Remove existing wire from raceways before pulling in new wire and cable.
H. Seal around cable penetrating fire rated elements.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side greater than 16
inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or
more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch
(3.5 mm).
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 4
E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and cable
unless sleeve seal is to be installed
I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.
J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to
Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”
K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to
Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”
L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing
units applied in coordination with roofing work.
M. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and
sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
N. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves. Size
sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section “Penetration
Firestopping.”
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors, for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 5
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 260519
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 1
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment,:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control test reports.
a.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Conductors: ASTM B 33.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,
with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 2
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad3/4 inch by 10 feet .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis
possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection
methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make
contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical
clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and
mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
6. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.
Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are
not acceptable.
7. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
8. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
9. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
10. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
C.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-
mounted electrical devices operating at or above 120 V. Bond conductor to each unit and to air
duct and connected metallic piping.
C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 3
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if
any.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so
vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building’s main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes,
using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using
one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed,
connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor
conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual
ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. 10 ohms.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 4
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 1
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the
applied force.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural
Welding Code - Steel.”
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section “Roof Accessories.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA-4.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer’s standard painted coating applied according to
MFMA-4.
5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
6. .
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 3
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for steel
shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in
diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for
1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems
above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and
RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 4
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)
thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs
less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for site-
fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.
3.4 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils
(0.05 mm).
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Painting Sections for cleaning and touchup
painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous
metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85904
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 1
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Raceways.
2. Fittings.
3. Boxes.
4. Enclosures.
5. Cabinets for electrical wiring.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension
system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to
ensure maximum headroom, working clearance, and access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers: Provide products that comply with requirements.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.
D. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85904
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 2
E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel or aluminum.
F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
G. Fittings for Conduit and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used,
and for application and environment in which installed.
1. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type.
H. .
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3. Arnco Corporation.
4. CANTEX Inc.
5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
6. Condux International, Inc.
7. ElecSYS, Inc.
8. Electri-Flex Co.
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B. RNC: NEMA TC 2.
C. LFNC: UL 1660.
D. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. EGS/Appleton Electric.
3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
4. Hoffman.
5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.
6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85904
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 3
13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
.
D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, with gasketed cover.
F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel.
G. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: For enclosure or cabinet components, provide manufacturer’s standard finish inside and
prime-coat finish ready for field painting on outside of enclosure or cabinet.
B. Finish: For enclosure or cabinet components, provide manufacturer’s standard finish applied to
interior and exterior of enclosures and cabinets before shipping.
2.5 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch
(1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85904
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 4
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
a.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Including but not limited
to raceways in the following locations:
a. Loading docks.
b. Corridors.
c. Mechanical rooms.
d. Stockrooms and warehouses.
e. Manufacturing facilities.
f. Generator rooms.
3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
6. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or
Communications Cable: EMT Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use
NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-
water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems.”
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
G. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85904
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 5
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
3. Change from ENT to RNC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor.
I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer’s written instructions.
J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end
of pull wire.
K. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for
recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission,
or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
L. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall.
M. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
N. Provide floor boxes with number of compartments required for services indicated.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving” for pipe less than 6 inches
(150 mm) in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving.”
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end
of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction
as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within
12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and
complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section “Earth
Moving.”
4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout the length of the elbow.
5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through the floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85904
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 6
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or
foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
3.4 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”
B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and no side
greater than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches
(1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness
shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway
unless sleeve seal is to be installed
I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to
Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and installation.
K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply
with Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”
L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type
flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements
are specified in Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85904
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 7
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 1
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
D. RMS: Root mean square.
E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage
suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and
manufacturers’ technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and
finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports including the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.Submit final versions after load
balancing.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 2
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
“Operation and Maintenance Data,” include the following:
1. Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of
panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
“Product Requirements.”
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not below -22 deg F (-30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F
(40 deg C).
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electrical service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect’s written
permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:
a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D.
B.
2.2 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING
A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
B. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with
front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip-unit circuit breakers shall have RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating
plug; and with the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral
limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on
opening of fuse compartment door.
6. GFCI Circuit Breakers for protection of personnel: Single- and two-pole configurations
with 5-mA trip sensitivity.
7. Ground Fault Protection for Equipment: Single- and two-pole configurations with
30-mA trip sensitivity.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 4
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and
number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup
and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section “Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.”
C. Mount top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts
uniformly flush with wall finish.
E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.
1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G. .
H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing
load balancing.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 26 Section “Identification for Electrical Systems.”
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain
approval before installing. Use a computer to create directory; handwritten directories are not
acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic
nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 5
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Rebalance and recheck
as necessary.
3.4 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 262416
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 1
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2. Twist-locking receptacles.
3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
4. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
5. Lighting Control Devices
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
D. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers’ packing
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one
source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and
associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 2
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers’ Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers’ names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when
device is tripped. Device shall fit in a 2-3/4 inch deep outlet box without an adapter.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; GF20.
b. Leviton; 6598.
c. Pass & Seymour; 2084.
C. Weather Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Listed Weather Resistant
with WR marking.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; WRVGF20.
b. Leviton; WR899.
2.4 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with
green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of
30 percent.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 3
2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
2.5 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way).
b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224
(four way).
c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four
way).
d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),
20AC4 (four way).
C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.
2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is “ON.”
D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cooper; 2221L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.
c. Leviton; 1221-2L.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.
2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
2.6 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. Refer to Drawings for lighting control system requirements. .
2.7 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws:
a. Metal with head color to match plate finish.
b. Stainless steel for stainless steel plates, aluminum plates and exterior applications.
c. Solid brass for brass plates.
d. Chrome plated steel for chrome plated plates.
e. Galvanized steel for galvanized plates.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: To be selected by architect.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel
B. Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in
“wet locations.”
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 4
C. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-
resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover that is weatherproof whether or not the
attachment plug cap is inserted.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: To Be Selected by Architect
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to ensure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by
riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show
signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
4. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. Remove any paint that accidentally
comes in contact with devices and assemblies.
5. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)
in length.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 5
6. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
7. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
8. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
9. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
10. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
B. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and
durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
3. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at
least six times.
4. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to
manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 6
6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
C. Replace damaged or defective components.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly
painted wall plates or devices.
END OF SECTION 262726
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 1
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2. Exit signs.
3. Lighting fixture supports.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
3. Ballast.
4. Energy-efficiency data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 2
C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
E. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
F. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is
indicated.
b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 EXIT SIGNS
A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size,
comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
2.4 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 26 Section “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems” for channel-
and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling
canopy. Finish same as fixture.
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount
a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless
steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each
fixture.
B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support
element.
1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate
not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from lighting fixture corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each
fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans
or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two
3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting
fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor
of 3.
C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables.”
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.
C. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
D. Tests: As follows:
1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.
2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation.
3. Verify normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
4. Report results in writing.
E. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure
until units operate properly.
F. Corrosive Fixtures: Replace during warranty period.
FIRE STATION #28 REMODEL
85094
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 4
3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation. Use methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 265100
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 1
SECTION 32 17 23
PAVERMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Traffic markings including symbols, directional arrows, lettering and safety and loading
zones
2. Parking-stall lines and related accessibility pavement markings
3. Pedestrian and related accessibility pavement markings
4. Fire lane markings
B. Related Sections
1. 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.2 ACRONYMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND DEFINITIONS
A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, as amended
1. ADA Standards - ADA Title II Regulations and the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible
Design
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM C 881 - Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete
2. ASTM D 788 - Classification System for Poly(Methyl Methacrylate) (PMMA) Molding
and Extrusion Compounds
C. SCAQMD - South Coast Air Qaulity Management District
1. SCAQMD-1113 - SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings
D. CALTrans - California Department of Transportation
1. CALTrans Manual - CALTrans Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices
2. CALTrans Specifications - CALTrans Standard Specifications
E. CBC - 2013 California Building Code (CCR Title 24, Part 2)
1. CBC-11 B - CBC Chapter 11 B, Access to Public Buildings, Public Accommodations,
Commercial Facilities and Publicly Funded Housing
F. Fed.Std I Fed.Spec - Federal Standard I Federal Specification
1. Fed.Std-595B - Colors Listed in Government Procurement
2. Fed.Spec TT-P-1952D - Paint, Traffic And Airfield Marking, Waterborne
G. MUTCD - Department of Transportation, Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices
H. SSPWC - Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittal
1. Product Data for each paint system product and accessory item including certifications of
the following:
a. VOC content
b. Distances from following material process locations to Site
1) raw material harvest, collection or extraction
2) product or component fabrication
3) final material manufacture, if different than component fabrication
2. Shop Drawings of traffic and parking markings
B. Record Submittals
1. Manufacturer's Application Instructions
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Paints and Coatings shall have VOC content within limits set by SCAQMD Regulations.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. Pavement markings for designated accessible parking spaces and related pedestrian
stripping shall conform to ADA Standards and CBC-11 B.
2. Traffic control pavement and curb markings shall be in accordance with SSPWC,
Sections 210-1.6 and 310-5.6.
3. Paint products shall dry to a finish as slip resistant as surrounding pavement.
C. Manufacturer: company with minimum 10-years' experience manufacturing traffic line paint
products for commercial projects similar in scale, complexity and quality to those required for
this Project.
D. Installer: company with minimum 6-years' experience painting traffic and related pavement
markings for commercial projects similar in scale, complexity and quality to those required for
this Project.
E. Field Samples
1. Provide field sample in form of < insert description >, illustrating coating [color] [colors],
width of stroke, thickness of application and dimensioning.
2. Location: acceptable to Architect.
3. Modify materials and methods of installation as required to obtain Architect's approval.
4. Document materials and methods used to obtain Architect's approval. Maintain at least
one copy of this documentation in a readily accessible location on Site while this work is
in progress.
5. Maintain access to and protect Field Samples from damage while this work is in progress.
6. Upon acceptance of related work, Field Samples in acceptable condition may remain as
part of the work.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 3
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original, sealed containers with labels legible and
intact.
1. Labels shall include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation and instructions for
mixing and reducing.
2. Inspect materials upon delivery for defects, missing, and non-complying items.
3. Make claims, or place orders to obtain proper materials in a timely manner; do not delay
the orderly progress of the work.
B. Store paint materials at ambient temperatures between 45- and 90-degrees-F, unless expressly
permitted otherwise in manufacturer's printed instructions.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. For each color of pavement marking paint furnish, as Extra Material, [a five-gallon unopened]
[a quantity equal to approximately 3-percent of quantity required for its installation rounded up
to next higher five-gallon] container of the paint.
1. Extra Materials shall be from same production run as installed materials.
2. In addition to manufacturer's label, label each container for color, dates and locations of
related installations and shelf life.
3. Deliver Extra Materials to Owner as directed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessible parking spaces shall be located as near as practical to a primary entrance and shall be
marked according to CBC Sections 11B-502.3.4.
B. Surface slopes of accessible parking spaces and access aisles shall be the minimum possible and
shall not exceed 2% slope in any direction. CBC Section 11B-502.4.
C. Loading and unloading access aisle shall be marked by a border painted blue. Within the blue
border, hatched lines a maximum of 36" on center shall be painted a color contrasting with the
parking surface, preferable blue or white. CBC Figures 11B -502.3.
D. When blue color is used, it shall conform to Color No. 15090 per Federal Standard 595B.
E. Painted lines and markings on pavement are recommended to be 3" wide minimum.
2.2 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers. Products of following manufacturers form basis of design and
quality intended for this Project.
1. Dunn-Edwards Corporation, Los Angeles, CA
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 4
2. Glidden Professional, Commerce, CA
3. Frazee Paint and Wallcovering, Inc., Anaheim, CA
4. The Sherwin-Williams Company, Santa Ana, CA
5. Vista Paint, Fullerton, CA.
6. Or equal, approved in accordance with Division 01 requirements for substitutions.
B. Traffic Line Paint: lead and chromate free, ready mixed, waterbourne emulsion type, complying
with Fed. Spec TT-P-1952E, Type I (for use under normal conditions) Type II (for use under
adverse conditions), with drying time of less than 45 minutes. Furnish paints in containers of at
least 18.9 L (5 gallons).
1. Colors
a. Accessible Markings for Parking Stalls, Passenger Drop-Off Area and Related
Markings: Fed. Std 595B, Color No. 15090, Blue, except that International Symbol
of Access and NO PARKING notices marked on pavement shall be white.
b. Other Parking Stall Lines and Traffic Control markings: [white] [yellow].
c. Fire Lane markings: red with white lettering.
d. Temporary Parking, markings: green with white lettering.
e. Passenger / Postal Loading Zones, markings: white with black lettering.
f. Commercial Loading Zone and Carpool Parking Space markings: yellow with
black lettering.
2. Acceptable Products
a. Dunn-Edwards, Vin-L-Stripe Traffic Marking Paint, W801, acrylic.
b. ICI, Traffic Paint 4800 Series, acrylic.
c. Frazee, No. 506 Traffic Line Paint
d. Vista Paint: 6900 (White), 6901 (Yellow)Traffic Paint
e. Pervo, Pervo Stripe Series 6000
f. Or equal
C. Reflective Paint: SSPWC Table 210-1.6.1 (A) and 210-1.6.5 rapid dry paint.
1. Reflective material: glass beads added to surface of final coat of paint prior to setting.
Glass beads shall conform to Calif. State Specification 8010-004(type II), applied
mechanically at 8 lbs of beads per gallon of paint, dispensed by device developed for the
purpose.
a. For thermoplastic paint glass beads may be added to directly to the paint per
2101.6.1 with additionally adding 1 pound of beads per gallon.
2. Color: White, Yellow, or Black per Cal Trans Manual.
3. Acceptable Products: by Emedco Buffalo, NY, or equal. ]
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Raised Pavement Markers: CALTrans Manual, Section 85, [Type A-non-reflective white] [Type
AY-non-reflective yellow], ceramic disks (Bott's Dots).
B. Raised Pavement Markers: rectangular, raised, 4- by 4- by 3/4-inch, ASTM 0 788, Grade 8
high-impact, plastic highway pavement markers with beveled edges and dual prismatic,
reflective lenses.
1. Reflector Color: [white] [amber] except furnish blue for fire hydrant marker location.
2. Acceptable Products: Hy-Viz, or equal.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 5
C. Adhesive: ASTM C 881, Type IV Grade, 3, Class B epoxy type, rapid set, CALTrans Manual,
Sections 85-1.055 and 95-2.04.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by product manufacturer.
B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning installation
means acceptance of existing conditions including the preparatory work of others, if any.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean pavement/concrete in immediate vicinity of markings as directed by paint manufacturer.
1. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of dust, dirt, grease, oil, water or other
contaminates.
2. Existing lines to be removed shall be sandblasted clean.
B. Do not apply traffic paint until seal coat has been in place minimum of 10 days.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints by machine spray, airless sprayer, roller or brush to provide a minimum OFT of 15
mils. Precise edges are required; no overspray will be accepted.
1. Striping: single, 4 inch wide lines, unless double lines are shown on drawings.
B. Perform Work in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and with SSPWC Section 3105.6.8.
1. Striping, pavement markings and curb markings shall be in accordance with SSPWC,
Sections 210-1.6 and 310-5.6 and accessibility requirements, where applicable.
2. Passenger Loading Zone. Paint accessible passenger transfer area as indicated.
C. Painted lines and markings on pavement shall be 4 inches minimum wide and blue In color
equal to color No. 15090 per Federal Standard 595B.
D. At Fire Lanes paint curbs, or if there is no curb, paint 6 inch red stripe and let dry. Then stencil
4-inch high lettering reading NO PARKING - FIRE LANE at maximum 20 feet on center on
painted curb or stripe, as applicable.
E. At Temporary Parking, paint curbs and let dry. Then, stencil 4-inch lettering that reads
TEMPORARY PARKING 20 MINUTES centered in each parking space.
F. At Loading Zone, paint curbs and let dry. Then, stencil 4-inch high lettering that reads
LOADING ZONE - NO PARKING at maximum 30 feet on center on painted curb.
G. At Carpool Parking Spaces, paint Wheel-stops and let dry. Then, stencil 3-inch high lettering
that reads CARPOOL PARKING ONLY.
City of Glendale Fire Department Project #17052.01
Fire Station No. 28 Renovation
Construction Documents
PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 6
3.4 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Remove any paint that demonstrates evidence of checking, cracking, peeling, discoloration, lack
of bonding or poor coverage. Misplaced lines shall be completely removed by paint remover or
wet abrasive-blasting in accordance with SSPWC, Section 310.5.6.3. Painting over misplaced
lines will not be permitted. Provide new complying work without claim for change in Contract
Sum or Schedule.
END OF SECTION
CITY OF GLENDALE FIRE DEPARTMENT
FIRE STATION NO. 28 RENOVATION
GLENDALE, CALIFORNIA
EXHIBIT A
TEST REPORT: ASBETOS ANALYSIS OF BULK MATERIALS
TEST REPORT: LEAD IN PAINT CHIPS COLLECTION DATE: 06/06/2019
LA Testing520 Mission Street South Pasadena, CA 91030
Tel/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982
http://www.LATesting.com / [email protected]
321913035LA Testing Order:
Customer ID: 32IHMI62
Customer PO:
Project ID:
Attention: Phone:Mark Hammer (626) 447-5237
Fax:IHM, Inc. (626) 447-3486
Received Date:122A E. Foothill Blvd., #330 06/07/2019 11:00 AM
Analysis Date:Arcadia, CA 91006 06/10/2019
Collected Date: 06/06/2019
Project: 1918.02 Fire Sta 28
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/M4-82-020 Modified Method using Polarized
Light Microscopy
Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous
Non-Asbestos Asbestos
% Type
F28-ASB-1A-Roof
Sheeting
321913035-0001
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)90%Glass10%Gray/Black
Fibrous
Heterogeneous
Roof sheeting
F28-ASB-1A-Tar
321913035-0001A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof sheeting
F28-ASB-1B-Roof
Sheeting
321913035-0002
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)90%Glass10%Gray/Black
Fibrous
Heterogeneous
Roof sheeting
F28-ASB-1B-Tar
321913035-0002A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof sheeting
F28-ASB-1C-Roof
Sheeting
321913035-0003
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)90%Glass10%Gray/Black
Fibrous
Heterogeneous
Roof sheeting
F28-ASB-1C-Tar
321913035-0003A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof sheeting
F28-ASB-2A-Felt
321913035-0004
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Glass20%Black
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
F28-ASB-2A-Tar
321913035-0004A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
F28-ASB-2B-Felt
321913035-0005
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Glass20%Black
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
F28-ASB-2B-Tar
321913035-0005A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
F28-ASB-2C-Felt
321913035-0006
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Glass20%Black
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
F28-ASB-2C-Tar
321913035-0006A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
F28-ASB-3A-Felt
321913035-0007
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Glass20%Black
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
F28-ASB-3A-Insulation
321913035-0007A
None DetectedPerlite
Non-fibrous (Other)
20%
10%
Cellulose70%Gray
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
F28-ASB-3B-Felt
321913035-0008
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Glass20%Black
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
Initial report from: 06/11/2019 08:46:37
Page 1 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 6/11/2019 8:47 AM
LA Testing520 Mission Street South Pasadena, CA 91030
Tel/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982
http://www.LATesting.com / [email protected]
321913035LA Testing Order:
Customer ID: 32IHMI62
Customer PO:
Project ID:
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/M4-82-020 Modified Method using Polarized
Light Microscopy
Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous
Non-Asbestos Asbestos
% Type
F28-ASB-3B-Insulation
321913035-0008A
None DetectedPerlite
Non-fibrous (Other)
20%
10%
Cellulose70%Gray
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
F28-ASB-3C-Felt
321913035-0009
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Glass20%Black
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
No insulation present
F28-ASB-3C-Tar
321913035-0009A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof felt
F28-ASB-4A
321913035-0010
None DetectedPerlite
Non-fibrous (Other)
20%
10%
Cellulose70%Gray
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Insulation board
F28-ASB-4B
321913035-0011
None DetectedPerlite
Non-fibrous (Other)
20%
10%
Cellulose70%Gray
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Insulation board
F28-ASB-4C
321913035-0012
None DetectedPerlite
Non-fibrous (Other)
20%
10%
Cellulose70%Gray
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Insulation board
F28-ASB-5A-Coating
321913035-0013
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof mastic
F28-ASB-5A-Mastic
321913035-0013A
12% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)73%Cellulose15%Black
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof mastic
F28-ASB-5B-Coating
321913035-0014
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof mastic
F28-ASB-5B-Mastic
321913035-0014A
15% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)85%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof mastic
F28-ASB-5C-Coating
321913035-0015
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Beige
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof mastic
F28-ASB-5C-Mastic
321913035-0015A
12% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)68%Cellulose20%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Roof mastic
F28-ASB-6A-Insulation
321913035-0016
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Pipe insulation,
gummy
F28-ASB-6A-Gummy
321913035-0016A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Pipe insulation,
gummy
F28-ASB-6B-Insulation
321913035-0017
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Pipe insulation,
gummy
F28-ASB-6B-Gummy
321913035-0017A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Pipe insulation,
gummy
F28-ASB-6C-Insulation
321913035-0018
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Pipe insulation,
gummy
F28-ASB-6C-Gummy 1
321913035-0018A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Cellulose20%Gray
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Pipe insulation,
gummy
Initial report from: 06/11/2019 08:46:37
Page 2 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 6/11/2019 8:47 AM
LA Testing520 Mission Street South Pasadena, CA 91030
Tel/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982
http://www.LATesting.com / [email protected]
321913035LA Testing Order:
Customer ID: 32IHMI62
Customer PO:
Project ID:
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/M4-82-020 Modified Method using Polarized
Light Microscopy
Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous
Non-Asbestos Asbestos
% Type
F28-ASB-6C-Gummy 2
321913035-0018B
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Pipe insulation,
gummy
F28-ASB-7A
321913035-0019
<1% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Window putty
F28-ASB-7B
321913035-0020
<1% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Window putty
F28-ASB-7C
321913035-0021
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray/White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Window putty
F28-ASB-8
321913035-0022
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)35%Cellulose65%Black
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Vapor barrier
F28-ASB-9A
321913035-0023
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)78%Cellulose
Glass
20%
2%
Brown/White
Fibrous
Heterogeneous
Drywall
F28-ASB-9B
321913035-0024
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)78%Cellulose
Glass
20%
2%
Brown/White
Fibrous
Heterogeneous
Drywall
F28-ASB-9C
321913035-0025
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)78%Cellulose
Glass
20%
2%
Brown/White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Drywall
F28-ASB-10A-Tape
321913035-0026
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)2%Cellulose98%Brown
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Seam tape/joint
compound
F28-ASB-10A-Joint
Compound
321913035-0026A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Seam tape/joint
compound
F28-ASB-10A-Mastic
321913035-0026B
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Seam tape/joint
compound
F28-ASB-10B-Tape
321913035-0027
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)2%Cellulose98%Brown
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Seam tape/joint
compound
F28-ASB-10B-Joint
Compound
321913035-0027A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Seam tape/joint
compound
F28-ASB-10B-Mastic 1
321913035-0027B
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Seam tape/joint
compound
F28-ASB-10B-Mastic 2
321913035-0027C
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Seam tape/joint
compound
F28-ASB-10B- Drywall
321913035-0027D
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)95%Cellulose
Glass
3%
2%
White
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Seam tape/joint
compound
F28-ASB-10C-Tape
321913035-0028
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)2%Cellulose98%Brown
Fibrous
Homogeneous
Seam tape/joint
compound
Insufficient mastic
F28-ASB-10C-Joint
Compound
321913035-0028A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Seam tape/joint
compound
Initial report from: 06/11/2019 08:46:37
Page 3 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 6/11/2019 8:47 AM
LA Testing520 Mission Street South Pasadena, CA 91030
Tel/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982
http://www.LATesting.com / [email protected]
321913035LA Testing Order:
Customer ID: 32IHMI62
Customer PO:
Project ID:
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/M4-82-020 Modified Method using Polarized
Light Microscopy
Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous
Non-Asbestos Asbestos
% Type
F28-ASB-11A-Skim
Coat
321913035-0029
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Plaster w/skim coat &
button board
No button board present for analysis.
F28-ASB-11A-Plaster
321913035-0029A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Plaster w/skim coat &
button board
F28-ASB-11B-Skim
Coat
321913035-0030
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Plaster w/skim coat &
button board
F28-ASB-11B-Plaster
321913035-0030A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Plaster w/skim coat &
button board
F28-ASB-11B-Button
Board
321913035-0030B
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)80%Cellulose20%Brown/White
Fibrous
Heterogeneous
Plaster w/skim coat &
button board
F28-ASB-11C-Skim
Coat
321913035-0031
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Plaster w/skim coat &
button board
F28-ASB-11C-Plaster
321913035-0031A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Gray
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Plaster w/skim coat &
button board
F28-ASB-12A-Floor Tile
321913035-0032
11% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)89%Brown
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Floor tile, 9x9 &
mastic
F28-ASB-12A-Mastic 1
321913035-0032A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Floor tile, 9x9 &
mastic
F28-ASB-12A-Mastic 2
321913035-0032B
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow/Green
Non-Fibrous
Heterogeneous
Floor tile, 9x9 &
mastic
F28-ASB-12B-Floor Tile
321913035-0033
11% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)89%Brown
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Floor tile, 9x9 &
mastic
F28-ASB-12B-Mastic 1
321913035-0033A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Floor tile, 9x9 &
mastic
F28-ASB-12B-Mastic 2
321913035-0033B
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow/Green
Non-Fibrous
Heterogeneous
Floor tile, 9x9 &
mastic
F28-ASB-12C-Floor Tile
321913035-0034
12% ChrysotileNon-fibrous (Other)88%Brown
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Floor tile, 9x9 &
mastic
F28-ASB-12C-Mastic 1
321913035-0034A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Floor tile, 9x9 &
mastic
F28-ASB-12C-Mastic 2
321913035-0034B
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Yellow/Green
Non-Fibrous
Heterogeneous
Floor tile, 9x9 &
mastic
F28-ASB-13A-Cove
Base
321913035-0035
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Cove base & mastic
Initial report from: 06/11/2019 08:46:37
Page 4 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 6/11/2019 8:47 AM
LA Testing520 Mission Street South Pasadena, CA 91030
Tel/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982
http://www.LATesting.com / [email protected]
321913035LA Testing Order:
Customer ID: 32IHMI62
Customer PO:
Project ID:
Test Report: Asbestos Analysis of Bulk Materials via EPA 600/M4-82-020 Modified Method using Polarized
Light Microscopy
Sample Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-Fibrous
Non-Asbestos Asbestos
% Type
F28-ASB-13A-Mastic
321913035-0035A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Cove base & mastic
F28-ASB-13B-Cove
Base
321913035-0036
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Cove base & mastic
F28-ASB-13B-Mastic
321913035-0036A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Cove base & mastic
F28-ASB-13C-Cove
Base
321913035-0037
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%Black
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Cove base & mastic
F28-ASB-13C-Mastic
321913035-0037A
None DetectedNon-fibrous (Other)100%White
Non-Fibrous
Homogeneous
Cove base & mastic
Analyst(s)
Olivia Santiago (50)
Sydney Wittman (23)
Jerry Drapala Ph.D, Laboratory Manager
or Other Approved Signatory
EMSL maintains liability limited to cost of analysis . The above analyses were performed in general compliance with Appendix E to Subpart E of 40 CFR (previously EPA 600/M4-82-020 "Interim
Method"), but augmented with procedures outlined in the 1993 ("final") version of the method. This report relates only to the samples reported above, and may not be reproduced, except in full, without
written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities or analytical method limitations . Interpretation and use of test results are the responsibility of the client. All
samples received in acceptable condition unless otherwise noted. This report must not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST or any agency of
the federal government. EMSL recommends gravimetric reduction for all non -friable organically bound materials prior to analysis. Estimation of uncertainty is available on request.
Samples analyzed by LA Testing South Pasadena, CA NVLAP Lab Code 200232-0, CA ELAP 2283
Initial report from: 06/11/2019 08:46:37
Page 5 of 5ASB_PLM_0008_0001 - 1.78 Printed: 6/11/2019 8:47 AM
LA Testing520 Mission Street, South Pasadena, CA 91030Phone/Fax: (323) 254-9960 / (323) 254-9982http://www.LATesting.com [email protected]
321913035CustomerID: 32IHMI62CustomerPO:ProjectID:
LA Testing Order:
Attn: Mark HammerIHM, Inc.122A E. Foothill Blvd., #330Arcadia, CA 91006
Received: 06/07/19 11:00 AM
1918.02 Fire Sta 28
Fax: (626) 447-3486Phone: (626) 447-5237
Project:
6/11/2019Analysis Date:6/6/2019Collected:
SAMPLE ID APPEARANCE NON- ASBESTOS % NON-FIBROUS
(%) Matrix Organic Acid
ASBESTOS % TYPESDESCRIPTION
NON- ASBESTOS % Fibrous
Test Report: Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) - Point Count Performed by EPA M4-82-020 ModifiedMethod with Gravimetric Reduction and 1000 Point Count
F28-ASB-7A321913035-0019
Gray/White 13.0Window puttyNon-FibrousHomogeneous
75.1 Chrysotile<0.1Non-fibrous (other)12.0
F28-ASB-7B321913035-0020
Gray/White 16.5Window puttyNon-FibrousHomogeneous
70.6 Chrysotile<0.1Non-fibrous (other)12.9
Jerry Drapala Ph.D, Laboratory Manageror other approved signatory
Test Report PLMPCGrav-7.26.0 Printed: 6/12/2019 9:12:03 AM 1
Analyst(s)
THIS IS THE LAST PAGE OF THE REPORT.
Disclaimers: Some samples may contain asbestos fibers present in dimensions below PLM resolution limits. LA Testing suggests that samples reported as <0.1% or none detected undergo additional analysis via TEM. The above test report relates only to the items tested. This report may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by LA Testing. This report must not be used to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the United States Government. LA Testing bears no responsibility for sample collection activities, analytical method limitations, or the accuracy of results when requested to separate layer samples. LA Testing liability is limited to the cost of sample analysis. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted.Samples analyzed by LA Testing South Pasadena, CA
Olivia Santiago (2)
Initial report from 06/11/2019 08:56:45
ConcentrationAnalyzed Weight RDL LeadClient SampleDescription Collected
Test Report: Lead in Paint Chips by Flame AAS (SW 846 3050B/7000B)*
LA Testing5431 Industrial Drive, Huntington Beach, CA 92649Phone/Fax: (714) 828-4999 / (714) 828-4944http://www.LATesting.com [email protected]
Attn: Mark HammerIHM, Inc.122A E. Foothill Blvd., #330Arcadia, CA 91006
Received: 06/07/19 1:30 PM
1918.02 / Fire Sta 28
Fax: (626) 447-3486Phone: (626) 447-5237
Project:
6/6/2019Collected:
331912014CustomerID: 32IHMI62CustomerPO:ProjectID:
LA Testing Order:
Site: Eaves, blue paint3800 ppm6/10/2019 0.294 g
331912014-00011606/6/2019F28-PB-1 ppm
Site: Window frame, beige paint4500 ppm6/10/2019 0.281 g
331912014-00021606/6/2019F28-PB-2 ppm
Site: Wall, beige paint830 ppm6/10/2019 0.294 g
331912014-0003806/6/2019F28-PB-3 ppm
Site: Wall, gray paint220 ppm6/10/2019 0.282 g
331912014-0004806/6/2019F28-PB-4 ppm
Site: Wall, tan paint13000 ppm6/10/2019 0.294 g
331912014-00054006/6/2019F28-PB-5 ppm
Site: Door jamb, brown paint3300 ppm6/10/2019 0.275 g
331912014-0006806/6/2019F28-PB-6 ppm
Site: Wall, beige paint1900 ppm6/10/2019 0.263 g
331912014-0007806/6/2019F28-PB-7 ppm
Site: Ceramic tile, tan11000 ppm6/10/2019 0.296 g
331912014-00084006/6/2019F28-PB-8 ppm
Site: Floor, brown580 ppm6/10/2019 0.28 g
331912014-0009806/6/2019F28-PB-9 ppm
Report revised for ppm concentration.
Page 1 of 1Test Report PB w/RDL-2.0.0.0 Printed: 6/11/2019 11:50:05 AM
Michael Chapman, Laboratory Manageror other approved signatory
*Analysis following Lead in Paint by EMSL SOP/Determination of Environmental Lead by FLAA. Reporting limit is 0.010 % wt based on the minimum sample weight per our SOP. Unless noted, results in this report are not blank corrected. This report relates only to the samples reported above and may not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval by EMSL. EMSL bears no responsibility for sample collection activities. Samples received in good condition unless otherwise noted. "<" (less than) result signifies that the analyte was not detected at or above the reporting limit. Measurement of uncertainty is available upon request. The QC data associated with the sample results included in this report meet the recovery and precision requirements unless specifically indicated otherwise. Definitions of modifications are available upon request.Samples analyzed by LA Testing Huntington Beach, CA AIHA-LAP, LLC--ELLAP Accredited #101650, CA ELAP 1406
Report Amended: 06/11/2019 11:50:05 Replaces the Inital Report 06/10/2019 12:15:13. Reason Code: Client-Other (see report comment)